Home

2755-833, DS/DD Ser.B Bar Code Decoders User Manual

1. 1 0 Board Wire modules to 1 0 Modules external equipment O MODI MOD2 MOD3 MOD4 MOD5 MOD6 MOD7 MOD8 O using conduit or the NEMA Type 4 Connector MOD8 accepts Kit and Cables input or output module 12V DC Power Hold Down w Max screws 1 8 for use with input Module 12 9 5 5 module in position Pull Apart 12 V 8 Connectors 8 1o p q g Q s DC O F F F F F 1 bos 1 fe Locknut gt TTH Locknut e N 1 0 W i I O Connector Factory Installed 1 0 Connector Wiring ed PA RI BI BS he BS BS 0 g hon ii r I gt Red Black 4 8 Publication 2755 833 4 22 Installing the Decoder Installing Conduit Hubs NEMA Type 4 Decoder Conduit O Ring utside Enclosure Pa Enclosure Bulletin 1490 Conduit Connector Hub Hole Locknut SE Publication 2755 833 Use the Bulletin 1490 N1 conduit hub with the NEMA Type 4 decoder to maintain environmentally sealed connections at conduit entrances The NEMA Type 1 and Type 4 decoders accept Catalog Number 1490 N1 conduit hubs for a 7 g inch hole size and inch conduit Conduit Holes The conduit hubs
2. 213 4 5 6 7 8f 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 01010710 0 fe l e Mm3fle 1 olo olo 0 e e fe li o3fe 1 olo olo 0 e e fle il3 e f gt 0 0 0 0 0 e e e 1 s3 e 1 olo olo 0 e e le fi o3fe 1 0 010 0 1 3 10 fe lee Mm EILEEN ololololol3 lo e e fe li fs3fe 1 ololololol2 lo elel li 3 ololololol2 lo e e fle le fi s3fe 1 ololololol lo efejfele fi s3fe 1 0 010 01 1 3 1011 fe lee Mm EENEN 1l ololololol3 lol li lejle e e e elilizfe l 12 olololololz2loli e le e e elil3 f f gt 13 ololololol l2lo lo elo o jo fi ls3 1 14 olololololilol l ol lejle e e elilizf e Tinted cells in this table show location of indicator arrow greater than symbol Cells are not highlighted on screen Note that the numbers displayed on the terminal during processing do not change as loading progresses Only the greater than symbol changes moving as necessary to indicate the next scheduled discrete activation Note also that the value in each vertical output column has meaning only in relation to the other values on the same horizontal match entry row To find the percentage of cases in which a given loading value will fire simply divide that value by the sum the values for that match then multiply by 100 0 0 0 0 1 3 0 1 5 In the example above discretes 5 and 8 will each fire 20 of the time 1 5 100 while discrete
3. Command CF130 Parameters 029 Command Parameters Parameter Function Values asi Set Code 128 FNC1 return 029 GS group value to 1Dh 029 decimal separator Response 00CR 00 command complete response code CR end of message control code for Carriage Return Publication 2755 833 ASCII Host Commands 15 15 CV Code Verification List Command Format CVaabbbb Function Defines numeric values for specific data locations of a Pharma Code bar code symbol Parameters aabbbb Command Parameters Parameter Function Valid Values 00 to 16 aa Field location 00 means clear Code Verification List all 16 locations 0000 0007 to 8190 bbbb Pharma Code data value 0000 clears data value at specified location Response rr lt end gt rr response code lt end gt end of message control code Example Command CV011122 Parameters 011122 Command i Parameters Parameter Function Valid Values aa Field location 01 bbbb Pharma C ode data value 1122 Response 00CR 00 command complete response code CR end of message control code for Carriage Return Publication 2755 833 15 16 ASCII Host Commands CP Configure Pharma Code Symbology Command Format CPabccddeefgg Function Enables the Pharma Code symbology and configures parameters of the symbology Parameters abccddeefgg Command Parameter Function Valid Values Parameters 0 No a Enabl
4. 000000 Decoder Performance Message 3 displays on line2 1 NO READ 00000 You must consider the operating mode of the LCD when displaying data If scrolling is disabled the LCD operates as a 1 line x 40 character display Any data that exceeds 40 characters is truncated If scrolling is enabled the LCD operates as a 2 line x 20 character display Any data that exceeds 20 characters is truncated Publication 2755 833 9 4 Configuration AUX and LCD Display Parameters Publication 2755 833 Position Bar Code Strings Field Type Options 0 through 40 0 Edit Numeric Defines the character position at which to start displaying the bar code data The default of 0 disables the display of bar code data To start the bar code data display at a specific position enter a starting character position between 1 and 40 For example to start the display at character position 1 enter 1 Position Decoder Performance Field Type Options 0 through 40 0 Edit Numeric Defines the character position at which to start displaying the decoder performance values for Scanner A and for DD decoders Scanner B The performance indicator displays one value for each scanner Each is left justified and can be a value up to 100 For DD decoders the first value applies to Scanner A the second value applies to Scanner B The default of 0 disables the display of this data To determine the starting position for decoder p
5. numeric A character set that includes only the numbers as contrasted to alphanumeric which includes both letters and numerals O orientation The alignment of bars and spaces the the scanner Often referred to as vertical picket fence or horizontal ladder Glossary G 7 output counter A counter that is associated with each output condition The counter increments by 1 each time the condition occurs overhead The fixed number of characters required for start stop and checking in a given symbol For example a symbol requiring a start stop and two check characters contains four characters of overhead To encode three characters of data seven characters are required P PCCC Acronym for Programmable Controller Communications Commands A set of commands used to communicate with Allen Bradley programmable controllers percent good reads The number of successful reads per 100 attempts to read a particular symbol parity bit An additional non data bit attached to a binary word to provide a check of the data integrity by making the sum of the number of ones in a word always even or odd picket fence code A code pattern in which the direction of travel of the symbol is perpendicular to the bars and spaces of the code R RS232 RS422 RS485 Electrical standards for data communications read An output condition in which an entire package is correctly decoded In the continuous decode modes read and valid
6. 2755 DD1P DD4P Bar Code Decoder Copyright 1992 Allen Bradley Company Inc CONFIGURATION 1 Symbo logy 2 Scanner Control Primary Match Table Discrete 1 0 3 Extended Match Table and Counters 4 Aux and LCD Display Format 5 Host Message Replacement Rules Host Message Format Host Communications Aux Terminal Data Entry Display System A Bar Code Strings C Reset Status and Primary Counters B Status and Primary Counters D Reset Extended Match Counters E Restart System F Select Language G Save Configuration Press 1 8 A G or ESC This menu displays all of the operations you can perform including Configuration functions Display functions and System functions Publication 2755 833 5 4 Introduction to AUX Terminal Configuration Configuration Functions Publication 2755 833 Select an operation by pressing a number key from 1 to 8 or A to G Press Esc to return to the previous screen Each operation is described in the sections that follow The eight numbered options on the Select Operation menu access configuration functions Symbology Scanner Control Primary Match Table Discrete I O Extended Match Table and Counters Aux and LCD Display Format Host Message Replacement Rules Host Message Format Host Communications Aux Terminal Data Entry FN ANN RA UN M If you select one of these options while the discrete outputs are enabled the following caution message displays
7. Confirm Entry Field Type Options No Yes Select Specifies whether you are required to confirm a keyboard entry by typing the data a second time The default is No confirmation is not required Select Yes to require that data entered at the keyboard be entered a second time Data must be entered twice consecutively in exactly the same way before it is sent to the host Entering the data twice helps ensure data integrity Errors are more likely to occur with data that is manually entered than scanned but it is unlikely that one will make identical typing errors in succession Simply press ENTER twice in succession to send no message with the end message character Publication 2755 833 13 4 Configuration AUX Terminal Data Entry Publication 2755 833 AUX Data Format Field Type Options Unformatted Select Host Format Controls the format of data sent to the host from the keyboard The default is Unformatted the data with the AUX Source ID prefix if defined is sent in the same form it was entered Select Host Format to send the data in the host message format set by the parameters on the Host Message Format configuration screen The host format packages the manually entered data as if it were scanned The source identifier for the AUX terminal if defined will distinguish manually entered data from scanned data If Send Symbology is enabled 00 will be sent for data entered at the AUX ter
8. If the single character commands do not use these uppercase characters you do not have t start command sequence For example if N is used as the NAK command then it would b impossible to send the NR command without preceding it with the ESC start command Tf n is used instead then no start command sequence would be necessary to send an NR cc Therefore we recommend using only lowercase letters for single character command Refer to Chapter 15 for additional information Configuration Host Communications 12 5 You must define ACK and NAK characters to enable ACK NAK protocol with the host ACK NAK protocol only applies to bar code data sent fo the host It is typically used with the transmission check to provide error detection You can also use ACK NAK protocol to provide flow control Start Scan Character Field Type Options 0 through 255 255 None Edit ASCII This parameter is used with the stop scan character and only applies when the Decode Mode is set to Host Defines the character that tells the scanner s to start scanning There is a field for both Scanner A and if present Scanner B The default is None which means a start scan character is not defined Stop Scan Character Field Type Options 0 through 255 255 None Edit ASCII This parameter is used with the start scan character and only applies when the Decode Mode is set to Host Defines the character that tells the scanner s to
9. Setting Up Terminals D 3 DEC VT100 Terminal Follow these steps if using a DEC VT100 terminal 1 Construct a cable to connect the VT100 to the decoder Use a Belden 8303 Alpha 45123 or equivalent type of cable Use the following connector pinouts Male 19 pin NEMA Type 4 or Female 25 pin Female 25 pin D Shell Connector NEMA NEMA Type4 Type l eNO Decoder Terminal Note Connect shield to shell of cable connectors at both ends 2 Plug terminal into power supply 3 Power on terminal 4 Enter Set Up B on terminal The following figure shows one setup SETUP B TO EXIT PRESS SET UP 10101 20011 30000 40010 TSPEED9600 R SPEED 9600 Nusa Block l xounorF i it Don t Care Ea Hz ar Dark E New Line Off 8 Bits Don t Care Don t Care Wrap Off Parity Off Don t Care Don t Care Don tCare Don t Care 5 You are now ready to configure the decoder See Chapter 5 Publication 2755 833 D 4 Setting Up Terminals Allen Bradley 1784 T45 or Follow these steps if using an Allen Bradley 1784 T45 or T47 T47 Programming computer Terminal 1 Construct a cable to connect the terminal to the decoder Use a Belden 8303 Alpha 45123 or equivalent type of cable Use the following connector pinouts Male 19 pin NEMA Type 4 or Female 25 pin D Shell Connector NEMA NEMA Type4 Typel Transmit Data Decoder Receive Data Signal Ground 25 pin Female Terminal
10. 10 displaying bar code data 9 4 displaying decoder performance values 9 4 displaying host messages 13 8 displaying output counters 9 5 displaying package counter 9 4 displaying symbols not read counter 9 5 enabling device to display data 9 1 format of bar code data display 9 2 AUX Terminal Selector 5 1 external selector AUX port pins 13 6 internal selector logic board jumper 13 6 AUX Terminals communication parameters 5 1 13 1 connecting and setting up D 1 connecting to NEMA Type 1 decoder 4 15 connecting to NEMA Type 4 decoder 4 16 constructing cable NEMA Type 1 4 15 constructing cable NEMA Type 4 4 16 supported types 4 15 4 16 5 1 13 1 D 1 Bar Code Data Display on AUX Terminal 9 1 on configuration screen 14 2 on LCD Display 9 1 Bar Code Symbol vs message field and host message 10 2 Bar Tolerance Pharma Code 6 12 Bar Width Ratio Pharma Code 6 14 Battery installation 17 1 Baud Rate 12 2 Bits Character 12 2 Buffer Full Output Condition 7 18 Buffer Overflow Output Condition 7 18 C Cable Selector 2 11 Capture Count 7 6 and no reads 7 7 Check Character and Extended Match Code Table 8 6 Codabar 6 5 Code 39 6 3 Interleaved 2 of 5 6 4 Codabar check character 6 5 enabling 6 5 specific lengths 6 5 Code 128 enabling 6 6 FNCI1 character 6 7 specific lengths 6 6 Cod
11. C Allen Bradley DS DD Series B Enhanced Bar U Ser Code Decoders Ma nu al Bulletin 2755 Important User Information Because of the variety of uses for the products described in this publication those responsible for the application and use of this control equipment must satisfy themselves that all necessary steps have been taken to assure that each application and use meets all performance and safety requirements including any applicable laws regulations codes and standards The illustrations charts sample programs and layout examples shown in this guide are intended solely for purposes of example Since there are many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation Allen Bradley does not assume responsibility or liability to include intellectual property liability for actual use based upon the examples shown in this publication Allen Bradley publication SGI 1 1 Safety Guidelines for the Application Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Control available from your local Allen Bradley office describes some important differences between solid state equipment and electromechanical devices that should be taken into consideration when applying products such as those described in this publication Reproduction of the contents of this copyrighted publication in whole or in part without written permission of Allen Bradley Company Inc is prohibited Throughout this manual
12. Command CA Response 00CR 00 command complete response code CR end of message control code Publication 2755 833 for Carriage Return ASCII Host Commands 15 37 SE Set Extended Match Counters Command Format SEnnnmmmmmm Function Sets the value of extended count number nnn to mmmmmm Parameters nnnmmmmmm Command Parameters Parameter Function Valid Values in The number of the Extended 001 to 128 match count 000 All mmmmmm_ The value of the count 000000 to 999999 Response rr lt end gt rr response code lt end gt end of message control code Example Command SC012000036 Parameters 012 Command Parameter Function Values Parameters nni The number of the Extended 012 match count mmmmmm The value of the count 000036 Response 00CR 00 command complete response code CR end of message control code for Carriage Return Publication 2755 833 15 38 ASCII Host Commands RC Read Extended Match Counters Command Format RCnnn Function Reads the value of Extended count number nnn Parameters nnn Command Parameters The number of the Extended Response mmmmmm lt end gt Parameter Function Valid Values mmmmmm count value lt end gt end of message control code Example Command RC012 Parameters 012 Command Parameters Parameter Function Values The number of the Extended nnn match count Response 000036CR
13. Glossary G 3 character A single groups of bars and spaces representing an individual number letter or punctuation mark A graphic shape representing a letter number or symbol check digit A digit included within a symbol whose value is based mathematically on other characters included in the symbol It is used to mathematically check the accuracy of the read code type See symbology coordinated mode A scanning mode in which the symbols per package setting can be satisfied by either or both scanners continuous code A bar code or symbol that does not use an intercharacter gap between characters in the code Code 128 is an example of a continuous code controller A unit such as a programmable controller which controls machine or process elements CRT A terminal containing a cathode ray tube D decode The process of translating a bar code into data characters using a specific set of rules for each symbology decoder A device used to decode or make usable a digital or analog signal transmitted from a scanning device decode mode The method by which the decoder starts and stops the decoding process The two basic methods of decoding are triggered and continuous decoder logic The circuitry which receives the signals from the scanner interprets the signals into meaningful data and provides the interface to other devices discrete code A bar code or symbol where the space between characters
14. Note Connect shield to shell of cable connectors at both ends 2 Power on the terminal The switch is located on the left side of the unit The terminal will beep once and then test itself When the test is complete a message appears The last line should indicate that all tests have passed 3 Press CTRL ALT CMD key sequence to display the system Main Menu Press the CMD key while holding down both the ALT and CTRL keys 4 Set the T45 terminal emulation to the following settings Refer to the terminal documentation for additional information F1 DGC D200 Terminal F2 Modem External F3 Flow Control On F4 Duplex Full F6 Print Off 5 Set the COMI parameters to F1 Baud Rate 9600 F2 Parity None F3 Data Bits 8 F4 Stop Bits 1 F5 Type Standard PC Compatible Com Note If using an internal modem disable it using the MODE command Publication 2755 833 Allen Bradley 1770 T1 T2 T3 Terminals Setting Up Terminals D 5 6 When the Select CRT Type menu appears select Data General DT100 emulation 7 You are now ready to configure the decoder See Chapter 5 Follow these steps if using an Allen Bradley 1770 T1 T2 or T3 terminal 1 Construct a cable to connect the decoder to Channel B of the terminal Use a Belden 8303 Alpha 45123 or equivalent type of cable Use the following connector pinouts Male 19 pin NEMA Type 4 or Female 25 pin D Shell Connector pera NEMA NEM
15. end of message control code Example Command IX3AUX Parameters AUX Command Parameter l Length of source identifier 3 String Characters in source identifier AUX Parameter Function Values Response OOLF 00 command complete response code LF end of message control code for Line Feed Publication 2755 833 15 60 ASCII Host Commands IM Configure Scanner A Source Identifier Command Format Mlstring Function Defines a source identifier for Scanner A Source identifiers are included in messages sent to the host They identify whether the data was scanned by Scanner A or B or entered at the AUX terminal NOTE This command is valid only for dual head decoders Parameters _ Istring Command Parameter Length of source identifier 0 to 4 string Characters in source identifier Up to 4 characters A zero length string will disable the source identifier Parameter Function Valid Values Response rr lt end gt rr response code lt end gt end of message control code Example Command IM4SCNA Parameters 4SCNA Command Parameter Parameter Function Values Length of source identifier 4 String Characters in source identifier SCNA Response OOLF 00 command complete response code LF end of message control code for Line Feed Publication 2755 833 ASCII Host Commands 15 61 IB Configure Scanner B Source Identifier Command Format Bl
16. 2 Plug terminal into power supply 3 Power on terminal 4 Select Network Menu option 1 and set the following parameters Terminal Number 0 Terminal Type Normal The rest of the network parameters are not applicable 5 Select Comm Port Menu option 2 and set the following parameters Comm Mode XON XOFF Comm Baud Rate 9600 Comm Data Bits 8 Comm Parity None Comm Stop Bits 1 Comm CRLF Disabled Comm Echo Disabled Comm Handshake Disabled The rest of the parameters are not applicable 6 You are now ready to configure the decoder See Chapter 5 Publication 2755 833 Appendix E Connecting to a Host The HOST port of the decoder allows communication with a host device using three standard interfaces RS 232 RS 422 RS 485 This appendix contains connection diagrams for each interface Use these diagrams when connecting a host device to the HOST port of the decoder The HOST port on the NEMA Type 4 decoder has a 19 pin male connector The HOST port on the NEMA Type 1 decoder has a 25 pin female D shell connector NEMA Type 1 NEMA Type 4 HOST Port Female Connector HOST Port Male Connector 1 Se 14 e J e J e J e e e J e J e J e J e e e J ee 13 Function Chassis Ground RS 232 Transmit Data from decoder to host RS 232 Receive Data from host RS 232 Request to Send RS 232 Clear to Send RS 232 Data Terminal Ready RS 232 Data Set Ready H 7 D s16
17. 2 13 2755 NP1 2 13 2755 NP3 2 13 2755 NP4 2 13 2755 NP5 2 13 2755 OASS 2 9 18 3 G 1 G 3 H 1 H 3 2755 OB55 2 9 18 3 G 1 G 3 H 1 H 3 2755 OMSS 2 9 18 3 H 1 H 3 A Accessories communications cable NEMA Type 4 2 13 connector kit NEMA Type 4 2 13 T O modules 2 9 18 3 G 1 G 2 H 1 package detectors 2 13 replacement fuses for I O modules 2 9 scanners and cables 2 11 ACK Character 12 4 ASCII Character Set I 1 ASCII Host Commands 15 1 autoload 15 26 autoload begin 15 25 autoload end 15 25 AUX terminal data entry operations 15 64 AUX terminal source identifier 15 59 clear all primary output counters 15 36 clear extended match counters 15 36 clear no read counter 15 73 clear package counter 15 73 Index l 1 clear primary output counter 15 35 Codabar check character 15 11 Code 128 FNC1 character 15 14 Code 39 check characters 15 11 code verification list 15 15 command format 15 5 command replies 15 6 configure bar code data mask obsolete 15 77 data positions on AUX terminal 15 48 default no read string 15 63 default prompt message 15 68 DH485 communication addresses 15 1 disable extended match code set 15 45 display message at AUX Terminal LCD 15 66 15 67 enable data display on AUX terminal and LCD 15 47 enable scrolling on LCD
18. 3 Any 0 AiB Auto Load 100 4 Any O AiB None 3 5 Any 0 AiB None 3 6 Any O AiB None 3 7 Any 0 AiB None 3 8 Any D AiB Auto Load CINPUT 0 Commands ESC Change SPACE Cursor Control ARROWS Notes AutoLoad is set for Outputs 1 2 and 3 and applies to match code entries 1 2 and 3 Output 8 is set to AutoLoad INPUT and activates the AutoLoad function for entries 1 2 and 3 when an input signal is applied In this example the input signal is applied until all three symbols are read Symbols package parameter is set to 1 AutoLoad INPUT Activated and Held First Valid Package Read eee MATCH CODE TABLE DISCRETE 1 0 Enabled l _ 1 I12 of 5 001688421378 0 AiB Match Entry 100 2 Any 0 AiB Auto Load 100 3 Any 0 AiB Auto Load 100 4 Any 0 AiB None 0 5 Any 0 AiB None 0 6 Any 0 AiB None 0 7 Any 0 AiB None 0 0016884213758 8 Any 0 AiB Auto Load CINPUT 0 Commands ESC Change SPACE Cursor Control ARROWS Notes Bar code data loaded into match code table entry 1 Output condition changes from AutoLoad to Match Entry for Output 1 The condition for Outputs 2 and 3 does not change since Symbols Package has been met AutoLoad INPUT Held Active Second Valid Package Read 2 2 2 l MATCH CODE TABLE DISCRETE 10 Enabled l 1 12 of 5 001688421378 0 AiB Match Entry 100 2 I2 of 5 411528258538 0 AiB Match Entry 100 3 Any 0 Ai
19. Argentina e Australia e Austria e Bahrain e Belgium e Brazil e Bulgaria e Canada e Chile e China PRC e Colombia e Costa Rica e Croatia e Cyprus e Czech Republic e Denmark e Ecuador e Egypt El Salvador e Finland e France e Germany e Greece e Guatemala e Honduras e Hong Kong Hungary e Iceland e India e Indonesia e Ireland e Israel e Italy e Jamaica e J apan e J ordan e Korea e Kuwait e Lebanon e Malaysia e Mexico e Netherlands e New Zealand e Norway e Pakistan e Peru e Philippines e Poland e Portugal e Puerto Rico e Qatar e Romania e Russia CIS e Saudi Arabia e Singapore e Slovakia e Slovenia e South Africa Republic e Spain e Sweden e Switzerland e Taiwan e Thailand e Turkey e United Arab Emirates e United Kingdom e United States e Uruguay e Venezuela e Yugoslavia Allen Bradley Headquarters 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee WI 53204 USA Tel 1 414 382 2000 Fax 1 414 382 4444 Publication 2755 833 November 1996 40062 296 01 C Supersedes Publication 2755 833 Dated March 1996 Copyright 1996 Allen Bradley Company Inc Printed in USA
20. B5 1 0 BOARD 1 D C IN 2 D C OUT C 1 CONN amp CABLE BLANK NONE J Publication 2755 833 Power Cords Power cords available when ordering the NEMA Type 4 decoder include Option Power Cord Description Blank 120 240 VAC three wire US Color Code unterminated power cord 6 ft 1 83 m 0 No power cord User must supply appropriate power cord 3 240 VAC three wire European Harmonized unterminated power cord 6 ft 1 83 m Supplied with decoder if alternate power cord is not specified in catalog number The decoder is not UL listed CSA approved when used with European Harmonized power cords To order a replacement power cord for the NEMA Type 4 decoder use the following replacement part numbers Replacement Number Power Cord Description 77121 801 04 120 240 VAC three wire US Color Code unterminated power cord 71721 801 05 240 VAC three wire European Harmonized unterminated power cord The decoder is not UL listed CSA approved when used with European Harmonized power cords Decoder Features 2 9 Input Output Modules The optional I O Module Board supports the following I O modules Output Modules function as a switch not a power source Catalog Number 2755 OM5S Nominal Line Voltage Powe VAC 240 VAC Maximum Line Voltage 280 VAC Minimum Line Voltage 3 0 VDC 12 VAC 24 VAC Maximum Peak Off State Voltage 60 VDC 400 V peak 600 V peak Maximum Peak Off State Leakage 1 0 mA 2 5mA R
21. CAUTION Changing Configuration Parameters may cause the discrete outputs to switch unexpectedly To configure the decoder with the outputs DISABLED press any key except the ESC key make changes SAVE and RESTART the decoder If outputs are to remain ENABLED during configuration press the ESC key to view configuration screens The message informs you that configuration changes could change the state of the discrete outputs Editing Conventions Introduction to AUX Terminal Configuration 5 5 ATTENTION If your application uses discrete outputs we recommend that you disable the outputs during configuration to prevent unwanted state changes To proceed with configuration while the outputs are enabled press the Esc key To disable the outputs during configuration press any other key Note The outputs remain disabled until you restart the system with function E Restart System After responding to the caution message the selected configuration screen is displayed ATTENTION When controlling outputs locally using configuration screens suspend host communications to prevent outputs from unintentionally changing state This section provides some helpful hints on using and editing the configuration screens including e highlight e moving around the screen e data fields e editing data fields e audible beep e prompt line and command line For example purposes let s look at one of the configuration scre
22. Match Pattern String Field Type Options 0 to 32 characters Edit Text Blank Defines the characters for a specified match code string 1 128 The default is no characters Blank which means a match code string is not defined You can enter up to 32 characters for each match code string including non printable control characters Enter the characters as they will be transmitted to the host Do not include check digits if you disabled the Include Check Character parameter for the selected symbology The string accepts the question mark as a single character wild card A position containing a will match any single ASCII character in the same position of the decoded data Note The Extended Match Code tables interpret a question mark differently than do the Host Replacement rules The question mark functions as a generic wildcard when used in the Extended Match Code Table and as a metacharacter in the Host Message Replacement Rules The decoder compares all decoded data with the specified entries in the match code table If the decoded data matches any of the 128 strings a match condition occurs Count Field Type Options 0 through 999999 0 Edit Numeric This field displays the current value of the extended match count for each table entry The count automatically increments when the pattern source and symbology values all match a given extended match pattern You can edit this field to set a sp
23. female subminiature D 19 pin male circular Cannon KPT series 300 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 None Odd Even 8 or7 lor2 None XON XOFF RTS CTS RS232 25 pin female subminiature D 19 pin male circular Cannon KPT series 8 1 9600 None 2 20 characters line Continuous LED backlighting Code 39 Standard Character Set Interleaved 2 of 5 Code 128 UPC A with optional 2 or 5 digit supplements UPC E with optional 2 or 5 digit supplements EAN 8 with optional 2 or 5 digit supplements EAN 13 with opt 2 or 5 digit supplements Codabar Pharma Code UL Listed Listed to Canadian Safety Standards C Electromagentic Compatibility Directive 89 336 EEC EN 50081 2 Generic Emission Standard Industrial Environment EN 50082 2 Generic Immunity Standard Industrial Environment Catalog Number 2755 NC17 Connector Kit is available for the NEMA Type 4 HOST and AUX port Specifications 18 3 Output Modules Catalog Number 2755 OB5S 2755 OM5S Nominal Line Voltage 240 VAC Maximum Line Voltage 60 VDC 280 VAC Minimum Line Voltage 3 0 VDC 24 VAC Maximum P eak Off State Voltage 60 VDC 600 V peak Maximum Peak Off State Leakage 1 0 mA 4 5 mA RMS Static off state dv dt 200 V usec Maximum On S tate Current 0 5 ADC 0 5 A RMS Minimum On State Current 10 mA DC 50mA RMS Maximum 1 Cycle Surge 4 A peak Maximum 1 Second Surge 1 5 A DC Pee Peak On State Voltage 1 5V DC 1 6 V peak In
24. 000036 value of counter 12 CR end of message control code for Carriage Return Publication 2755 833 ASCII Host Commands 15 39 SM Set Extended Match Data Command Format SMnnnasccmmmmmmddddddddllstring Function Sets the value of the Extended data number nnn Parameters nnnasccmmmmmmddddddddllstring Command Parameters Parameter Function Valid Values The number of the Extended 000 to 128 nnn match count A Auto load M Match Entry D Disabled L Lot 1 Scanner A 2 Scanner B S Source 3 A B 4 llegal 5 A B 01 Code 39 02 Interleaved 2 of 5 03 Codabar 04 UP C A 05 UP C E cc symbology 06 FAN 8 07 EAN 13 08 Code 128 09 P harma Code 16 Any mmmmmm_ The value of the count 000000 to 999999 dddddddd Loading 8 0 to 9 or X II Length of match string 00 to 32 string Match string up to 32 characters a Mode Response rr lt end gt rr response code lt end gt end of message control code Publication 2755 833 15 40 ASCII Host Commands SM Set Extended Match Data continued Example Command SM002M30100000010000000041289 Parameters 002 M 3 01 000000 10000000 04 1289 keai Parameter Function Valid Values nnn Le aula of the Extended 002 a Mode M Match Entry S Source 3 A B cc Symbology 01 Code 39 mmmmmm_ The value of the count 000000 dddddddd Loading 8 10000000 Il Length of match string 04 string Match string 1289 Respo
25. 1 Command Parameter Function Values Parameters a Match code table entry number 1 b Source of event 1 Scanner A Response 00CR 00 command complete response code CR end of message control code for Carriage Return Publication 2755 833 ASCII Host Commands 15 25 AB Auto load Begin Command Format AB Function Resets autoloads Once received the decoder loads match code table positions set to autoload with decoded bar code data until it receives an AE Autoload End command Equivalent to manual autoload input Response rr lt end gt rr response code lt end gt end of message control code Example Command AB Response 00CR 00 command complete response code CR end of message control code for Carriage Return AE Autoload End Command Format AE Function Stops loading data into position set to autoload This command follows an AB Autoload Begin command Equivalent to releasing a manual autoload input Response rr lt end gt rr response code lt end gt end of message control code Example Command AE Response 00CR 00 command complete response code CR end of message control code for Carriage Return Publication 2755 833 15 26 ASCII Host Commands Publication 2755 833 AL Autoload Command Format ALabeestring Function Load the match pattern into the next available position set to autoload checking first the prim
26. 100 Space Tolerance Widest Space Narrowest Space 2 Select a value that is greater than the worst case tolerance to prevent no reads Valid percent values are 5 to 40 or Ignore If set to Ignore any amount of space tolerance is allowed within the symbol The default value is 75 15 The default value for this parameter has been optimized for most applications and it is unlikely you will ever have a reason to change it The decoder will reject a symbol if two spaces within the symbol differ in width by more than the space tolerance value Select Ignore to prevent the decoder from rejecting a symbol based on width differences between spaces Bar Tolerance Pharma Code Decoders Only Field Type Options 5 through 40 15 Ignore Edit Defines the percent difference in width between two bars of a symbol that have the same nominal width but the largest width difference There are two bar tolerances since Pharma Code symbols have wide and narrow bars Bar tolerance is expressed mathematically as Configuration Symbology 6 13 Widest Wide Bar Narrowest Wide Bar Widest Wide Bar Narrowest Wide Bar 2 x 100 Bar Tolerance OR Widest Narrow Bar Narrowest Narrow Bar Widest Narrow Bar Narrowest Narrow Bar 2 x 100 Bar Tolerance Select a value that is greater than the worst case tolerance to prevent no reads Valid bar tolerance values are 5
27. 15 8 CT Configure Bar Code Symbology and Supplements 15 15 cV Configure Code Verification List 15 75 DD Set Configuration to Factory Defaults 15 47 DF Enable AUX Terminal and LCD to Display Formatted Data 15 77 DM Configure Bar Code Data Mask 15 48 DP Configure Data Display Positions for AUX Terminal and LCD 15 55 HB Configure Scanner B Start amp Stop Characters 15 53 HC Configure Host Communications 15 58 HF Set the Number of Fields in Host Message 15 62 HM Configure Header Message 15 61 B Configure Scanner B Source Identifier 15 76 D Version of Software 15 21 F Configure Scanner A Package Detect Filter and Sense 15 60 M Configure Scanner A Source Identifier 15 59 X Configure AUX Terminal Source Identifier 15 72 Read Output Counter 15 56 F Configure Host Message Format 15 33 R Read Match Code Table Entry 1 8 15 34 W Write Match Code Table Entry 1 8 15 73 NC Clear Symbols Not Read Counter 15 63 NM Configure Default No Read String 15 71 NR Read the Symbols Not Read Counter 15 29 oc Set Output Condition and Duration 15 31 OH Hold Output Open Closed 15 28 Os Set Output Normally Open Normally Closed 15 20 PB Configure Scanner B Control 15 73 PC Clear Package Counter Publication 2755 833 ASCII Host Commands 15 5 Command Format see ea Command Function 15 77 PD Configure Pad Data Character Obsolete Command 15 69 PI Read Decoder Performance Indicators 15 68 PM Config
28. 2 of 5 Specific Lengths Must be even 42F 430 thru 437 438 439 thru 440 441 444 445 447 Publication 2755 833 Enable Code 128 Enable Codabar Enable EAN 13 LASER Light A Decode Mode Capture Count symbols scan 449 symbols package Code 39 Specific Lengths Code 128 Specific Lengths Codabar Specific Lengths Enable UPC A Enable UPC E Enable EAN 8 Number of Bytes 1 Acceptable Values Default in bold 0 RS232 1 RS232 XON XOFF 2 RS232 CTS RTS 1 3 RS232 CTS RTS 2 4 RS422 5 RS422 XON XOFF 6 RS485 PCCC 1 7 RS485 PCCC 2 8 RS485 ASCII 1 9 RS485 ASCII 2 0 No Filter LO Package 1 Filter 15 msec LO P ackage 2 No Filter Hl P ackage 3 Filter 15 msec Hl Package 0 No 1 Yes No for Pharma code units 0 No 1 Yes 0 No 1 Yes 0 No 1 Yes 0 2 64 0 No 1 Yes 0 No 1 Yes 0 No 1 Yes 0 No 1 Yes 0 0n 1 Triggered 2 0ff 0 Package Detect 1 Host 2 Internal Timer 3 Continuous 4 Continuous Unique 0 1 2 8 0 Verify a ool gt lt nue WN ou ow ou anu eWPN Decoder Configuration Addresses A 5 F Number of Acceptable Values PCCC Address Configuration Parameter Bytes Default in bold Match Complete Count 1 1 16 44B Scanner A Source Identifier String Length 1 0 4 0 Empty Strin 4 4 characters 1 0 32 0 Empty 32 32 characters 471 No R
29. 2755 LD8 High Performance Visible Laser Diode Bar Code Scanner 500 scan per second fixed mount scanners with read distances up to 50 inches 1 27 meters depending on the symbol size and quality 2755 LD4 High Performance Visible Laser Diode Bar Code Scanner 200 scan per second fixed mount scanners with read distances up to 84 inches 2 13 meters depending on the symbol size quality and scanner range selected 2755 L9 Industrial NEMA Type 4 High Speed Bar Code Scanner 800 scan per second raster and side scanning device with read distances up to 30 inches 76 cm depending upon symbol size and quality 2755 L7 Industrial NEMA Type 4 Bar Code Scanner 350 scan per second raster and side scanning device with read distances up to 50 inches 1 27 meters depending upon symbol size and quality 2755 L4FO Enhanced NEMA Type 12 Bar Code Scanner 200 scan per second front or side scanning device with read distances L4AR up to 50 inches 1 27 meters depending upon symbol size and quality 2755 L5R Enhanced NEMA Type 12 Raster Scanner 200 scan per second raster scanner with read distances up to 45 inches 1 14 meters depending on symbol size and quality 2755 G30 Hand Held Laser Scanner Non contact scanners that can read bar code symbols at distances of 1 inch to 30 inches 2 5 to 76 2 cm 2755 G6 Hand Held Laser Scanner Non contact scanners that can read bar code symbols at distances of 8 to 66 inches 20 3 to 167 6 cm 2755 LD1
30. 3 Aleman 4 Italiano 5 Castellano Pulsar 1 2 3 405 WAEHLE SPRACHE 1 Englisch 2 Franzoesisch 3 Deutsch 4 Italienisch 5 Spanisch Druecken Sie 1 2 3 4 oder 5 If the Select Language screen does not appear press Esc If the Select Language screen still does not appear check your communication parameters to be certain they match those listed earlier in this chapter Also be sure the COM port selected in your communications software matches the COM port to which the decoder is connected See Appendix D for information on selecting a COM port Important If you are unable to access the configuration screens the AUX port may be set for manual data entry mode See Chapter 13 for details on how to switch to configuration mode Introduction to AUX Terminal Configuration 5 3 4 Press the number key that corresponds to the language you want to use All subsequent screens will display in the selected language 5 After selecting a language the Select CRT Type screen displays 2755 DD1P DD4P Bar Code Decoder Copyright 1992 Allen Bradley Company Inc SELECT CRT TYPE 1 Allen Bradley 1770 Industrial Terminal 2 Allen Bradley T45 Portable Terminal 3 Lear Siegler ADM 3E 4 Digital UT100 Press 1 2 3 4 or ESC 6 Press the number key that corresponds to the terminal you are using or press Esc to return to the previous screen 7 After selecting the terminal type the Select Operation screen will appear
31. 56480982 54664747 69585746 53647747 No Read 65454565 76845329 43623123 98967587 89654934 34592345 22134232 35647465 65454565 The data from each string displays on a separate line If several symbols are decoded in one scan the symbols are displayed on a single line separated by a space Publication 2755 833 Display Status and Primary Counters Display and System Configuration 14 3 Each line displays a maximum of 80 characters If the data consists of more than 80 characters it continues to the next line until the entire string is displayed If the decoder is unable to decode a bar code label the no read message if defined during configuration is displayed The display continuously scrolls upward displaying new bar code data at the bottom of the screen To exit this function and return to the Select Operation menu press ESC The Display Status and Primary Counters function on the Select Operation menu allows you to monitor system status and counters maintained by the decoder To select this function press the B or b key The following screen displays 2755 DD1P DD4P Bar Code Decoder Copyright 1992 Allen Bradley Company Inc Decoder Performance 0 Scanner A Decoder Performance 0 Scanner B Symbols Not Read 0 Package Counter 0 Primary Counters 1 1B None 2 None 3 None 4 None 5 None 6 None 7 None 8 None Press 1 8 to Reset Counter SPACE to Reset All ESC to Exi
32. ACK NAK protocol The first time the decoder is started the default is None which means an ACK character is not defined From then on the default is determined at restart by the contents of storage memory The ACK character is sent by the host to acknowledge receipt of a message The decoder holds the last transmitted message until an ACK is returned to the decoder Any command the decoder receives from the host is also interpreted as an ACK character You must define ACK and NAK characters to enable ACK NAK protocol with the host ACK NAK protocol only applies to bar code data sent to the host It is typically used with the transmission check to provide error detection You can also use ACK NAK protocol to provide flow control NAK Character Field Type Options F 0 through 255 Edit ASCII 255 None Defines a Negative Acknowledge NAK character for ACK NAK protocol The first time the decoder is started the default is None which means a NAK character is not defined From then on the default is determined at restart by the contents of storage memory The NAK character is sent by the host when a message is not received properly and prompts the decoder to retransmit the last message up to three times If any of the characters below are used as single character commands ACK NAK or Start Characters then the escape sequence ESC must be used with all two character comm start with that character ABCDHIM NO PR ST
33. AIB AiB None AIB AiB AiB AiB DISCRETE 1 0 Match Entry 100 futo Load 100 Auto Load 100 futo Load INPUT Enabled 1l 0 0 0 0 0 Commands ESC Change SPACE Cursor Control ARROWS Notes Bar code data loaded into match code table entry 1 Output condition changes from AutoLoad to Match Entry for Output 1 The output condition for outputs 2 and 3 does not change from AutoLoad since Symbols P ackage setting has been satisfied AutoLoad Configuration after Next AutoLoad INPUT No new data scanned SSS MATCH CODE TABLE DISCRETE 10 Enabled l 1 Any 0 AiB Auto Load 100 2 Any 0 AiB Auto Load 100 3 Any 0 AiB Auto Load 100 4 Any 0 AiB None 0 5 Any 0 AiB None 0 6 Any 0 AiB None 0 7 Any 0 AiB None 0 8 Any 0 AiB Auto Load INPUT 0 Commands ESC Change SPACE Cursor Control ARROWS Notes Table is restored to saved configuration Output condition changes from Match Entry to AutoLoad for Output 1 Ready to Autoload next symbol read into match code table Publication 2755 833 7 24 Configuration Scanner Control Primary Match Table Discrete I O Figure 7 5 Loading multiple packages using AutoLoad INPUT AutoLoad Configuration at AutoLoad Input Saved Configuration Output duration must be set for outputs and LEDs to operate MATCH CODE TABLE DISCRETE I O Enabled a 1 Any D AiB Auto Load 100 2 Any D AiB Auto Load 100
34. All Counts Select Reset Set Only Next Set Previous Set This parameter can be used to control three different functions relating to the extended match codes It determines whether the display is refreshed regularly Selecting the default Auto Refresh setting will result in all displayed counters being updated every second It permits resetting the value of extended match code table counters to zero Selecting Reset All Counts zeroes all extended counters whether they are among the currently displayed set or not Selecting Reset Set Only zeroes only those counters in the currently displayed set The system will ask you to confirm either reset command before it takes any action e It provides a means to move through all eight sets as necessary Selecting Next Set displays the next set of sixteen extended match code entries Selecting Previous Set displays the previous set of sixteen extended match code entries Both commands treat all eight sets as a closed loop If you select Next Set while displaying set 8 the system will display set 1 If you select Previous Set while displaying set 1 the system will display set 8 Once you ve selected either Next Set or Previous Set you can continue to scroll through all sets by repeatedly pressing Return Note however that there may be a slight delay while the system prepares and formats each new set for display If you hold down the Return key in an effort to speed up pagin
35. Configuration Host Message Format Host Message Parameters Publication 2755 833 Example 3 If a No Read occurs the decoder transmits 7 AData From Scanner A NO READ 000015CRLF Header Message End Message Characters Source Identifier Package Count Start Character End of Package Double Delimiter No Read Message Field Delimiter Note Message packages can consist of both bar code strings and no read strings The parameters listed below include those used to control the message format of bar code data that is sent to the host Each parameter is defined below The options for each parameter are summarized in a table and explained more fully in the text Where appropriate the default setting for each parameter is displayed in bold letters in the table Start Character Field Type Options ASCII Numeric Edit Numeric 1 255 255 None Defines the three digit decimal ASCII starting character for every bar code message sent to the host The default is None or 255 which indicates no start character Source Identifier for AUX A and B Field Type Options Any ASCII Character String 4 chars max Blank Edit Text Defines a 1 to 4 character identifier to include in each message sent to the host The string identifies the source device for the data contained in the message The default for each field is Blank which means a source identifier is not defined Example source identifiers are SCNA SC
36. Continuous 4 Continuous unique 0 1 through 8 c Capture count 0 Verify S Bar code symbols per scan AN 3 4 5 6 Bar code symbols per 1 9 A G P package where A 10 G 16 0000 0010 9999 rrrr ai ae in milliseconds Seconds 0000 disables timeout 0000 0010 9999 ttt a a value in milliseconds BECENGS 0000 disables timeout 1 9 A G m atch complete count where A 10 G 16 Important See Chapter 6 for a description of the Scanner Control parameters Response rr lt end gt Publication 2755 833 rr response code lt end gt end of message control code ASCII Host Commands 15 19 SC Configure Scanner A Control continued Example Command SC01211005500001 Parameters 01211005500001 Command Parameter Function Values Parameters l Laser light 0 Continuous scanning d Decode trigger mode 1 Host c Capture count 2 S Bar code symbols per scan 1 Bar code symbols per p 1 package iit No read timer value 0055 55 millisecond in milliseconds timer value ttt Inter scan timer value 0000 Disables in milliseconds inter scan timer m Match complete count 1 Response 00CR 00 command complete response code CR end of message control code for Carriage Return Publication 2755 833 15 20 ASCII Host Commands PB Configure Scanner B Control Command Format PBabtttt Function Configures Scanner B to operate in coordinated or independent mode This command also
37. ENTRY Publication 2755 833 The jumper has two positions which determine the mode of operation that is enabled for the AUX port terminal CONFIG Jumper Right With the jumper positioned as shown on the upper left you can use the AUX terminal for configuration only Configuration menus and screens are enabled This is the factory default setting DATA ENTRY Jumper Left With the jumper positioned as shown on the lower left you can use the AUX terminal for manual data entry and display functions only Configuration menus and screens are disabled External Selector The other way to switch from configuration to manual data entry mode is to connect pins 15 and 16 NEMA Type 1 or G and H NEMA Type 4 in the AUX port connector See Chapter 4 for a description of the AUX port connector pins Configuration AUX Terminal Data Entry 13 7 Note If either the external selector or the the internal selector is set to data entry the decoder will be in manual data entry mode and will not display the Configuration screens Data Entry and After switching to manual data entry mode you can Display Operations e Display bar code data decoder performance indicators counter data and host messages on the AUX terminal e Enter data at the AUX terminal keyboard Both of these operations are controlled by parameters on the AUX and LCD Display Format and AUX Terminal Data Entry configuration screens The parameters defining display pa
38. Empty Search Fail String up to 24 characters 2019H 1AH Where i ranges from 1 to 16 The decoder shall return status 10H for references to 2000H 2019H Extended Count Values D800H DA03H Acceptable Values PCCC Address Configuration Parameter Number of Bytes Default in bold D800H H 4 Extended Count Value n 0 to 999999 Where i ranges from 1 to 128 The decoder shall return status code 10H for references to addresses D800H D803H Extended Match Data 8000H A03FH Writes to address 8000 will be interpreted as Autoload The data attached to the write must follow the byte order listed in the following table The data will be inserted in the next available autoload position searching first the primary and then the extended data table That entry will be marked as Match Entry If no entries are available in either table a code 02 memory not available will be returned Writes to any location other than 8000 will return of code 10 and the write request will be ignored Number of Acceptable Values PCCC Address Configuration Parameter Bytes Default in bold 8000H Source 1 Scanner A 2 Scanner B symbology 1 0 Code 39 1 Interleaved 2 of 5 2 Codabar 3 UPC A 4 UPC E 5 EAN 8 6 EAN 13 7 Code 128 8 Pharma Code Match pattern Length 1 0 32 0 Empty Match pattern String 32 up to 32 characters Publication 2755 833 PCCC Address 8000H 40H 8001H 40H 8002H 40H 8003H 40H 8004H 4
39. Field Length 0 0 Alignment Right Right Fill Character None None Host Message Field Number 1 All scanner data will be sent to the host as received Data entered into the AUX Port will be sent with the characters Aux Data appended to the data In a real application it may be critical to know the source of information The Host Replacement Rules make this possible Also see Source Identifier Publication 2755 833 10 16 Configuration Host Message Replacement Rules Example 3 Sorting by Symbology By setting up specific rules to check for symbology different code types may be sent to the host in a predetermined order Parameter Rule 1 Value Rule 2 Value Source A B A B Symbology Code 128 120f5 Symbol Number All All Find String Containing ii Replace Entire ar amp amp Minimum Field Length 0 0 Alignment Right Right Fill Character None None Host Message Field 1 2 Number In this case 2 symbols per package will be read The symbols are sent to the host with the Code 128 symbol first or its No read Replacement Message This technique may be useful in applications where these two symbologies are used together Example 4 Sorting by Symbol Number Parameter Rule 1 Value Rule 2 Value Source A B A B Symbology Any Any Symbol Number 2 1 Find String Containing Replace te amp amp Minimum Field Leng
40. GND RS 232 Signal Common 9 L SHLD RS 485 Shield Ground 12 M 485 TERM RS 485 Line Termination J umpers to 13 or N Terminates decoder at each end of network 13 N 485 A TERM RS 485 Line Termination J umpers to 12 or M Terminates decoder at each end of network s Ras RS422A Receive Data fomhos 18 19 Ta TERY TERN RS 422 Line Termination J umpers to 19 or V Terminates decoder at each end of network RS 422 Line Termination J umpers to 18 or U Terminates decoder at each end of network The cable that connects the decoder to the host varies depending on the communication standard and the type of connector on the serial communication port of the host Publication 2755 833 E 2 Connecting to a Host RS 232 Interface Publication 2755 833 Appendix F lists the host protocol options for each communication interface Figure E 1 shows how to connect the NEMA Type 1 decoder to a host using RS 232 Use a Belden 8303 cable Alpha 45123 cable or equivalent ee E 1 Connecting NEMA Type 1 Decoder to Host using RS 232 Host Port 25 pin DB Connector Host RS 232 Port on Decoder Shield GND TD RD RDO TD RTS CTS CTS RTS DSR DTR SIG GND SIG GND DTR DSR DTE Data Terminal Equipment Pin designations depend When nonmetallic connecter shell used on host device If metal connector connect shield to shell Pins 2 3 and 7 are the minimum connecti
41. Installing the Decoder Introduction to AUX Terminal Configuration Publication 2755 833 Configuration Screens cece eects HOStCOMMANGS 202s nace rreri pea e tiewe hee Stand alone Operation eee eect eee eens POSE STRUM socctastete aaron e dy mat teas wanted d a a A dia tide Ook Programmable Logic Controllers PLC cece eee uae FLOSECOMIDUECS iii aiacsnetaled et ocala did oira ia iaiia oder a od Types of Memory 1 i3 d ces see sa cedue alee en ey See eee Ze Fe Operating Memory ee cece ete eee eens Storage MEMON casperei cerime sadir erip exw ead en oe Memory Contents at Startup oaaae Decoder Operating Modes ccc cece ete eens Scanning MOMS sisas toch eee pd conte ay ded wa oe ded eden Decode MOGs 2c tcaGeetadgereat diel eealteteen land Sending Data to Host Speed vs Timing Chapter 4 Chapter Objectives cc cece eee eee ees Power Requirements cc cece eee ete t eens Electrical Recommendations cece ete e eect eee ees GUOUNOING ics ae doa bee ree ee Sees we way eek ewe He HES Replacing LED Label stewart vied ase dadwale naiaocdlan ca Mounting the Decoder cece cece tect t nee ens Installing Power Cord e 440caeaos ciarneidaweswmoewaecon Quick Start for DS DD Decoder Configuration and Scanner Setup Connect AUX Terminal ccc cece eee eee ees SetCommunication Parameters 002e eee Apply Power and Select Language Selec
42. M Match Entry S Source 3 A B cc Symbology 01 Code 39 mmmmmm_ The value of the count 000222 Il Length of match string 04 string Match string 6247 CR delimiter and or end of message control code for Carriage Return 00 command complete response code CR end of message control code for Carriage Return Publication 2755 833 ASCII Host Commands 15 43 RA Read All Extended Counters Command Format RA Function Reads all Extended counts Parameters None Response nnnmmmmmm lt enas gt nnonmmmmmm lt end gt rr lt end gt Response Parameters Parameter Function Valid Values The number of the Extended mn match count 001 mmmmmm_ Value of count 000000 to 999999 ain The number of the Extended 002 match count mmmmmm_ Value of count 000000 to 999999 inn The number of the Extended 128 match count mmmmmm Value of count 000000 to 999999 rr response code lt end gt end of message control code Publication 2755 833 15 44 ASCII Host Commands RA Read All Extended Counters continued Example Command RA Parameters None Response 001000012CR002000122 128000012CR 00CR Response Parameter Function Values Parameters The number of the Extended match count mmmmmm_ Value of count 000012 The number of the Extended 002 match count mmmmmm_ Value of count 000122 nnn 001 nnn The number of the Extended match
43. Port SCANNER A Port DD Versions Only RS 232 RS 232 422 485 AB i Ney ALLENBRADLEY BAR CODE DECODER Optional LCD Display f POWER LASER ON A LASER ON B LED Indicators CPU ACTIVE TRIGGER ACTIVE A TRIGGER ACTIVE B COMMUNICATION VALIDREADA VALID READ B IEC 320 Power Connector Holes for Conduit or Optional Output Module Connectors and ON OFF Switch shown installed on left and plugged on right Publication 2755 833 LED Indicators Decoder Features 2 3 Seventeen front panel indicators provide a visual indication of the operating status of the dual head decoders There are fourteen front panel indicators on single head decoders Table 2 A defines the color and function of each LED Table 2 A LED Indicators NEMA Type 1 and Type 4 Decoders LED Label Color Lights when Power Green The decoder is receiving power CPU Active Green The CPU is active and running The LED turns off if a fault condition is detected Communications Laser On A Trigger Active A Valid Read A Laser On B Trigger Active B Valid Read B Discrete 1 0 1 8 Yellow Red Yellow Green Red Yellow Green Red Optional LCD Displa Data is transmitting to or from the AUX port or HOST port Scanner A is activated to turn on its laser light source The decoder is in triggered mode and scanning has been triggered for Scanner A or Scanner B A valid read occurs from Scanner A Scanner B is activated to turn on its
44. Publication 2755 833 i Site Sy SP ec Optional Extension Cables 2755 C15D1 2755 C40D1 2755 LD4 LD8 aa Scanner oe o oh f Photoswitch Catalog 9 2755 G3 G6 her Hand Held Laser Scanner Cables 2755 CG08 2755 CG15 2755 CG20 Installi ng the Decoder 4 13 Figure 4 6 Connecting scanners to NEMA Type 4 decoder OOO AUX HOST SCANNER A SCANNER B RS 232 RS 232 422 485 CABLES CABLES 2755 CN10 2755 CN10 2755 CN25 2755 CN25 2755 CN40 2755 CN40 2755 CN50 2755 CN50 2755 L7 L9 2755 L7 L9 Scanner eee r q Scanner i T755 NP3 NPS i IENRIS Package Detector i Package Detector Oo OR Cables Cables 2755 CM10 2755 CM10 2755 CM25 2755 CM25 2755 L4 L5 2755 L4 L5 Scanner fis 4 Set Scanner E 2755NPINPA i ISNPUNPA i Package Detector Package Detec or OR OR Optional Extension Optional Extension Cables Cables 2755 C15D4 2755 C15D4 2755 C40D4 2755 C40D4 2755 LD4 LD8 2755 LD4 LD8 Scanner H a Ree Scanner see See Photoswitch Photoswitch Catalog Catalog Publication 2755 833 4 14 Installing the Decoder 4 Turn the decoder on and place a sample symbol at the desired read position The symbol should not be moving at this time 5 Monitor the decoder s performance while viewing the Status and Pr
45. RTS is on 5 CTS RTS CTS 1 The host sends the CTS Clear to Send signal to the decoder if it can accept data The decoder only RTS CTS 2 sends data if CTS is on Figure E 2 shows how to connect the NEMA Type 4 decoder to a host using RS 232 Use a Belden 8303 cable Alpha 45123 cable or equivalent Figure E 2 Connecting NEMA Type 4 Decoder to a Host Computer using RS 232 Host Port 2755 NC17 Connector Host RS 232 Port on Decoder Shield RD TD CTS RTS DTR SIG GND DSR Ground to back shell following 2755 NC17 instructiorisP in designations depend Pins C B and D are the minimum connections on host device All unused pins should be left open Pins F J and E are optional flow control lines Flow control options are RS 232 No flow control RS 232 XON XOFF The XOFF character from the host suspends transmission and the XON character resumes transmission The receiving device removes the XON XOFF characters from the message RS 232 RTS CTS 1 Enables the RS 232 RTS and CTS control lines for flow control Publication 2755 833 E 4 Connecting to a Host RS 232 RTS CTS 2 Enables the RS 232 RTS and CTS control lines for flow control Use this mode of flow control to communicate with Catalog No 2760 RA or RB module The RS 232 interface and flow control are selected on the Host Communications configuration screen Pin Modem Descriptions Control Line E D
46. Set 6 81 96 atch atch Set 7 97 112 Set 8 113 128 1 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Disabled 1 Enabled 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Disabled Enabled Host Message Replacement Rules 1000H 143FH PCCC Address 1000H H 40H 1001H H 40H Source 1002H 40H Configuration Parameter Number of Acceptable Values Bytes Default in bold host_message Field ae to 16 0 ALL 1 Scanner A 2 Scanner B 3 A B 4 AUX 0 Code 39 1 Interleaved 2 of 5 2 Codabar 3 UPC A 4 UPC E 5 EAN 8 6 EAN 13 7 Code 128 8 Pharma Code Ofh ANY 1003H 40H symbol_number 1 Oto 16 0 ALL 1004H 40H Minimum Field Length 0 to 64 1005H 4 40H Alignment 1 0 Right 1 Left 1006H 40H Fill Character 0 to 255 0 None 1007H 40H 1008H 40H 1021H 40H 1024H 40H 103DH 40H ree Ee eee Search Pattern Length 0 24 0 Empty Search Pattern up to 24 characters a E Booo Replace Pattern Length 0 24 0 Empty Replace Pattern up to 24 characters Publication 2755 833 A 14 Decoder Configuration Addresses Where i ranges from 1 to 16 The decoder shall return status 10H for references to 1OOOH 103FH Host Message No Read Replacement Strings 2000H 21B9H 3 Number of Acceptable Values PCCC Address Configuration Parameter Bytes Default in bold 2000H 1AH Search Fail String Length 0 24 0
47. Standard Range Fixed Mount Laser Scanner 36 scan per second stop and scan scanners that can read bar code symbols at distances from 1 inch to 30 inches 2 5 to 76 2 cm depending upon symbol size and quality 2755 LD2 Long Range Fixed Mount Laser Scanner 36 scan per second stop and scan scanners that can read bar code sym bols at distances from 8 to 66 inches 20 3 to 167 7 cm depending upon symbol size and quality Catalog Number is not complete The scanners are available in a variety of configurations Check compatibility of new scanners with your Allen Bradley representative These scanners require the 2755 NC 16 Gun Adapter to function with these decoders Decoder Accessories This section lists the accessories that are available for the NEMA Type 1 and Type 4 decoders Configuration and Cable Group Selector Use the chart below and the Cable Selection Guide table that follows it to determine which cables are appropriate to your own application To use the chart simply identify the scanner you are using in the center column then look to the left if you are using a NEMA Type 1 decoder or to the right if you are using a NEMA Type 4 decoder A cable group identification number appears over the line connecting your scanner with your decoder type For example if you are using an LD4 scanner with a NEMA Type 4 decoder you would select a Group II cable Publication 2755 833 2 12 Decoder Features Cable Selection Gu
48. Supplement 0 No 1 2 Char 2 5 Char 3 2 or 5 Char 4 Auto 3EC Enable UPC E Supplement 1 0 No 1 2 Char 2 5 Char 3 2 or 5 Char 4 Auto Enable EAN 8 Supplement 0 No 1 2 Char 2 5 Char 3 2 or 5 Char 4 Auto Publication 2755 833 A 2 Decoder Configuration Addresses PCCC Address Configuration Parameter Enable EAN 13 Supplement Display Formatted Data AUX Terminal LCD message display format 3F1 Starting P osition bar_code_strings 3F2 Starting P osition decoder performance 3F3 Starting P osition package counter Starting P osition symbols not read counter Starting Position primary counter Starting P osition primary counter Starting P osition primary counter 3F5 3F8 Starting P osition primary counter 3F9 Starting P osition primary counter 3FD Starting P osition primary counter Starting P osition primary counter Starting Position primary counter Send Performance indicator in host_message Enable Filter and Sense of Package_Detect_B Input 3FF Ignored 400 Send bar_code_strings in host_message 401 Send package count in host_message 402 Send bar code symbology in host message 403 Ignored a 405 Ignored Publication 2755 833 Number of Bytes Acceptable Values Default in bold 0 No 1 2 Char 2 5 Char 3 2 or 5 Char 4 Auto 0 None 1 AUX LCD 2 AUX Only 3 LCD Only 0 Unformatted 1 Host Format 00 80 00 Disable 00
49. Supported Terminal Types Configuration Manual e Allen Bradley Industrial Terminals Data Entry 13 i 1771 T1 T2 e Allen Bradley 1784 T45 Laptop Terminal e DEC VT100 va EB e Lear Siegler ADM 3E e Computer or terminal that emulates one of the above Publication 2755 833 4 16 Installing the Decoder The AUX port on the NEMA Type 4 decoder has a 19 pin male connector and communicates over an RS 232 serial communication line Figure 4 8 shows terminals you can connect to the AUX port of the NEMA Type 4 decoder Figure 4 8 Connecting terminal to AUX port of NEMA Type 4 OOO jeu HOST SCANNER A SCANNER B RS 232 RS 232 422 485 Use the Cat No 2755 CT1 communication cable or construct your own cable using the Cat No 2755 NC17 Connector Kit and pinouts shown in Appendix D Connecting the Host Device Publication 2755 833 Supported Terminal Types e Allen Brody Industrial Terminals Manual 1771 71 12 T3 Configuration Data Entry e Allen Bradley 1784 T45 Laptop Terminal e DEC VT100 e Lear Siegler ADM 3E e Computer or terminal that emulates one of the above See Appendix D for details on connecting each terminal See Chapters 5 through 14 for details on using a terminal to configure the decoder and to monitor operations The HOST port allows the
50. Table Discrete I O Publication 2755 833 Figure 7 2 Inter scan timer Direction of Travel _ Field 1 a mA 5 Scan Line W Width of label D Distance traveled during Inter S can Timer S Distance between start of field 1 field 2 lt S gt The label orientation must be such that distance D is lt S for the scanner to scan all of Field 2 The line speed must be constant Set the nter Scan Timer to a value between the minimum and maximum values to prevent additional decodes of Field 1 while allowing all of Field 2 to be scanned To allow multiple reads of a single symbol for verification purposes set the Inter Scan Timer to a value that is less than equation 1 Capture Count Field Type Options 1 through 8 or V 2 Select Edit Specifies the number of identical valid scans that must be decoded before a read is considered valid The default is 2 which means the capture count is not satisfied until two sequential identical valid scans are decoded A capture count of 2 is appropriate for most applications To specify a different capture count select a value between 1 and 8 or V V for Verify requires that each symbol in a bar code must match an entry in the primary match code table to produce a valid read The V capture count is useful in high speed verification applications where the value of the symbol is known By loading the expected value
51. The command format for reading this data is Read Counters and Performance Indicator High Byte Low Byte MSB LSB 1 STS 00 CMD 01H 3 TNS 5 Read Counter or Performance Indicator Address i O Ff N O Appendix A lists the address and byte size for each counter and the decoder performance indicator Publication 2755 833 PCCC Host Commands 16 7 The following command reads the value of output counter 1 Read Output Counter 1 High Byte Low Byte LSB TEST 604H Nn oo O Ff N O Read Reply High Byte Low Byte STS 00H CMD Reply 41H ba oO wo O Ff N O Counter Data You can read more than one counter however the read operation must specify an address within the valid address range and start on an address boundary If you try to read outside a valid address range the reply returns with a status of 10H invalid address Read Last Host Message The last message sent to the host is stored at address 800H The command and reply format for reading the last host message is Read Last Host Message High Byte Low Byte LS STS Address 800H Soe Unused N ow oO ANO Reply 5 High Byte Low Byte STS 00H CMD Reply 41H 0 2 4 Data from Last Host Message aw Publication 2755 833 16 8 PCCC Host Commands Unprotected Write Command Publication 2755 833 Read Decoder Configuration Data Appendix A lists the address location for each configuration parameter along wit
52. Typical R values range from 300 to 6 000 ohms depending on the source voltage Figure G 1 DC output module application MOD 1 8 DC Output Module Connector Block at xs o Fuse _Load VVVVVV Enclosure P R Conduit Hole CA 7 DC Source 3 60 VDC Output module functions as switch nota power source Note For highly inductive or capacitive loads make sure that the current does not exceed the maximum ratings of the fuse or module You can use a diode to protect the module See Figure G 3 Publication 2755 833 G 2 Output Module Applications Publication 2755 833 AC Output Module Application Figure G 2 illustrates a typical AC output module application When using high impedance loads you may have to add an additional resistor R in parallel with the load Select a value for R that maintains a minimum current of 50 mA RMS through the output module in the closed state Figure G 2 AC output module application MOD 1 8 AC Output Module Connector Block 2 xs r Fuse _ Load A VVWV Enclosure p R Conduit Hole AC Source Output module functions as switch nota power source Note For highly inductive or capacitive loads make sure that the current does not exceed the maximum ratings of the fuse or module You can use a diode to protect the module See Figure G 3 Using a Diode to Protect Outpu
53. architecture The decoders support an optional I O Module Board with eight positions for output modules These I O modules are used to control external AC or DC devices Conditions that activate the outputs are under user control via the configuration screens or host commands Publication 2755 833 2 6 Decoder Features Publication 2755 833 All positions accept an output module Position eight also accepts an input module You can configure the input module in position 8 to automatically load scanned bar code data into the match code table This function is referred to as Autoload Input Match code functions are described in detail in Chapters 7 and 8 Each decoder has two conduit holes or optional connectors for wiring the I O modules The I O Module Board is available in several variations for factory or customer installation You can order the decoder with the I O Module Board only for customer installation of specific modules or with 2 DC outputs and 1 DC input for out of the box applications The options available for the NEMA Type 1 and Type 4 decoders are e I O board without modules e T O board with 2 DC output modules and 1 DC input module e I O board with 1 NEMA Type 4 connector and cable for installing up to 4 modules in positions 1 8 e I O board with 2 NEMA Type 4 connectors and cables for installing up to 8 modules in positions 1 8 e I O board with 2 DC output modules 1 DC input module and 2 NEMA Type 4
54. closed 0664H Hold output 5 closed 0665H Hold output 6 closed 0666H Hold output 7 closed 0667H Hold output 8 closed 0668H Start Scanner B Trigger 0669H Stop Scanner B Trigger Pharma Code Configuration 0700H 0725H The decoder shall use the existing set match table symbology type command with a value of 9 to set the match table symbology type to PHARMA The table below shows the mapping between the PCCC Host Commands and the parameters described in the PHARMA CODE CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS Section Number of Acceptable Values PCCC Address Configuration Parameter Bytes Default in bold enable Pharma Code 701H decode direction 1 0 Forward 1 Reverse 2 Forward A Reverse B 3 Reverse A Forward B 702H quiet zone ratio 1 4 10 5 Default 0 Use Default 703H space tolerance 1 0 Ignore 5 to 40 15 bar tolerance 0 Ignore 5 to 40 15 minimum number of bars 3to 12 5 wide to narrow bar ratio 0 Midrange 2to4 code verification list entry 1 0 none 7 to 8190 709H to 725H code verification list entry 2 through 16 2 bytes per 0 none entry 7 to 8190 The AUX port supports a terminal for either configuring the decoder or for man entry For information on use of the AUX port for manual data entry consult Chi Publication 2755 833 A 12 Decoder Configuration Addresses Series B Configuration Parameters 0900H 0901H Number of Acceptable Values PCCC Address Configura
55. connectors cables for installing up to 8 modules in positions 1 8 Each option is listed under Decoder Options in this chapter Decoder Features 2 7 Decoder Options Options available when ordering the NEMA Type 1 decoder are NEMA Type 1 Decoders listed inside the decoder s cover as shown below Note that on actual production labels e the base catalog number will appear in the first field following the words Cat No the series letter will appear in the field following Ser the revision letter will appear in the field following Rev CAT NO SER REV POWER CORD 1 0 0 NONE USER MANUAL B1 0 BOARD B6 1 0 BOARD DISPLAY MODULE eae USNONE B2 0 BOARD 2 CONN amp CABLES inisi 2 240VAC EUROPEAN BLANK ENGLISH 1 D C IN 2 D C OUT B7 0 BOARD 2 CONN amp CABLES BLANK NONE BLANK 120VAC U S B5 1 0 BOARD 1 D C IN 2 D C OUT 1 CONN amp CABLE BLANK NONE J Power Cords Power cords available when ordering the NEMA Type 1 decoder are Option Power Cord Description Blank a VAC IEC 320 terminated three prong U S style power cord 6 ft 1 83 m 0 No power cord User must supply appropriate power cord 1 roe IEC 320 three wire U S Color Code unterminated power cord 6 ft 1 83 m 2 240 VAC IEC 320 three wire European Harmonized unterminated power cord 2 5 m 8 ft 2 in Supplied with decoder if alternate power cord
56. copies of the same data being set as different fields in the host message For example if the Number of Fields in Message parameter is set to a number greater than 1 with the host message field number set to All then the same symbol will be processed through a single rule multiple times For the purposes of this example assume the number of fields in message value is set to 3 and the user has enabled rule number 1 as shown below SOURCE SYMBOLOGY SYMBOL NUMBER FIND STRING CONTAINING REPLACE ENTIRE STRING WITH MINIMUM FIELD LENGTH ALIGNMENT Right FILL CHARACTER None 0 HOST MESSAGE FIELD NUMBER ALL 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 BAR CODE STRING FIELD IN HOST MESSAGE match match match match match match Commands ESC Change SPACE Cursor Control ARROUS Publication 2755 833 Configuration Host Message Replacement Rules 10 11 If Scanner A reads the following symbols AB1 1AB BAI Then the host message would be AB1AB1AB1 Since the first symbol read satisfies the search criteria it will continue passing through the rule until all host fields are filled Changing the symbol number to 2 would lead to a host message of 1ABIABIAB Instead if the Symbol Number parameter is set to All and the host message field number is set to Al then each symbol that has satisfied a rule is marked That symbol s marked status prohibits other rules with both Symbol Number and Host Message Field Number parame
57. counter If Any had been selected as the Symbology it will change to I 2 of 5 Every time the system encounters a matching I 2 of 5 label it will then Increment the counter Activate appropriate outputs This will continue until the decoder encounters a Code 39 label with the same value at which point the system will Reset the Mode to Disable Change the Symbology to Code 39 Increment the counter a final time Activate appropriate outputs a final time You can use multiple Lot entries and have them running independently of one another The Lot parameter provides a level of process monitoring and control sophistication required in only a few applications but highly valuable where needed to generate statistical information For example suppose extended match code table entry 1 is set up for lot mode with activation of output 4 If the first Interleaved 2 of 5 symbol read by the decoder has a value of 123456 then the mode becomes Match Entry and 123456 becomes the match string Subsequent I 2 of 5 symbols with the same value will each increment the counter in row 1 and activate output 4 The first Code 39 symbol read that has the value 123456 will close the lot and change the Symbology value from I 2 of 5 to Code 39 change M to D for the Mode activate output 4 for the last time and increment the counter a final time This closed lot will not increment the counter or activate outputs for any
58. data output counters e decoder performance values e host messages The AUX terminal and LCD display can each display bar code data output counter values and decoder performance indicators The parameters on the screen shown below control how this data is formatted on both devices AUX and LCD DISPLAY FORMAT DISPLAY DATA MESSAGE FORMAT Unformatted SCROLL LCD No POSITION O BAR CODE STRINGS 0 DECODER PERFORMANCE O PACKAGE COUNTER 0 SYMBOLS NOT READ COUNTER PRIMARY COUNTERS 0 1 None 0 2 None Commands ESC Change SPACE Cursor Control ARROWS Each format parameter is defined below along with the field type and possible values The default value is shown in bold letters Display Data Field Type Options None Aux Only LCD Only Aux and LCD Select Controls whether the formatted data is sent to the AUX terminal and or the LCD display The default is None which disables the display of data on both devices Publication 2755 833 9 2 Configuration AUX and LCD Display Parameters Publication 2755 833 Start Character Ll Source Identifier Header Mes sage Select AUX Only to display the data on the AUX terminal but not the LCD display Select LCD Only to display the data on the LCD display but not the AUX terminal Select AUX and LCD to enable the display of data on both devices The display parameters set for the AUX port apply to the AUX terminal when
59. detectors PhotoSeries 6000 or 9000 with 2755 LD4 and LD8 scanners You must order a current sinking type sensor with the QD Quick Disconnect suffix that is capable of operating with a 12V DC source pin 1 and drawing not more than 100 mA and a sink capability of 5 mA at 12V DC For example Catalog Number 42SRU 6203 QD or Catalog Number 42GRU 9200 QD Communication Cable and Connector Kit A cable and connector kit is available for the AUX and HOST ports of the NEMA Type 4 decoder We recommend using Catalog Number 2755 NC17 to make your own cable for RS 422 or RS 485 Pinouts can be found in Appendices D and E Use Catalog Number 2755 CT1 only for RS 232 Order as separate components using the following catalog numbers Description Connector Kit 19 pin NEMA 4 Host or AUX port connectors Used to make custom NEMA 4 communication cables Interface Cable 10 foot cable with NEMA Type 4 connector on one end for connecting to HOST or AUX port of NEMA Type 4 Decoder and 25 pin DB connector on other end for connecting to a host device or programming terminal for RS 232 only Host Port Multidrop interface cable for DH485 applications using NEMA Type 4 decoders Interface Cable Publication 2755 833 Chapter Objectives Function of Decoder Bar Code Symbologies Configuration Options Chapter 3 Overview of Decoder Operations This chapter defines the function of the decoder and gives an overview of decoder ope
60. does not match any entry in the primary match code table The read and no match condition is used to detect when incorrect labels have been used The corresponding output counter increments each time a read and no match condition occurs No Read or No Match Activates the specified output when either a Buffer Full no read or a no match condition occurs The bar code data does not match any entry in the primary match code table Like the read and no match condition this condition is used to detect incorrect or missing labels The corresponding output counter increments each time a no read or no match condition occurs The specified output signals that the bar code data buffer is full and cannot process additional bar code data The output turns off when the buffer full condition is cleared This is not a pulsed output The output will actuate whenever the Buffer Full condition exists and turn off when Host Communications resume Often the decoder can decode data faster than the host can receive it Use this condition as an indicator to control the package rate to keep pace with host transmissions The corresponding output counter increments each time the buffer full condition occurs Buffer Overflow The specified output signals that bar code data has Publication 2755 833 been lost because of a buffer overflow condition The output turns off when the buffer overflow condition is cleared The buffer overflow condi
61. for data entry The command address 901H distinguishes this command function from the 900H command Bytes 6 23 define the characters of the message Configuration AUX Terminal Data Entry 13 13 Display Message on AUX Terminal Enable Aux Terminal for Keyboard Entry 901H msg High Byte Low Byte LSB STS TOn TNS Command Address 901H Messages that are longer than the size of the AUX terminal display will truncate When the host sends the command to the decoder the text string displays on the AUX terminal prompting you to enter data The message always displays at the beginning of the line in position 01 ENTER CARTON DATA If the command is sent with a string length of zero no message defined the decoder displays the Default Prompt Message When receiving the host or default prompt message the keyboard is enabled for one entry Type the data and press Enter ENTER CARTON DATA 123456 Enter After pressing Enter the keyboard is disabled until receiving the next host command To cancel the operation press Esc Publication 2755 833 Chapter Objectives Connect and Set Up AUX Terminal Chapter 1 Al Display and System Configuration This chapter describes how to use the bar code decoder configuration software to Display bar code strings Display decoder performance indicators and counters Reset status and counters Restart the system Select a new language option Save the current configur
62. going on line You simply input the test bar code string on the left The string that will appear in the host message after application of the displayed rule appears on the right If your test string does not create a match you will be notified of that fact on the right side of the screen Taken together these three sections provide for full control over host message replacement rules and enable you to format complete comprehensible message fields as required Each format parameter is defined below along with the field type and possible values The default value is shown in bold letters in the parameter tables A careful study of the examples that follow the parameter descriptions will help explain their use Metacharacters The decoder provides a complete set of special purpose characters you can use to perform logical functions on characters expressions or even entire strings These characters are known as metacharacters Simply put they are string manipulation commands consisting of standard ASCII characters which you can embed within search or replacement strings Each metacharacter conveys a specific instruction to the decoder software and acts upon a clearly defined range within the string Metacharacters can be used with standard alphanumeric characters to describe and manipulate even the most complex substitution scenarios with ease Publication 2755 833 10 4 Configuration Host Message Replacement Rules A listing of val
63. gt lt Moves highlight one command to the right or left Command Summary NEXT PAGE Displays the next configuration screen The screens display in the order below Publication 2755 833 Introduction to AUX Terminal Configuration 5 11 NEXT PAGE Symbology Scanner Control Primary Match Code Dis crete 1 0 NEXT PAGE NEXT PAGE NEXT PAGE NEXT PAGE NEXT PAGE Host Communications serene Extended Match Code Table Aux and LCD Display Format Host Message Replacement Rules Host Message Format Aux Terminal Data Entry Note You can also access these screens in any order from the Select Operation menu THIS PAGE Returns to the top of the current configuration screen and refreshes that screen RECALL Copies storage memory to operating memory All parameter changes take immediate effect with the following exceptions Host communications parameters baud rate bits character parity host protocol device address ACK character and NAK character These parameters will take effect only after a Restart Autoload Primary and Extended Match Code Table Requires a Restart before scanned data will be autoloaded into the table The following message prompts you to confirm the recall Publication 2755 833 5 12 Introduction to AUX Terminal Configuration Publication 2755 833 SAVE DEFAULT Press N or Esc to cancel the operation and return to the S
64. in positions 21 40 Any data you configure to display beyond position 40 will be truncated The LCD display will look like this for the above configuration Line 1 displays the bar code data and the decoder performance values Line 2 displays output counters 1 4 and 8 Bar Code Data Performance Indicators ScannerA Scanner B 123456 98 96 20 001012 000237 000000 40 Primary Counter 1 Primary Counter 4 Primary Counter 8 Match Entry Read and No Match No Read Configuration AUX and LCD Display Parameters 9 9 Important Host messages and Default Prompt Messages always display in position 01 If host messages are expected select starting positions for other data that are greater than the length of these messages to avoid conflicts Example 2 In Example 2 the LCD Display is enabled to display bar code data in position 1 and decoder performance values in position 15 Scrolling is enabled for the LCD Display which means the display operates as a 2 line display with 20 characters per line Both lines display characters in positions 1 20 With scrolling enabled you cannot display more than 20 characters per line at one time Any data you configure to display beyond position 20 will be truncated AUX and LCD DISPLAY FORMAT DISPLAY DATA KAMI Enables LCD to display data MESSAGE FORMAT Unformatted lt Displays unformatted bar code data SCROLL LCD Yes lt 4 Enables Scrolling
65. intercharacter gap are not part of the code as with Code 39 See continuous code Publication 2755 833 G 4 Glossary Publication 2755 833 E EAN Acronym for European Article Numbering System the international standard bar code for retail food packages element 1 A single binary position in a character 2 Dimensionally the narrowest width in a character bar or space encoded area The total linear dimension consisting of all the characters of a code pattern including start stop characters and data G guard bars The bars at the ends and center of a UPC and EAN symbol They ensure a complete scan of the bar code H helium neon laser The type of laser most commonly used in bar code scanners Because the laser beam is bright red bars must not be printed with red ink The bars would be indistinguishable from the background hex Abbreviated form of the word hexadecimal See hexadecimal hexadecimal numbering system A base 16 numbering system that uses the symbols 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F host 1 A central controlling computer in a network system 2 Any device on a network system that provides a controlling function to another device on the network 3 Any intelligent device for which another device is providing a communication interface to a network host port Serial port supporting RS 232 RS 422 RS 485 communications interfaces through which a device can control the operatio
66. into a match code table the decoder only needs to acquire one valid scan matching the expected values to produce a valid read Configuration Scanner Control Primary Match Table Discrete I O 7 7 The decoder interprets a scanned label in one of three ways e Valid Scan Sufficient valid symbols have been decoded to satisfy the Symbols Scan parameter e Undecodable Scan The scanned data does not correspond to a valid pattern within the selected symbologies e Misread or Substitution Error Smudges stray marks voids or print errors resulting in wider or narrower bars and spaces may result in a pattern that is valid within an enabled symbology that is not representative of the intended data The capture count reduces misreads by requiring the decoder to read labels multiple times before producing a valid read Symbologies that are not self checking do not use start and stop characters or check characters are more susceptible to misreads For example Interleaved 2 of 5 without check characters is not self checking Setting the capture count too high may result in excessive no reads particularly when the number of scans crossing the label in a trigger period is low 5 10 Set the capture count to a value no greater than half the number of expected scans crossing the label in a trigger period Symbols Scan Field Type Options 1 6 Any 1 Select E dit Specifies the number of bar code symbols that must
67. n Output number 5 c Condition that activates output 1 Read Package Time in milliseconds that ae tttt output is activated 0110 110 milliseconds Response 00CR 00 command complete response code CR end of message control code Publication 2755 833 for Carriage Return ASCII Host Commands OH Hold Output Open Closed Command Format OHnfftttt 15 31 Function Allows the host to control the discrete outputs regardless of their normal state for a set duration When the duration expires the output reverts to its previous state Note If a normally open output is held open or a normally closed output is held closed the state of the output will not change ATTENTION An output held open or closed will reestablish itself after a power loss all other conditions will be deactivated if power is lost A Restart command will deactivate a held output Parameters __ nfftttt Command Parameter Function Valid Values Parameters n Discrete output number 1 through 8 f Hold switch operation in open 00 Hold Open or closed state 11 Hold Close Time in milliseconds that 0000 0010 to 9999 output remains in held state milliseconds tttt When the time expires the output returns to its previous 0000 holds output in state state until changed Response rr lt end gt rr response code lt end gt end of message control code A duration of 0000 holds the specified outpu
68. parameter In cases where there are fewer symbols than there are fields specified then the decoder will send no read message strings as explained below If no rule finds a match for a given host message field it inserts the no read replacement string for that field number In cases where the no read replacement string has not been defined for that particular field number then the decoder inserts the default no read string Finally if the default no read string is not defined then the decoder leaves the field blank Configuration Host Message Replacement Rules 10 15 Examples Example 1 Sorting by Data Source Parameter Rule 1 Value Rule 2 Value Source A B Symbology Any Any Symbol Number All All Find String Containing eda amp amp Minimum Field Length 0 0 Alignment Right Right Fill Character None None Host Message Field 1 2 Number In the decode mode Coordinated 1 or 2 two symbols per package and each scanner reading a single symbol the data from Scanner A will always appear first and the data from Scanner B second Appropriate No Read messages may be selected for each scanner by using the No Read Replacement Rules Example 2 Identifying the Source of Data Parameter Rule 1 Value Rule 2 Value Source A B Aux Symbology Any Any Symbol Number All All Find String Containing Replace Entire i amp amp Aux Data Minimum
69. read see valid read have the same meaning S scan The search for a symbol or marks which are to be optically recognized scan area The area intended to contain a bar code symbol Publication 2755 833 G 8 Glossary Publication 2755 833 scanner A device that optically scans bar code symbols and converts the optical information into digital or analog form and sends it to a decoder self checking A bar code or symbol using a checking algorithm which can be applied to each character to guard against undetected errors Non self checked codes may employ a check digit or other redundancy in addition to the data message space The lighter element of a bar code formed by the background between bars start stop character A bar code character that provides the scanner with information about how the code is bounded and its orientation The start character is normally at the left hand end of a horizontal code and adjacent to the most significant character The stop character is normally at the right hand end of a horizontal code and adjacent to the least significant character step ladder orientation A bar code or symbol presented in such a manner that the direction of travel of the symbol is parallel to the cars and spaces of the code string A sequence of ASCII characters symbol A combination of characters including start stop characters and check characters as required which form a complete scannable entity
70. recognizes any signal greater than 1 millisecond as a start trigger Configuration Scanner Control Primary Match Table Discrete I O 7 13 If the filter is enabled the decoder starts a timer whenever it senses a package detect signal longer than 1 millisecond This timer delays the decoder s reaction to the package detect for between 10 and 15 milliseconds to allow any bounce in the signal level to settle If the package detect signal is still present when the timer expires the decoder will begin to process the package Package detect signals shorter than 10 milliseconds will be ignored by the decoder when the filter is used Because of timer resolution package detects between 10 and 15 milliseconds may be ignored The filter likewise reacts to the loss of the package detect signal When the signal is lost for a minimum of 1 millisecond the filter will maintain the trigger for 10 to 15 milliseconds The resultant trigger period length will be equal to the package detect period 5 milliseconds Note This parameter applies only when Scanner B is operating in independent mode See Scanning Mode under Scanner B Control Package Detect Input B Sense Field Type Options Lo Package Select Hi Package Determines whether a package on Scanner B is detected when the voltage at the package detect input is high or low The default is LO Package Note This parameter applies only to Scanner B and only when Scanner B i
71. saved them to storage memory you will retain most of your configuration parameters even with an extended loss of power When you restart the decoder it will read the saved configuration parameters rather than the factory defaults Parameters and values not retained after extended power loss without a battery include e Extended Match Code Table Configuration which will be lost and reset to factory defaults e Primary Match Code Table counts which will be lost and reset to Zero e Host Replacement Rule Examples which are the test examples you have entered on the bottom half of the Host Message Replacement Rules screen These examples will be lost and the example section of the screen will be cleared Note that the rules themselves will be retained The long life of the optional battery makes it unlikely that any loss of configuration or data will occur during any conceivable power outage in battery backed decoders Publication 2755 833 3 8 Overview of Decoder Operations Decoder Operating Modes Publication 2755 833 This section gives a brief overview of the different operating modes of the decoder You select these operating modes and parameters when configuring the decoder Scanning Modes The decoder supports two scanning modes Coordinated Mode Scanner A and Scanner B are coordinated using the same trigger source and set of configuration parameters Independent Mode Scanner A and Scanner B operate independently ea
72. the decoder will begin to process the package Package detect signals shorter than 10 milliseconds will be ignored by the decoder when the filter is used Because of timer resolution package detects between 10 and 15 milliseconds may be ignored The filter likewise reacts to the loss of the package detect signal When the signal is lost for a minimum of 1 millisecond the filter will maintain the trigger for 10 to 15 milliseconds The resultant trigger period length will be equal to the package detect period 5 milliseconds Note This parameter also applies to Scanner B when operating in coordinated mode In coordinated mode Scanner A and B are triggered by the same package detect signal Package Detect Input A Filter and Package Input A Sense Package Detect Input A Sense Field Type Options Lo Package Select Hi Package Determines whether a package on Scanner Port A is detected when the voltage at the package detect input is high or low The default is LO Package Note This parameter applies to Scanner B when operating in coordinated mode In coordinated mode Scanner A and B are triggered by the same package detect signal Package Detect Input A Filter and Package Input A Sense Package Detect Input B Filter Field Type Options Yes Select No Enables or disables the debounce filter for the package detect signal on Scanner B The default is No which disables the filter When disabled the decoder
73. the characters below are used as single character commands ACK NAK or Start Stop Scan Characters then the escape sequence ESC must be used with all two character commands that start with that character ABCDHIMNOPRST If the single character commands do not use these uppercase characters you do not have to use the start command sequence For example if N is used as the NAK command then it would be impossible to send the NR command without preceding it with the ESC start command sequence If n is used instead then no start command sequence would be necessary to send an NR command Therefore we recommend using only lowercase letters for single character commands Note The start command sequence lt ESC gt is not valid when sending ASCH commands using the DH485 interface 2 Command Code Two characters that specify the command 3 Parameters Data that further determines the command action Some commands do not have parameters 4 Terminator An ASCII control code less than decimal 32 that terminates the command Typical control codes are lt CR gt lt LF gt lt CRLF gt lt ETX gt Command Replies The decoder sends a reply in response to each command sent from the host Command replies have the following structure 1 2 4 5 Parameter End of Response End of Parameter Code Message Code Code Note The first two parts of the response may not be present depending on the command ASCII Host Comman
74. the event occurs The Reset Diagnostic Counters command resets all counter values to zero 0 Reset Diagnostic Counters The Reset Diagnostic Counters CMD 06H FNC 07 sets all diagnostic counter values to zero 0 The command and reply formats look like this Reset Diagnostic Counters Command High Byte Low Byte STS 00H CMD 06H 0 TNS 2 FNC 07H 4 Reset Diagnostic Counters Reply High Byte Low Byte MSB A B 1 STS 00H CMD Reply 46H 0 3 TNS 2 Read Diagnostic Status The Read Diagnostic Status command CMD 06H FNC 03H returns seven diagnostic parameters in the reply Diagnostic Return Parameters Parameter Bytes Size Mode S tatus 00s byte Extended Type 1 byte Interface Type 1 byte Processor Type 21H 1 byte Series Revision Bulletin Number P roduct Name Product Information 22H Series B Revision C 1 byte ASCII characters 11 bytes 8 bytes The command and reply format for the Read Diagnostic Status Command is PCCC Host Commands 16 17 Read Diagnostic Status Command High Byte Low Byte MSB LSB o T 4 Read Diagnostic Status Reply High Byte Low Byte LSB STS 00H CMD Reply 46H es D or S a E The Series Revision byte indicates the product series and revision levels The three most significant bits indicate the series and the other five bits indicate the revision For example a value of 0 A 1 B 2 C A Series A Revision A returns as 000 00000
75. the length of the data package e substitute a predetermined text string for one or more expected values e convert abstract bar code contents into more easily understood text form e categorize labels based upon selected portions of their contents Both the search and replacement strings that make up a Host Message Replacement Rule can consist of a combination of standard ASCII characters and special characters known as metacharacters Metacharacters are explained later in this section Publication 2755 833 10 2 Configuration Host Message Replacement Rules Publication 2755 833 Symbols vs Host Message Fields Understanding host message replacement rules and their use requires that you clearly understand the difference between two frequently confused terms A bar code symbol is the set of bars and spaces from which the scanner gathers data for interpretation by the decoder A message field is the decoded information sent from the decoder to a host after processing an incoming symbol In the most simple terms a symbol can be thought of as a stimulus to the decoder and a message field or group of message fields assembled into a host message can be considered the response to that stimulus Introduction to Host Message Replacement Rules The decoder allows you to use up to 16 Host Message Replacement Rules Each rule can be enabled and defined as necessary to meet your own application needs In addition to the prompt
76. tion leave pins G and H open UX Terminal Connectto pin G to use the AUX terminal for manual data entry func elector tions When connected to G you cannot access the configuration me nus IN8 Auto Load Input You can connect a normally opened N 0 contact IN8 between pins K and L Close the contacts to activate the AutoLoad Function See Chapter 6 and Appendix H nr Publication 2755 833 D 2 Setting Up Terminals Lear Siegler ADM 3E Terminal Publication 2755 833 Follow these steps if using a Lear Siegler ADM 3E terminal 1 Construct a cable to connect the terminal to the decoder Use a Belden 8303 Alpha 45123 or equivalent type of cable Use the following connector pinouts Male 19 pin NEMA Type 4 or Female 25 pin D Shell Connector NEMA NEMA Type4 Type l Transmit Data Decoder T a 3 ignal Groun Note Connect shield to shell of cable connectors at both ends Plug terminal into power supply Power on terminal Press Shift SETUP to enter setup mode an A Ww N terminal Full Duplex FDX 9600 Baud Rate 8 Data Bits per Character No Parity XON XOFF Flow Control or Handshake Blinking Block Cursor 6 To save the selected parameters press Ctrl S 7 Exit setup mode by pressing Shift SETUP 25 pin male Terminal Use the arrow keys to set the following parameters on the 8 You are now ready to configure the decoder See Chapter 5
77. trigger source is an internal timer that cycles the trigger on and off at a set time interval Once triggered the decoder continuously attempts to decode bar codes until one of the following conditions occurs Number of symbols bar codes per package count is satisfied Trigger off command stop scan character received from host device Host Decode mode Package detect signal is no longer present Package Detect mode No read timer expires Internal Timer mode Sending Data to Host Speed vs Timing In the triggered mode you can configure the decoder to send information to a host device and or operate the discrete outputs Immediately After Valid Package for highest speed This is a package with valid bar code symbols that meets the symbols bar codes per package count The Immediately After Valid Package response mode sends decoded data to the discrete outputs and host immediately after the decode operation This response mode is useful in high speed applications where maximum throughput is required or e At End of Trigger for predictable timing The At End of Trigger response mode sends decoded data to the discrete outputs and host when the Host sends the stop scan character Host Decode mode Package detect signal expires Package Detect mode No read timer expires Internal Timer mode This response mode is useful when timing of the discrete outputs or timing of host commun
78. values e text strings including non printable characters see Appendix I Select Edit Numeric Field A select edit numeric field as its name implies behaves as both a select field and edit field That is you can either enter a numeric value from the keyboard or use the space bar to move through a list of available values Changing Fields To change the contents of a select field edit field or select edit field use these keys Publication 2755 833 5 8 Introduction to AUX Terminal Configuration Publication 2755 833 Space Backspace Tab Return Esc Advances through available settings in a select or select edit field or opens an edit field for changes Pressing Space in an edit field clears the contents of the field and places you in edit mode In edit mode the field is highlighted displays in reverse video while you enter text Deletes the previous character in edit mode Moves backwards through the available settings in a select or select edit field This key is labeled Delete or Rubout on some computers This key is not valid in an edit field until the field is open Opens edit field and puts the cursor in the first position without affecting the field contents If pressed when field is already open moves the cursor one place to the right This allows you to change the contents of edit fields without first clearing their contents with the space bar Opens select and select edit
79. verify that these specifications are within the proper guidelines for your scanner Cause Scanner is at incorrect angle or distance from the bar code Solution Determine the optimum reading angle by checking the Decoder Performance Indicators while the Decode Mode is set to Continuous and using a static bar code label position Fix the scanner at a position that produces a high decoder performance value After properly positioning the scanner return the decoder configuration to the correct triggered mode of operation Cause Package detect positioning Solution Make sure the package detect signal is active before the bar code enters the laser beam Check that package detect is continually blocked while in scanning area of laser The Trigger Active indicator should light when a bar code is scanned in triggered mode Cause Scan speed not high enough or product line speed to high Publication 2755 833 17 6 Publication 2755 833 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Solution Calculate scans per label based on line speed and bar code orientation picket fence or step ladder Calculate at least five scans per label at full line speed If calculation is less than five scans per label select a higher speed scanner or reduce product line speed Problem Output LED indicator does not operate Cause Configuration parameters are not set correctly Solution Review configuration parameters The LED indicators are active for
80. we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations ATTENTION Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss Attention statements help you to e identify a hazard e avoid the hazard e recognize the consequences Important Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product Using this Manual Decoder Features Overview of Decoder Operations Table of Contents toc i Chapter 1 Chapter Objectives 22sciaaceeideaceaixenidwiaenaeea 1 1 What the Package Includes cece ete e eee eens 1 1 Contents of Manual sisieiiadbadvendtaedwswnetieweaneds 1 2 What You Need to Know ccc ce cece eee eee eens 1 3 Terminology lt a xc caring a keurs we Xetewe as date gae Hee ae ws ooo 1 3 Conventions Sed vcccts evoke edeuekeser twa Wewaewe he 1 3 Related Publications 2 cc cece cece teeta 1 4 Chapter 2 CHAP PODIECIVES supire dnd Cotievind Cote haddeerdms ain 2 1 NEMA Type Enclosures 3 c ie oshw tan aeewderdann dead es es 2 1 Scanner ONS seeria itviedidapactidupemapadamnsis pues 2 1 Power Supp ieri danica nanai a a a aoe ees 2 2 LED IMGICAIONS sisie i tate td gan Eaa aa aE anid wi 2 3 LCD DISPIAY ss5ccvdiencdaeedadeus candace AARG 2 4 AUX POM ceco etekdadrateaneenesaeeds tinni iiri u aa 2 4 Decoder Configuration ccc cece eee ee teens 2 4 Manual Date Enty icase a paniir i awiseweiwew aeons 2
81. 0 9999 0 None 1 Interleaved 2 of 5 2 Codabar 3 UPC A 4 UPC E 5 EAN 8 6 EAN 13 7 Code 128 8 Pharma Code 15 Any 0 32 0 Empty 32 characters 0 None 1 Read Package No Read Package atch Complete atch Entry Read and no match o Read or no match 7 Auto Load 8 Invalid 9 Host Buffer Full A Host Buffer Overflow B Open C Closed 0 Code 39 1 Interleaved 2 of 5 2 Codabar 3 UPC A 4 UPC E 5 EAN 8 6 EAN 13 7 Code 128 8 Pharma Code 15 Any Ignored nue WN ow ou ue a 0 32 0 Empty 32 characters Publication 2755 833 A 8 Decoder Configuration Addresses Number of Acceptable Values PCCC Address Bytes Default in bold Configuration Parameter Output 6 Event 5 Output 6 Duration 78 57A symbology in Match Code Table Entry 7 7B 5 Enable Match Code Table Entry 7 57C Match Code 7 String Length String Output 7 Event Output 7 Duration symbology in Match Code Table Entry 8 5Al Enable Match Code Table Entry 8 5A2 Match Code 8 String Length String Publication 2755 833 0 None 1 Read Package 2 No Read Package 3 Match Complete 4 Match Entry 5 Read and no match 6 No Read or no match 7 Auto Load 8 Invalid 9 Host Buffer Full A Host Buffer Overflow 1 Interleaved 2 of 5 2 Codabar 3 UPC A 4 UPC E 5 EAN 8 6 EAN 13 7 Code 128 8 Pharma Code 15 Any Ignored 0 32 0 Empty 32 characters 0 No
82. 0 Decoder Performance Position 0 Package Counter Position AUX and LCD Display Format bols Not Read Counter 0 tion Primary Counter 1 Position 0 Primary Counter 2 Position 0 Primary Counter 3 Position 0 Primary Counter 4 Position 0 Primary Counter 5 Position 0 Primary Counter 6 Position 0 Primary Counter 7 Position 0 ABR Host a Blank Tank Publication 2755 833 Category of Parameters Host Message Format Host Communications Parameters marked with an asterisk require a save and restart to take effect Aux Terminal Data Entry Factory Default Settings Parameter Default S etting 25 Nae Source Identifier for AUX Blank Source Identifier for A Blank i W i ae Replacements Strings Blank Baud Rate 9600 B Data Step Parity None Host Protocol RS232 Device Address 1 ACK Character 255 None NAK Character 255 None Start Character Scanner A 255 Disabled Stop Character Scanner A 255 Disabled Start Character Scanner B 255 Disabled Stop Character Scanner B 255 Disabled Large Buffer No AEEnd of Trigger Transmission Check None Enable Keyboard Entry No Confirm Entry No AUX Data Format Unformated 008 BS Backspace Echo Data to Terminal No Size of Display 80 Bank Publication 2755 833 Appendix C Transmission Check The decoder can generate three types of transmission checks Longitudinal Redundancy Check A byte developed by an exclusive OR of
83. 0110 06H Diagnostic Command Bit 6 is cleared 0 for the command and set 1 for the reply Bit 4 5 and 7 are always zero To send an unprotected write command CMD byte 0 would look like this MSB LSB 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 fo fofofofiafy ofofto i Bit 6 cleared 0 for com 1000 Unprotected Write 08H mand Always 0 PCCC Host Commands 16 3 e STS Byte 1 specifies the command status which is always 0 e TNS Bytes 2 and 3 contain a unique transaction number sequence that links each command to a reply The TNS is user defined e FNC Code When the CMD byte 06H diagnostic command byte 4 specifies a diagnostic function For example FNC 01 means read diagnostic counters e Low Address When the CMD byte 01H unprotected read command or 08H unprotected write command byte 4 contains the low byte of a two byte address The low address byte 4 and high address byte 5 map to a specific area in decoder memory for a read or write operation e High Address When the CMD byte 01H unprotected read command or 08H unprotected write command byte 5 contains the high byte of a two byte address The low address byte 4 and high address byte 5 map to a specific area in decoder memory for a read or write operation e Data The data area is command dependent The starting byte for the data area is also command dependent Command Reply Format The general format and definition of a command rep
84. 01301 00 09 0 048 07 S 02 1 command Parameter Function Values Parameters h The number of the Search and 02 Replace Rule mm The host message field number 01 S Source 3 A B cc Symbology 01 Code 39 bb Symbol number 00 All ff Minimum field length 09 a Alignment O Right ppp Fill character 048 0 ll Length of search pattern string 07 String Search pattern string SS ll Length of replace pattern string 02 String Replace pattern string l Response 00CR 00 command complete response code CR end of message control code for Carriage Return Publication 2755 833 15 52 ASCII Host Commands SF Set No Read Replacement Strings Command Format SFnunllstring Function Set the No Read Replacement Strings Parameters nnilstring Command Parameter Function Valid Values Parameters The number of the No R ead a Replacement String noe Length of the No Read E i Replacement String COSE mpy O1 0110 24 String No Read Replacement String up to 24 characters Response rr lt end gt rr response code lt end gt end of message control code Example Command SF0207No Read Parameters 02 07 No Read Command F Parameters Parameter Function Values h The number of the No R ead 02 Replacement String il Length of the No R ead 07 Replacement String String No Read Replacement String No Read Response 00CR 00 command complete response code CR end of message control code Publication
85. 0H 8008H 40H 8009H 40H 800AH 40H 800BH i 40H 800CH 40H 800DH 40H 800E H 40H 8008F 40H 8010H 40H 801E H 40H 803F H 40H Decoder Configuration Addresses A 15 Extended Match Data 8000H A03FH The following table lists the configuration parameters for the Extended Match Data Table Address the counters by adding the offset i 40 H to the base address 8000 where i represents the counter number to 128 Number of Acceptable Values Configuration Parameter Default in bold 1 0 Disabled 1 Match_entry 2 Auto Load 3 Lot Source 1 1 Scanner A 2 Scanner B 3 A B 5 A B 1 symbology 0 Code 39 1 Interleaved 2 of 5 2 Codabar 3 UPC A 4 UPC E 5 EAN 8 6 EAN 13 7 Code 128 8 Pharma Code F ANY 0 to 999999 Discrete 1 0 no discrete 1 to 9 or 0aH always Discrete 2 0 no discrete 1 to 9 or 0aH always Discrete 3 0 no discrete 1 to 9 or 0aH always Discrete 4 Discrete 5 0 no discrete 1 to 9 or 0aH always Discrete 6 0 no discrete 1 to 9 or 0aH always g Discrete 7 0 no discrete 1 to 9 or 0aH always Loading Discrete 8 0 no discrete 1 to 9 or 0aH always atch pattern Length 1 0 32 0 Empty atch pattern String up to 32 characters Reserved Publication 2755 833 Appendix B Factory Default Settings Category of Parameters Parameter Default S etting Enable Code 39 Yes No on Pharma Code Uni
86. 15 46 RS Read Extended Match Set Status ASCII Host Commands 15 3 snes a Command Function AUX and LCD Display Format 15 47 DF Enable AUX Terminal and LCD to Display Formatted Data 15 48 DP Configure Data Display Positions for AUX Terminal and LCD 15 49 SD Enable LCD Scrolling Host Message Replacement Rules 15 50 SR Set Search and Replace Rule for Host Message Fields 15 52 SF Set No Read Replacement String Host Communications amp Host Message Format 15 53 HC Configure Host Communications 15 55 HB Configure Scanner B Start amp Stop Characters 15 56 F Configure Host Message Format 15 58 HF Set the Number of Fields in Host Message 15 59 X Configure AUX Terminal Source Identifier 15 60 M Configure Scanner A Source Identifier 15 61 B Configure Scanner B Source Identifier 15 62 HM Configure Header Message 15 63 NM Configure Default No Read String AUX Terminal Data Entry 15 64 AX Configure AUX Terminal Data Entry Operations 15 66 Display Text Message at AUX Terminal and LCD 15 68 PM Configure Default Prompt Message for AUX Terminal and LCD Status amp Counters 15 69 PI Read Decoder Performance Indicators 15 70 PR Read Package Counter 15 71 NR Read the Symbols Not Read Counter 15 72 MC Read Output Counter 15 73 PC Clear Package Counter 15 73 NC Clear Symbols Not Read Counter 15 35 CM Clear Primary C
87. 2755 833 for Carriage Return ASCII Host Commands HC Configure Host Communications Command Format HCaaannnssspppfr Function Configures host communication parameters Parameters aaannnssspppfr Command Parameter Function Valid Values Parameter ASCII decimal value aaa ACK Acknowledge character 000 to 254 255 None NAK character ASCII decimal value non Negative Acknowledgement 000 to 254 255 None ASCII decimal value SSS Start scan character A 000 to 254 255 None ASCII decimal value ppp Stop scan character A 000 to 254 255 None f Large buffer enable 1 Yes 0 No 0 Atend of Trigger r Send Message to Host 1 Immediately after Valid Package Response rr lt end gt rr response code lt end gt end of message control code Publication 2755 833 15 53 15 54 Publication 2755 833 ASCII Host Commands HC Configure Host Communications continued Example Command HC03603703504311 Parameters 03603703504311 Command Parameter Function Values Parameter aaa ACK character 036 character nnn NAK character 039 amp character SSS Start character for ScannerA 035 character ppp Stop character for Scanner A 043 character f Large buffer enable 1 Yes 1 Immediately after __f__ ppentessage p Host vaid Package Response 00CR 00 command complete response code CR end of message control code for Carriage Retur
88. 2755 DS1_ 2TSS DS4 cciciaicnerawnedsavueenvdeebecsheewas 18 1 Publication 2755 833 toc x Table of Contents Decoder Configuration Addresses Factory Default Settings Transmission Check Setting Up Terminals Connecting to a Host Protocol Selection Output Module Applications Publication 2755 833 Appendix A Decoder Function or Command Addresses 0ee0 ae Pharma Code Configuration 0700H 0725H eeu Series B Configuration Parameters 0900H 0901H Series B Configuration Parameters QEQOH OEFFH Host Message Replacement Rules 1000H 143FH Host Message No Read Replacement Strings 2000H 21B9H Extended Count Values D800H DA03H cece eae Extended Match Data 8000H AO3FH cc cece eee Extended Match Data 8000H AO3FH cee cee eee Appendix B Appendix C Appendix D Appendix Objectives v 25 oserirewseeercentaeds baekons dowd Connecting Terminal to AUX Porton NEMA Type 1 Decoder Connecting Terminal to AUX Portof NEMA Type 4 Decoder Lear Siegler ADM 3E Terminal ccc sce e cece ee eee DEC VT100 Terminal 22 c22ccsceebens desta eeadareeae nds Allen Bradley 1784 145 or T47 Programming Terminal Allen Bradley 1770 T1 T2 T3 Terminals 0u ees 2708 DH5 Attended Workstations 0 cece eee Appendix E RS 232 Interface cc a RS 422 Interface arapa ea a a ee Ea dona i oih RS 485 Using DH485 Protocol noaua Appendix
89. 4 MCSE OIC peated aer A que nes bee ein eee ean eae 2 5 Power Connector and On Off Switch cece 2 5 Memory Back p cotactts sweeties meted euowe estas eeu 2 5 Discrete 1 0 Modules cc ccc eee ee cece eee e eens 2 5 Decoder Options NEMA Type 1 Decoders 005 2 7 Power CordS ci2sdeuatenpatda ge cbwdaaeay ewulee ae SoS 2 7 Decoder Options NEMA Type 4 Decoders 005 2 8 POWED COGS aesmaws abe urinet urni saan Huy ewe eset 2 8 Input Output Modules 2o ean sane cease daeaed com eeaats 2 9 Replacement Fuses for decoders with I O Module Board options 2 9 1 0 Module Board Options available when ordering either the NEMA Type Lor Typ 4 decoder cine danawcueoenendereorndsa 2 9 DCD IDISGIAY anar aria siina asak Oa cba ddl ota aE deh a TA 2 10 SCaMNETS 245 ea kewas ea hee ode been eea Sakae ae oT eee wees 2 11 Decoder ACKESSONES ivsvae caaeens odawdwrie aniaui aes 2 11 Configuration and Cable Group Selector 4 2 11 Cable Selection GUNS 2 ici tuitventonredyeediudg es cums 2 12 Package Detectors for Scanners cc ccc eee e eee 2 13 Communication Cable and ConnectorKit 0 ue 2 13 Chapter 3 Chapter Objectives cc cece eee eee ees 3 1 Function of Decoder cc cece eee eee eee ees 3 1 BarCodeSymbologies 0c eee eee eens 3 1 Configuration Options cece eee eee eee eee eens 3 1 Publication 2755 833 toc ii Table of Contents
90. 6 Send Decoder Performance aaa 11 7 End Message nunua 11 7 Default No Read Message aiana 11 7 No Read Replacement Strings oaaae 11 8 Chapter 12 Host ommM nICANONS a i eass tawa a E 12 1 Baud Rate ca a perane npadanu a a a T a a ee 12 2 BSCR x cecum sanonu ea aea adem arate ss RS 12 2 Pal scucsactavtadseseiteeeaandawa Raia i u dea 12 2 Host Protocol sersrsadriserin enai nai a E 12 3 Device Address a nuanua eaaa 12 3 ACK Character civcsdecrd denneea einna esa ea ew ene eui 12 4 NAK Character c ciessmeGu ees apeoered eeGgeee eoure es 12 4 StartScan Character 2 ccc eee eee eee ees 12 5 Stop Scan Character iiss adades hed eie bande daa ve medica 12 5 Large Buffer cox cate wekwd denw eed se gwe news eeeswavie 12 6 Send Message toHOSt ccc ccc e cece eee teens 12 6 Transmission Check 0 0 cece cece eee eee 12 7 Chapter 13 Chapter ODjechyes ccecic duis bid omte dee duke idumaees 13 1 Supported Terminals acts ctnacia e Shedwet awe Ste dens ews 13 1 AUX Terminal Configuration ccs oe ae we kia dcp dak a ede eg 13 2 Enable Keyboard Entry 0 0c cee eee eee eee 13 2 Confirm EDY ismeri eta deed ae adie 13 3 Display and System Configuration ASCII Host Commands Table of Contents toc vii AUX Data Format sy csceus eed aees a 13 4 RUDOUCCHSIGUE weds ee ear eeewekesedews deen taw kes 13 4 Echo To Terminal saccc boas dee4ebedeeeyewe eae eee 13 4 SZEORDISOIGY pisaia ama area coarse Sedans ats 13 5 Default Pr
91. 6 will fire 60 of the time 3 5 100 Configuration Extended Match Table and Counters 8 9 Output Duration ATTENTION Outputs that are addressed from multiple Extended Match Code Table entries or from both Primary and Extended Match Code Table entries and have overlapping durations will activate as shown below Failure to consider this fact could lead to unexpected discrete output behavior The settings in the Primary Match Code Table determine the duration of all outputs initiated by the Extended Match Codes For example assume output 1 is set to activate for 100 ms on a match to 234 in the Primary Match Code Table and to activate on a match to 345 in the Extended Match Code Table The duration of the Extended Match Code Table activation will be 100 ms as established in the Primary Match Code Table If the decoder reads 1234 followed 75 ms later by 345 the resulting timing will be the 175 ms The following illustration will help explain why Output Timing of Read 1234 1234 Alone Output Timing of Read 1345 1345 Alone Combined poa Output Timing of m 12341345 Milliseconds _ _ _ _ 0 25 50 75 100 125 150 175 200 Publication 2755 833 AUX and LCD Display Parameters Chapter 9 Configuration AUX and LCD Display Parameters The decoder can display the following on an auxiliary terminal or an optional 2 line x 20 character per line alphanumeric LCD display to monitor e bar code
92. 755 DS 4P Single Head NEMA Type 4 with optional Pharma Code capability 2755 DD4P Dual Head NEMA Type 4 with optional Pharma C ode capability The installation chapter shows how to replace the LED legend if necessary The decoder is available in a variety of configurations for factory or customer installation For example the decoder is available with an optional LCD Display or I O Module Board for use with single point VO Publication 2755 833 1 2 Using this Manual Contents of Manual This manual describes how to install and use all versions of the decoder The general contents of each chapter are crepe Te Decoder Features Using this Manual Overview of Decoder Operations Installing the Decoder and Quick Start Introduction to AUX Terminal Configuration Configuration Purpose Provides an overview of the manual Describes the main features of the NEMA Type 1 and Type 4 decoders Gives an overview of decoder operations including configuration options host vs stand alone operation and decoding capabilities Describes how to install the decoder and Supporting equipment Provides an overview of the concepts which must be understood in order to use the decoder configuration software Explains how to use the configuration software to set symbology related variables Symbology en Explains how to use the configuration 7 TE y R so
93. 80 00 Disable 00 80 Disable 00 80 00 Disable 00 80 00 Disable 00 80 00 Disable 00 80 00 Disable 00 80 00 Disable 00 80 00 Disable 00 80 00 Disable 00 80 00 Disable 00 80 00 Disable 0 No filter LO Package 1 Filter 15 ms LO Package 2 No filter HI Package 3 Filter HI Package Decoder Configuration Addresses A 3 Number of Acceptable Values PCCC Address Configuration Parameter Bytes Default in bold Field delimiter ASCII 1 255 255 None ASCIIT 255 255 None 409 End Message CrEtx LfE tx CrLfetx Transmission Check Include Code 39 Check Character i en a a aE i Host Port Baud Rates 2 Checksum LSB 3 Checksum MSB Host Port Bits C har 0 8 Data 1 Stop 1 8 Data 2 Stop 2 7 Data 1 Stop 3 7 Data 2 Stop Host Port Parity Host Port ACK Char ASCII 0 255 255 None Host Port NAK Char ASCII 0 255 255 None Scanner A Start Scan Char ASCII 0 255 255 None Scanner A Stop Scan Char ASCII 0 255 255 None Enable Large Buffer Send Message to Host 0 End of Trigger 1 After valid_package Publication 2755 833 A 4 Decoder C PCCC Address 41E thru 425 426 onfiguration Addresses Configuration Parameter Host Protocol read ONLY Device Address read ONLY Enable Filter and Sense of Package_Detect_A Input Enable Code 39 Enable Interleaved 2 of 5 427 thru 42e Interleaved
94. A ype4 Typel Decoder Terminal Note Connect shield to shell of cable connectors at both ends Plug terminal into power supply 2 3 Install the alphanumeric keytop overlay on the terminal keyboard 4 Power on terminal Enter 2 to select alphanumeric 5 Select Alphanumeric Mode and set the following parameters Refer to your terminal documentation for additional information Baud Rate 9600 Parity No Stop Bits 1 Channel Config B IN OUT Duplex Full ChannelC On or Off Cursor On Auto Line Feed after Return Off Control Code Display Off 6 You are now ready to configure the decoder See Chapter 5 Note Because there is no flow control with the 1770 T1 T2 or T3 terminals the Series B Revision A decoder could transmit data too quickly This caused the terminal to display garbled characters or lock up To resolve that problem the Revision B decoder sends data in smaller bursts to these terminals Publication 2755 833 D 6 Setting Up Terminals 2708 DH5 Attended Follow these steps if using one of the Allen Bradley 2708 DHS5 Workstations Attended Workstations 1 Construct a cable to connect the decoder to the COM1 port of the 2708 DHS terminal Use a Belden 8303 Alpha 45123 or equivalent type of cable Use the following connector pinouts Male 19 pin NEMA Type 4 or Female 25 pin D Shell Connector NEMA NEMA Type4 Typel Decoder Terminal O 9 pin Female
95. AUX terminal you must set the AUX port to manual data entry mode as described in Chapter 13 Parameters dpp Command Parameter Parameter Function Valid Values A Bar Code Data B Decoder Performance C Package Counter D No Read Counter 1 Primary Counter 1 2 Primary Counter 2 3 Primary Counter 3 4 Primary Counter 4 5 Primary Counter 5 6 Primary Counter 6 7 Primary Counter 7 8 Primary Counter 8 00 01 80 00 Disable d Data item selector pp Character position Response rr lt end gt rr response code lt end gt end of message control code Example Command DPAO1 Parameters A01 Command Parameter Values Parameter Function d Data item selector A Bar Code Data pp Character position 01 Response OOLF 00 command complete response code LF end of message control code for Line Feed Publication 2755 833 ASCII Host Commands 15 49 SD Enable LCD Scrolling Command Format SDf Function Enables or disables scrolling of the LCD display Parameters f Command Parameter Function Values Parameters 0 No f Enable Scrolling LCD Display 1 Yes See Chapter 9 for details on how the LCD Display operates when scrolling is enabled or disabled Response rr lt end gt rr response code lt end gt end of message control code Example Command SD1 Parameters 1 Command Parameters f Enable scrolling LCD Display 1 Yes P
96. Address Specifies the host address to which the decoder will send the read reply data e Size Byte 8 specifies the maximum number of bytes sent to the host in each read reply The maximum size is 122 bytes e Repeat Count Byte 9 specifies the maximum number of bar code packets that can be sent to the host A value of 0 means the decoder can send packets until terminated by a Cancel Repeat Read command After the host sends the repeat read command the decoder generates an unprotected write command to send the bar code data to the host The decoder continues to send data to the host until the repeat count is reached or until a Cancel Repeat command is sent to the decoder The amount of data returned in the read reply is determined by the size parameter and the amount of data in the host buffer If the repeat count is non zero the repeat count automatically decrements by one and the repeat read command continues processing When the repeat count decrements to zero the repeat read command terminates Publication 2755 833 16 12 PCCC Host Commands Publication 2755 833 Cancel Repeat Read Command To terminate the processing of a Repeat Read command send the Cancel Repeat Read command to the decoder Cancel Repeat Read Command High Byte Low Byte MSB LSB STS a wo A N O Cancel Repeat Read Command Address 641H Display Text Message on AUX Terminal Enable AUX Terminal Keyboard A To configure a messag
97. B Command Parameter Il Length of header message 03 String Header message characters A B Response OOLF Parameter Function Values 00 command complete response code LF end of message control code for Line Feed Publication 2755 833 ASCII Host Commands 15 63 NM Configure Default No Read String Command Format NMllstring Function Defines a no read message for bar codes that could not be scanned or decoded No read messages are optionally included in messages sent to the host Parameters _ Ilstring Command Parameter ll Length of no read message 00 to 32 String No read message characters Up to 32 characters Azero length string disables a no read string A nonzero length string enables the no read string Parameter Function Valid Values Response rr lt end gt rr response code lt end gt end of message control code Example Command NMO07NO READ Parameters O7NO READ Command Parameter Function Val Parameter arameter Functio alues II Length of no read message 07 String No read message characters NO READ Response 00CR 00 command complete response code CR end of message control code for Carriage Return Publication 2755 833 15 64 ASCII Host Commands AX Configure AUX Terminal Data Entry Operations Command Format AXabceeefgg Function Configures AUX terminal data entry parameters These parameter
98. B Auto Load 100 4 Any 0 AiB None 0 5 Any 0 AiB None 0 6 Any 0 AiB None 0 7 Any 0 AiB None 0 411528258538 8 Any 0 AiB Auto Load INPUT 0 Notes Bar code data from next package loaded into table entry 2 Output condition changes from AutoLoad to Match Entry for output 2 The condition for Output 3 does not change since the Symbols Package setting has been met Publication 2755 833 Configuration Scanner Control Primary Match Table Discrete I O 7 25 Figure 7 5 continued AutoLoad INPUT Held Active ees MATCH CODE TABLE DISCRETE 1 0 E Enabled 1 1 12 of 5 001688421378 0 AiB Match Entry 100 Third Valid Package 2 I2 of 5 411528258538 0 AB Match Entry 100 3 I2 of 5 611679808644 0 AIB Match Entry 100 4 Any 0 AiB None 0 5 Any 0 AiB None 0 6 Any 0 AiB None 0 7 Any 0 AiB None 0 8 Any 0 AIB Auto Load CINPUT 0 611679808644 Notes Bar code data from next package loaded into table entry 3 Output condition changes from AutoLoad to Match Entry for Output 3 After AutoLoad AutoLoad INPUT No Longer Active _ _ MATCH CODE TABLE DISCRETE 1 0 E Enabled l 1 I2 of 5 001688421378 0 AiB Match Entry 100 2 I2 of 5 411528258538 0 AiB Match Entry 100 3 I2 of 5 611679808644 0 AIB Match Entry 100 4 Any 0 AiB None 0 5 Any 0 AiB None ic 6 Any 0 AiB None 0 7 Any 0 AiB None 0 8 Any 0 AiB Auto Load CINPUT 0 Notes Bar code data from thre
99. C A No SUPPLEMENTS UPC E No SUPPLEMENTS EXPAND No EAN 8 No SUPPLEMENTS EAN 13 No SUPPLEMENTS ENABLE PHARMA CODE QUIET ZONE RATIO CODE VERIFICATION LIST SPACE TOLERANCE BAR TOLERANCE WIDE TO NARROW BAR RATIO 10 MINIMUM NUMBER OF BARS 11 SCANNER A DECODE DIRECTION SCANNER B DECODE DIRECTION Commands ESC Change SPACE Cursor Control ARROWS At the Symbology configuration screen we suggest resetting the decoder to assure that you are starting from a default configuration To do so 1 Press ESC to activate the command line at the bottom of the screen 2 Use the arrow keys to move the highlight to the DEFAULT option 3 Press ENTER or RETURN on some keyboards 4 Confirm your intention to reset the decoder to its default configuration by answering yes to the confirmation prompt press Y in English Set Symbology Parameters Enable the symbology or symbologies you would like to read by using the arrow keys to move the highlight to the appropriate position Toggle through the available selections by pressing the space bar Press ENTER to accept each change Publication 2755 833 4 10 Installing the Decoder Note For best performance enable only those symbologies you intend to read You can find additional information on selecting symbologies in Chapter 6 Configure Scanner s Once all your symbology selections have been made press ESC to activate the command line at
100. C Source AutoLoad Activated by Aux Port Connector Another way to activate the AutoLoad function is by connecting a push button normally opened contact directly to pins 17 and 25 or K and L of the AUX port connector This method does not require an I O Module Board with installed input module or a power source Electrical Interfaces for AutoLoad Applications H 3 Figure H 3 shows the connection between a normally opened contact and pins on the NEMA Type 1 or NEMA Type 4 connector Figure H 3 AutoLoad function activated by AUX connector NEMA Type 1 NEMA Type 4 Aux Port female Connector Aux Port Male Connector D gt peeeeceeeees TE Mi 25 E 13 Use the Catalog No 2755 NC17 Connector Kitto fabricate cable Publication 2755 833 Appendix ASCII Character Set Control Code Dec f Char Dec Char Dec r n m O O W gt N lt x lt caan nD O TVD O 2 Frenne P O eoYUoS aR wDWHN Publication 2755 833 l 2 ASCII Character Set Entering Non Printable ASCII Characters ASCII Control Character Publication 2755 833 NUL SOH STX ETX EOT ENQ ACK BEL The following parameters allow you to enter non printable ASCII characters into the edit field eSource Identification Message e eHeader Message e eNo Read Message eMatch Table Entry e eDefault Prompt Message The table below shows you how t
101. Connector Kit The NEMA 4 connector can be used with either NEMA 1 or NEMA 4 decoders Figure 4 12 shows the location of the holes in the bottom of the enclosure Figure 4 12 Connecting I O to external devices YO Modul Field Wiring Holes C Switch and Power Connector Area fi oe oda at ee a a r a5 C Switch and Power Connector Area E as ser ES a a See the next section for details on how to install conduit hubs in the I O module field wiring holes Use the 2755 NBO Connector Kit or the 1490 N1 conduit hubs in the NEMA Type 4 decoder to maintain the environmental rating Figure 4 13 shows how the factory installed NEMA Type 4 Connectors are pre wired to the I O module locations Below each output module is a terminal block connector which accepts up to 12 gauge wire Installing the Decoder 4 21 To wire each output module 1 Strip 4 inch of the insulation from wires removing wire particles 2 Loosen terminal screws on pull apart connector For easier installation remove connector from the I O board by gently lifting the connector 3 Insert wires into connector Note polarity on module connectors when using DC modules 4 Tighten terminal screws on connector to secure the wires 5 Replace pull apart connector if removed from I O board Figure 4 13 Wiring I O modules
102. Decoder Features There are three I O Module Board options available for customer installation in any 2755 decoder Catalog number 2755 NBO includes a NEMA Type 4 connector and a 6 foot 1 83 meter unterminated cable Each connector and cable combination can connect to as many as four modules Catalog number 2755 NB1 includes an I O Board without modules Catalog number 2755 NB2 is a kit including two DC output modules 3 to 60 VDC at 0 5 amps one input module 3 3 to 32 VDC and the I O board Catalog Module Output Modules Input Module 1 0 Connector Number 1 0 Board Qty Positions Type Qty Position Type Cables 2755 NB0 No 0 0 1 set 2755 NB1 Yes 0 None Re 0 z ae ms5Ne Yes 2 12 3 eovocatoSanps 1 oao None The 0 connector s wire to modules in positions 1 8 of the I O board and comply with NEMA Type 4 standards Six foot 1 83 meter cables are supplied with each connector for wiring to the modules LCD Display The optional 2 line by 20 character LCD backlit display is available when ordering the NEMA Type 1 or Type 4 decoder by specifying display option R1 in the catalog number The display is also available for customer installation as Catalog No 2755 NR1 Publication 2755 833 Decoder Features 2 11 Scanners The following table provides a quick reference guide to the Allen Bradley scanners that are available for use with the decoders Catalog No Description
103. Display 15 49 header message 15 62 hold output open closed 15 31 15 32 host communications 15 53 host message format 15 56 Interleaved 2 of 5 check character 15 11 pad data character obsolete 15 77 Pharma Code symbology 15 16 protocol options 15 1 quiet zone See Pharmali Code Symbology read all extended counters 15 43 read all extended match data 15 41 read decoder performance indicators 15 69 read extended match counters 15 38 read extended match set status 15 46 read output counter 15 72 read package counter 15 70 read primary match code table entry 15 33 read symbols not read counter 15 71 reset decoder 15 76 save configuration to storage memory no restart 15 74 Publication 2755 833 Index Publication 2755 833 save configuration to storage memory and restart 15 74 Scanner A control 15 18 Scanner A package detect 15 21 Scanner A source identifier 15 60 Scanner B control 15 20 Scanner B laser light 15 23 scanner B package detect 15 22 Scanner B source identifier 15 61 Scanner B start amp stop characters 15 55 set configuration to default values 15 75 set extended match counters 15 37 set extended match data 15 39 set no read replacement string 15 52 set number of fields in host message 15 58 set output condition and duration 15 29 set output normally open clos
104. Englisch 2 Franzoesisch 3 Deutsch 4 Italienisch 5 Spanisch Press 1 2 3 4 5 or ESC Appuyer 1 2 5 4 5 ou ESC Druecke 1 2 3 4 5 oder ESC SELEZIONARE LINGUA SELECCIONAR LENGUA 1 Inglese 1 Ingles 2 Francese 2 Frances 3 Tedesco 3 Aleman 4 Italiano 4 Italiano 5 Spagnolo 5 Castellano Premere 1 2 3 4 5 o ESC Pulsar 1 2 3 4 5 o ESC Press the number key that corresponds to the language you want to use All subsequent screens display in the selected language To save the current system settings in storage memory type G or g or select Save Configuration on the Select Operation menu Press N or Esc to cancel the save operation and return to the Select Operation menu Press Y to save the current configuration All configuration parameters are saved to storage memory Chapter Objectives Using RS 232 RS 422 Using DH485 Chapter 15 ASCII Host Commands This chapter defines ASCII commands you can send from a host to the decoder using the RS 232 RS 422 or DH485 communication interfaces The RS 232 RS 422 and DH485 interfaces allow you to send single or two character ASCII commands from the host to the decoder All commands and command responses are ASCII character strings The single character commands control scanning Start Stop Scan characters and the transmission ACK NAK characters of data to the host They are not used to configure or monitor decoder operations The single character comman
105. Entry continued Example Command MW4102041289 Parameters 4102041289 pauline Parameter Function Values n Match code table entry number 4 f RESERVED 1 cc Bar code symbology 02 Interleaved 2 of 5 ll Length of match string 04 string Match string 1289 Response OOLF 00 command complete response code LF end of message control code for Line Feed CM Clear Primary Output Counters Command Format CMn Function Clears the selected output counter to 0 Parameters output counter number 1 through 8 Response rr lt end gt rr response code lt end gt end of message control code Example Command CM3 Parameters 3 output counter 3 Response 00CR 00 command complete response code CR end of message control code for Carriage Return Publication 2755 833 15 36 ASCII Host Commands CO Clear All Primary Output Counters Command Format CO Function Clears the Primary Counters to zero Parameters None Response rr lt end gt rr response code lt end gt end of message control code Example Command CO Response 00CR 00 command complete response code CR end of message control code CA Clear Extended Match Counters Command Format CA for Carriage Return Function Clears the value of the extended counts to zero Parameters None Response rr lt end gt rr response code lt end gt end of message control code Example
106. F Appendix G DC Output Module Application gt a AC Output Module Application aaa Using a Diode to Protect Output Module Z7 Z YPY Do BR WN Pe PE mm m I an A N OOQ 1 N Ne Electrical Interfaces for AutoLoad Applications ASCII Character Set Custom Settings European Union Directive Compliance Glossary Index Table of Contents Appendix H AutoLoad Input Module Application powered internally AutoLoad Input Module Application powered externally AutoLoad Activated by Aux Port Connector 005 Appendix Entering Non Printable ASCII Characters ccc cee e eae Appendix J Appendix K toc xi Publication 2755 833 Chapter Objectives What the Package Includes Chapter 1 Using this Manual This chapter gives an overview of the manual including e what the package includes e contents of manual e what you need to know e conventions and terminology e warnings and cautions e related publications This manual and interchangeable LED indicator legends in six different languages are shipped with the following decoders Catalog Number Description 2755 DS1A Single Head NEMA Type 1 2755 DD1A Dual Head NEMA Type 1 2755 DS 1P Single Head NEMA Type 1 with optional Pharma Code capability 2755 DD1P Dual Head NEMA Type 1 with optional Pharma C ode capability 2755 DS4A Single Head NEMA Type 4 2755 DD4A Dual Head NEMA Type 4 2
107. Holes 2 15 5 ASCII and Hexadecimal Equivalents Start Command Sequence 15 5 Command Replies 0 000 cece cece eens 15 6 CT Configure Bar Code Symbology and Supplements 15 8 SL Configure Specific Length for Bar Code Symbology 15 9 CC Configure Code 39 2 of 5 Codabar Check Characters 15 11 CG Configure Interleaved 2 of 5 Guard Bar 05 15 12 CQ Configure Quiet Zone vii ciceviicosensdaeeseaan 15 13 CF Configure Code 128 FNC1 Character aa aaaaaa aaa 15 14 CV Code Verification List i cctv naaa 15 15 CP Configure Pharma Code Symbology 15 16 SC Configure Scanner A Control occ ccvaedveduduceeduws 15 18 PB Configure Scanner B Control aa aaaea 15 20 Publication 2755 833 toc viii Table of Contents Publication 2755 833 IF Configure Scanner A Package Detect FilterandSense 15 21 BF Configure Scanner B Package Detect Filter and Sense 15 22 BL Configure Scanner B LaserMode 005 15 23 SW Write Scanner Source to Match Code Table 15 24 AB Auto load Begin o ccceeea edad devaes dees adaee ds 15 25 AE Autoload End 0 5 604 054 estarale da amiadi aire dla a a 15 25 PL Autoload adic cuwads 66 Gand sbaice nee Rew eaee de Fe 15 26 OS Set Output Normally Open Closed 15 28 OC Set Output Condition and Output Duration 15 29 OH Hold Output Open Closed 2 sccecedencane dudaves 15 31 MR Read Primary Matc
108. I 2 of 5 or Code 39 symbols once the lot is closed Instead it will open a new lot if one is available Configuration Extended Match Table and Counters 8 5 Source Field Type Options A Default for DS Select 7 A B A or B Default for DD A B Precedent determined Specifies from which scanner s an event can originate and meet the extended match pattern requirements For single head decoders Scanner A is the default value For dual head decoders the default value is AIB which means that the decoder will accept input from either A or B to create a match Other options include Scanner B or precedent determined A B When set to A B the decoder will use the first input from either Scanner A or Scanner B to establish a precedent for all following inputs If for example the first input comes via Scanner B then only data from Scanner B will be matched from that point on Symbology Field Type Options Code 39 Interleaved 2 of 5 Codabar UPC A UPC E EAN 8 EAN 13 Code 128 Pharma Code Any Select lie only to decoders equipped with the optional Pharma Code capabilities Selects the symbology of the match code string You can select any one of the symbologies for each extended match code string Note Any is the default value in the Symbology field for all entries in the match code tables Publication 2755 833 8 6 Configuration Extended Match Table and Counters Publication 2755 833
109. IMEOUT 0 02 ane aieiaa adain aaa a uae Package Detect Input Parameters noaua auauua Package Detect Input A Filter n on naaa eee eee Package Detect Input A Sense cece eee es Package Detect Input B Filter ccc cece Package Detect Input B Sense cece eee es Primary Match Table Parameters ccc cece uence SVMOOWGVIT lt 8 igeetisiseciuceawous neawees ease Match COde SUNG O ts ccd tie iiessendsuh ies Discrete I O Parameters ccc cece cece eens Output STADE cicio anura a eon ent a manaa aa as de SOUN ga2etahehadeseviweesenenna tS eta ee oe Output ConditON ssai rasa saien nana ahaa a a dade es Output Duration aoaaa aaae Chapter 8 Extended Match Table ccc cece cece eee eee Sheen r cites eau dared el adaeedaeala sea walang ot Status of CounterSe t cee ccc eee eee eee Mode iaeiei aro nde eee a ee e OUNCE aoai a maoene a eain Oh ck dS dis TE oat teva OVMDOWOY orai oxrovidunsedenenmeceeuntonsduatues Match Pattern SUNG i ids u deme da chew eee wake ae ee Configuration AUX and LCD Display Parameters Configuration Host Message Replacement Rules Table of Contents toc v COUN 2 Scans dere ees eae ee aoaa deere nde oie 8 LMI hots sore gets tee eae eee etg tacarewoed tare aoc 8 Output Duration i335 fie e bbe dee eso d dee denen ed keen 8 Chapter 9 AUX and LCD Display Parameters 000 9 1 Display Datat 22a et eetuceendebosaneeesepeteeceens 9 1 Mess ge FO
110. LC with ASCII or BASIC Module to eas Decoder using RS 232 SLC 5 03 ie Controller Catalog No 3 1771 DA ASCII I O Module Catalog Nc ie PLC 1771 DB 1746 1 01 0 7 1747 C11 Cable Processor BASIC 1 0 Rack odule 1747 AlC Link Coupler 2755 DS DD 2755 DS DD 2755 DD1A 4A 2755 DD1A 4A 2755 DD1A 4A ModuleModule Decoder Decoder Decoder Decoder Decoder Requires BASIC Driver fi ications betwee a 2 a TPAD BASIC Module and Bar Code Decoder Publication 2755 833 Types of Memory Decoder Performance or Operation Overview of Decoder Operations 3 5 Host Computers The decoder connects directly to other host computers using the RS 232 or RS 422 interface of the host device or can be multi dropped with DH485 through a 1784 KR module 2755 DD1A 4A N Decoder a The Series B decoder has two types of memory e operating memory e storage memory Figure 3 2 shows the relationship of the types of memory and the text that follows summarizes their contents Figure 3 2 Memory Areas of Decoder User Interface a Operating Memory a AUX Terminal Host Commands E A amp STARTUP Following loss of memory VE DEFAULT backup l Factory Storage Memory Defaults Publication 2755 833 3 6 Overview of Decoder Operations Publication 2755 833 Operating Memory The decoder uses configuration parameters as the
111. MS 4 5 mA RMS Static off state dv dt 200 V usec 200 V usec Maximum On S tate Current 0 5A DC 0 5 A RMS 0 5 A RMS Minimum On State Current 50mA RMS Maximum 1 Cycle Surge Pe aA peak OES 4 0 A peak Maximum SecondSuge ae SiS Peak On State Voltage 1 6 V peak Input Modules require voltage source for activation Catalog Number 2755 IM5S Maximum Input Voltage 32 VDC 140V RMS VDC 280V RMS VDC Minimum Input Voltage 3 3 VDC 90V RMSNDC 180V RMS VDC Input Resistance 1k ohm Maximum Input Current 32mA DC 32VDC 10mA RMS 140V RMS 8mA RMS 280V RMS Drop Out Current 1 0 mA DC 2 5mA RMS 1 5 mA RMS Allowable Off S tate Input Current 1 0 mA DC 3 0 mA RMS 2 0 mA RMS Allowable Off S tate Input Voltage 120 VRMS VDC ac orDC Input Module Replacement Fuses for decoders with 1 0 Module Board options Replacement Number 77104 899 01 Description 1 6 A plug in fuse for output modules provide overload protection for decoder I O Module Board Options available when ordering either the NEMA Type 1 or Type 4 decoder Module Output Modules 1 0 Connector Option C me o Poon Type Cables J o e e j 7 sowa 1 8 oa oe 35 gt o o e o s 6 o o e l io B7 3 60 VDC at0 5amps 1 8 33 32vDc 2sets The1 0 connector s wire to modules in positions 1 8 of the I O board and comply with NEMA Type 4 standards Six foot 1 83 meter cables are supplied with each connector for wiring to the modules Publication 2755 833 2 10
112. NB and AUX Configuration Host Message Format 11 5 The source identifier may be unique for Scanner A Scanner B and the AUX terminal to identify the data source Header Message Field Type Options Any ASCII Character String 32 chars max Blank Edit Text Defines a 1 to 32 character header message to include in each message sent to the host The default is Blank which means a header message is not defined An example header message is BAR CODE DATA Field Delimiter Field Type Options ASCII Numeric Edit Numeric 1 255 255 None Defines the three digit decimal ASCII character that will indicate the beginning and end of bar code label data If multiple symbols are being read the delimiter also separates each field in the message A double delimiter two consecutive occurrences of a delimiter character indicates the end of a package The default is None or 255 which means no delimiter is defined When choosing a delimiter be careful to select a character that will not appear in the bar code data Number of Fields in Message Field Type Options 1 through 16 0 All Edit Numeric Determines the number of bar code symbols to include in each message The default A sets the value to equal the number of symbols per package The values through 16 will set this value to a specific number of fields See Symbols Per Package Chapter 7 and Host Replacement Rules Host Message Field Number Chapt
113. NMEL Lusivevidusttvedwianine duende wowed 9 2 SCUIILED 5 sts ei ctabitesceeeiendciawmsareawenes 9 3 Position Bar Code StTINgS 3 iw ivie ad wd ddd wee eed we 9 4 Position Decoder Performance cee teens 9 4 Position Package Counter cesses 9 4 Position Symbols NotRead Counter 005 9 5 Position Primary Counters cece cece eens 9 5 Displaying Host Messages cee eee 9 5 ASCII Command oaa 9 6 PCCU COMMING eeue ra srona oe iene e ewe wa 9 6 How Scrolling Affects the Display of Host Messages 9 7 LCD Display Examples 0 h2ieecsivseeevastbeonyenes 9 8 Adjusting Contrast of LCD Display 0 0 0008 9 10 AUX Terminal Display Examples 0 c cece ee ueees 9 10 Chapter 10 Introduction to Host Message Replacement Rules 10 1 Symbols vs Host Message Fields 0 0 10 2 Introduction to Host Message Replacement Rules 10 2 Metacharacters sictiwiadeeatteaeeed ace anaa 10 3 Processing Order iiitvaskteneetgeavevseksveteneens 10 7 Configuration Parameters ccc cece ee eee ees 10 8 SOUTE 4G a icdan te edad Aaa EW eM eee ted each tee 10 8 SYMDOWGY sxitidateraweeed niniin eehideweewae enn 10 9 Symbol Number icaces owe keteere cegeresegiod ys eay 10 9 Find String Containing i652 edseastS desea owe vad eee 10 11 Replace Entire String With ccc cece eee eee 10 12 Minimum Field Length ccc cece cece eee teens 10 12 Alignment cto v
114. NS If you send a command with an invalid address the reply returns a status code of 10H invalid address To set the current configuration to the factory defaults send this command Set Decoder Configuration to Defaults High Byte Low Byte MSB LSB 1 STS 00H CMD 08H 0 2 5 Command Address 633H 4 To save the current configuration and restart the decoder send this command Save Configuration and Restart Decoder High Byte Low Byte MSB LSB STS aw A N O Command Address 632H To clear output counter 4 to all zeros send this command Clear Output Counter 4 High Byte Low Byte S STS o TNS 2 Command Address 610H 4 ao Publication 2755 833 PCCC Host Commands 16 11 Send Repeat Read Command The Repeat Read command tells the decoder to wait for bar code data When data is available the decoder sends it to a specific address in host memory using the unprotected write 08H command The host does not have to request data at each poll when a 2760 RB is used RB polls automatically The decoder automatically sends bar code data as it is decoded The command structure for sending a repeat read command is Repeat Read Command High Byte Low Byte MSB LSB STS Command Address 640H Starting Target Host Address Repeat Counen on ow a ono fF N O e Command Address Bytes 4 and 5 contain address 640H This address tells the decoder to perform a repeat read command e Target Host
115. OFF toggle switch Installing the Decoder 4 5 Figure 4 4 shows the available power cord options for the NEMA Type 4 decoder Unless an alternate power cord is ordered the decoder is shipped with a 120 240 VAC three wire U S Color Code unterminated power cord Figure 4 4 Power cord options for NEMA Type 4 Decoder Ground 1 O O l amp 0 ON OFF a Line Neutral Toggle Switch Power Connector Power Cord Options 120 240 VAC three wire unterminated power cord U S color code 6 ft 1 83 m length Default Shipped with decoder unless otherwise specified 240 VAC three wire unterminated power cord European Harmonized Code 6 oe m Note UL listing CSA approval not applicable when this cord is used ee Be __ see un peg un uvag le gneN ania Puna eg uD EDN IM pUNAID eg MPNA ATTENTION Disconnect incoming power and make sure the power switch on the decoder is in the off position before connecting power cord to power source Publication 2755 833 4 6 Installing the Decoder Quick Start for DS DD Decoder Configuration and Scanner Setup Publication 2755 833 You will need a computer terminal or a personal computer with terminal emulation software such as PROCOMM and an RS 232 cable Lists of compatible terminals appear in Figures 4 7 and 4 8 Wiring information appears in Appendix D See Chapters 5 through 14 for more
116. POSITION 1 BAR CODE STRINGS Displays bar code data starting in position 1 15 DECODER PERFORMANCE a Displays decoder performance values at position 15 O PACKAGE COUNTER O SYMBOLS NOT READ COUNTER PRIMARY COUNTERS 1 None 2 None 0 3 None 0 4 None 0 5 None 6 None 0 7 None 0 8 None The LCD display will look like this for the above configuration Line 2 displays the bar code data and the performance indicators Previous data 1 a Newdata H gt 123456 98 96 20 Bar Code Data ScannerA Scanner B Performance Indicators When scrolling is enabled all new data displays on the second line When the LCD receives new data it will display on line 2 moving the previous data up one line Previous data moves up to line 1 98 96 20 New data displays on line 2 4 97 98 20 Publication 2755 833 9 10 Configuration AUX and LCD Display Parameters Adjusting Contrast of LCD Display The main logic board of the decoder has a potentiometer for adjusting the contrast of the LCD Display Figure 9 1 shows the general location of the potentiometer on the main logic board Figure 9 1 Potentiometer for LCD display contrast Mounting bracket for optional battery Potentiometer for LCD Display Contrast Enclosure AUX TERMINAL J LCD DISPLAY cn a C Main Logic Board Publication 2755 833 To adjust the contrast of the LCD Display 1 Power on decode
117. Primary or Extended Match Code Table and the Lot parameter in the Extended Match Code Table allow the decoder to take scanned symbol data and load it into the match code table The Restart command will reset these parameters to the originally Saved parameter so that new values can be loaded The parameters that do not change until they are saved and the decoder is restarted involve host commu would be disruptive to change host communications parameters while data transmission was in process communications parameters are loaded into operating memory from storage memory during restart Overview of Decoder Operations 3 7 Storage memory can be thought of as programmable read only memory PROM The default parameters are stored as read only EPROM while the user changeable portion as retentive EEPROM for the sake of simplicity and consistency with earlier versions of the DS DD decoders we will maintain the conventions that the Save and Recall commands will ask for confirmation to SAVE CONFIGURATION CHANGES TO EEPROM Y N and RESTORE CONFIGURATION FROM EEPROM Y N Memory Contents at Startup Until you have modified and saved your own configuration parameters the decoder storage memory will contain only the permanent factory default configuration The first time you start the decoder it will create a copy of those factory defaults in operating memory Even on decoders without the optional battery once you have
118. R end of message control code for Carriage Return Publication 2755 833 15 58 ASCII Host Commands HF Set the Number of Fields in Host Message Command Format HFnn Function Sets the number of fields in the host message Parameters nn Command Parameter Function Valid Values Parameter n Set the number of fields in 00 to 16 host message 00 All Response rr lt end gt rr response code lt end gt end of message control code Example Command HF02 Parameters 02 Command Parameter Function Valid Values Parameter Set the number of fields in nn host message Response 00CR Publication 2755 833 00 command complete response code CR end of message control code for Carriage Return ASCII Host Commands 15 59 IX Configure AUX Terminal Source Identifier Command Format XIstring Function Defines a source identifier for the AUX port terminal Source identifiers are included in messages sent to the host They identify whether the data was scanned by Scanner A or B or entered at the AUX terminal Note This command only applies when the AUX port is set for manual data entry operations Parameters _ Istring Command Parameter l Length of source identifier 0 to 40 String Characters in source identifier Up to 4 characters A zero length string will disable the source identifier Parameter Function Valid Values Response rr lt end gt rr response code lt end gt
119. String Length String Publication 2755 833 0 None 1 Read Package 2 No Read Package 3 Match Complete 4 Match Entry 5 Read and no match 6 No Read or no match 7 Auto Load 8 Invalid 9 Host Buffer Full A Host Buffer Overflow 1 Interleaved 2 of 5 2 Codabar 3 UPC A 4 UPC E 5 EAN 8 6 EAN 13 7 Code 128 8 Pharma Code 15 Any Ignored 0 32 0 Empty 32 characters 0 None 1 Read Package No Read Package atch Complete atch Entry ead and no match o Read or no match 7 Auto Load 8 Invalid 9 Host Buffer Full A Host Buffer Overflow B Open C Closed 0 Code 39 1 Interleaved 2 of 5 2 Codabar 3 UPC A 4 UPC E 5 EAN 8 6 EAN 13 7 Code 128 8 Pharma Code 15 Any 0 32 0 Empty 32 characters aun WN ou ow i a aa Decoder Configuration Addresses A 7 PCCC Address Configuration Parameter Output 4 Event Output 4 Duration symbology in Match Code Table Entry 5 Enable Match Code Table Entry 5 Match Code 5 String Length String Output 5 Event Output 5 Duration symbology in Match Code Table Entry 6 Enable Match Code Table Entry 6 Match Code 6 String Length String Number of Acceptable Values Bytes Default in bold 0 None 1 Read Package 2 No Read Package 3 Match Complete 4 Match Entry 5 Read and no match 6 No Read or no match 7 Auto Load 8 Invalid 9 Host Buffer Full A Host Buffer Overflow 0 1
120. TR RTS CTS 1 The decoder sends a DTR Data Terminal Ready signal to tell the host the decoder is online and capa RTS CTS 2 ble of receiving data from the host The DTR line remains on while the decoder is on F RTS RTS CTS 1 The decoder sends the RTS Request to Send signal to tell the host it is ready to send data When the host receives an RTS signal from the decoder the host must assert CTS to tell the decoder to begin sending data When the decoder stops sending an RTS the host must stop sending a CTS before the decoder can assert RTS again F RTS RTS CTS 2 The decoder sends the RTS Request to Send signal to tell the host it can accept data The host only sends data when RTS is on J CTS RTS CTS 1 The host sends the CTS Clear to Send signal to the decoder if it can accept data The decoder only RTS CTS 2 sends data if CTS is on RS 422 Interface Publication 2755 833 Figure E 3 shows how to connect the NEMA Type 4 decoder to a host using RS 422 Use Belden cable 9829 shielded twisted pair or equivalent pene E 3 Connecting NEMA Type 4 Decoder to Host using RS 422 Host Port 25 pin DB Connector Host RS 422 Port on Decoder Shield RxB RxA TxA TxB RS 422 SIG GND Termination Pin designations depend on host device DTE Data Terminal Equipment When nonmetallic connector shells used If metal connectorshell connectshield to shell Con
121. The Allen Bradley 1770 Industrial Terminals do not have arrow keys Use Ctrl U for up Ctrl D for down Ctrl L for left Ctrl R for right LASER LIGHT Introduction to AUX Terminal Configuration 5 7 Field Types Each configuration parameter has a field associated with it that shows the current setting You can change the value or setting in any field There are two main types of fields select fields and edit fields A third type select edit numeric field is a hybrid of the other two Select Field Select fields have a fixed group of settings from which you can choose For example the Laser Light Mode is a select field and the available settings are On Triggered or Off An example is shown on the left Edit Field Edit fields are data entry fields which allow you to enter strings of characters The length of the highlighted box determines the size of the field An example is shown on the left The three types of edit fields are e ASCII character decimal value 0 to 255 ASCII fields display the decimal value followed by the ASCII character equivalent for example 013 CR You can enter a decimal value the software displays the ASCII equivalent character an ASCII non numeric character such as T the software displays the decimal equivalent a Return when the field is empty the software displays NONE which means an ASCII value is not defined The decimal value of 255 is interpreted as NONE e numeric
122. a Series B Revision C returns as 001 00010 Publication 2755 833 Chapter Objectives Replacing the Battery Chapter 1 7 Maintenance and Troubleshooting This chapter provides troubleshooting information to assist with problem detection and resolution It also shows how to replace the T O module protection fuses ATTENTION Always use caution when replacing fuses or installing accessories within the decoder The optional lithium backup battery Catalog Number 1747 BA will last up to five years If installed replace the battery five years from the date imprinted on the side of the battery cell No other battery related maintenance or service is required The battery clip is used only to hold the battery in position It is not used to create an electrical circuit Instead the battery is equipped with a female connector which attaches to the three pronged male connector below it on the main circuit board To remove the battery squeeze the narrow edges of the connector and gently pull it away from the board The connector is equipped with a locking mechanism which releases when squeezed Gently remove the battery from the mounting clip ATTENTION Be sure to follow all safety precautions regarding the handling and disposal of lithium batteries Be sure to read and understand all materials accompanying the battery before attempting to install it To install a new battery insert the battery in the retaining clip o
123. a Code 6 10 in Extended Match Code Table 8 5 specific length checking 6 1 UPC A and supplements 6 7 UPC E and supplements 6 8 Symbols Not Read Counter 7 17 9 5 14 4 Symbols Package 7 8 coordinated mode 7 10 independent mode 7 10 Symbols Scan 7 7 T Terminal Connections and Setup D 1 Transmission Check 12 7 checksum LSB 12 7 C 1 checksum MSB 12 7 C 1 example C 1 LRC Longitudinal Redundancy Check 12 7 Trigger End Conditions 3 9 Trigger Sources host 7 3 host command 3 8 internal timer 3 9 7 3 package detect 3 8 package detect signal 7 3 start stop scan characters 12 5 Trigger Timeout and decode mode 7 9 Scanner B 7 11 Troubleshooting 17 3 U UPC A enabling 6 7 supplements 6 7 UPC E enabling 6 8 supplements 6 8 V Valid Scan defined 7 9 Validation of Pharma Code symbols 6 15 ON Rockwell Automation Allen Bradley a Rockwell Automation Business has been helping its customers improve productivity and quality for more than 90 years We design manufacture and support a broad Allen Bradley range of automation products worldwide They include logic processors power and motion control devices operator interfaces sensors and a variety of software Rockwell is one of the world s leading technology companies LSS Worldwide representation
124. able 8 2 Counters output 1 8 14 4 package 14 4 resetting 14 5 symbols not read 14 4 D Debounce Filter 7 11 Decode Direction Pharma Code 6 14 Decode Modes continuous 3 8 7 2 continuous unique 3 8 7 3 coordinated 1 7 9 coordinated 2 7 9 host 3 8 7 3 7 9 internal timer 3 9 7 3 package detect 3 8 7 3 7 9 scanner B 7 9 triggered 3 8 Decoder hosted operations 3 3 stand alone operation 3 2 Decoder Performance Display on AUX Terminal 9 4 on configuration screen 9 2 14 4 on LCD Display 9 4 Decoder Performance Indicator how buffer overflow affects indicator 14 4 in continuous mode 14 4 in triggered mode 14 4 Scanner A 14 4 Scanner B 14 4 when it is useful 14 4 Default No Read Message 11 7 Default Prompt Message 13 8 configuring 9 6 13 5 13 8 when does it display 9 6 13 8 Device Address 12 3 Diode using to protect output module G 2 Discrete I O configuration 7 1 TSIS Discrete Outputs and Extended Match Code Table 8 7 and loading 8 7 Display Bar Code Strings Function 14 2 Display Status and Primary Counters Function 14 3 E EAN 13 enabling 6 10 supplements 6 10 EAN 8 enabling 6 9 EAN 8 supplements 6 9 Edit Field entering ASCII value 5 7 entering non printable characters 5 7 1 2 entering numeric value 5 7 entering text strin
125. ads current bar code data Reads decoder configuration data Reads decoder performance indicator counters and diagnostics Reads last message to host Each command returns data to the host that is read from a specific address of the decoder s memory The following sections define each read command Appendix A contains a summary of the memory addresses for all decoder functions or commands PCCC Host Commands 16 5 Read Current Bar Code Data Bar code data is stored as a packet in the host buffer of the decoder at address 100H to 3BFH Each packet contains data from one read operation The maximum number of bytes in one packet is 704 bytes To read the current bar code data send this command structure Read Current Bar Code Data Command High Byte Low Byte r STS 00 CMD 01H 3 5 Host Buffer Address 100H O Aa N O Each command can return up to 124 7C Hex bytes of data which is determined by the size byte byte 6 The amount of data in the host buffer is variable The size of the reply varies depending on how much data is in the host buffer and the number of bytes specified in the size byte If the host buffer is empty the reply is returned without data and a status of 40H no data in host buffer Reply No Data in Host Buffer High Byte Low Byte MSB LSB 1 STS 40H CMD Reply 41H 0 3 TNS 2 If the host buffer contains data lt the number of bytes specified in the size byte the reply returns all data and a st
126. age control code PD Configure Pad Data Character Command Format PD Function Obsolete command Formerly used to define thepad character for the bar code data mask command DM which is not used in this series Response 50 rr lt end gt 50 Unknown Command response code lt end gt end of message control code Publication 2755 833 Chapter Objectives Protocol Options PCCC Commands Chapter 16 PCCC Host Commands This chapter defines PCCC Programmable Controller Communications Commands commands you can send from a host to the decoder using the DH485 interface These commands allow you to use binary data exchange to configure the decoder read data from the decoder and obtain diagnostic information The PCCC host commands use the Allen Bradley DH485 link protocol To use these commands the Host Protocol configuration parameter on the Host Communications configuration screen must be set to one of these options e DH485 PCCC 1 Protocol with Write Replies e DH485 PCCC 2 Protocol without Write Replies The decoder supports the following DH485 communication addresses DH485 LSAP Function 0 Diagnostic Commands Perform Application Layer 1 or 128 PCCC Commands Perform Application Layer 129 Perform Link R eset immediate Block The PCCC commands perform the same functions as the configuration screens and fall into three categories 1 Unprotected Read Command The unprotected read command is used to r
127. all bytes in a message Checksum Most Significant Byte First Sixteen bit sum of all the bytes in a message with the most significant byte transmitted first e Checksum Least Significant Byte First Sixteen bit sum of all the bytes in a message with the least significant byte transmitted first The following example illustrates a transmission check The message contains the following data Start Character Label Delimiter End of Message CR LF Symbol Data ABC The message transmits in this sequence A B C CRLF TRANSMISSION CHECK The table below shows transmission checks for the message Transmission Check ASCII Character Binary Value o E a 0010 0100 0100 0001 0100 0010 0100 0011 0010 0100 0010 0100 0000 1101 0000 1010 0100 1001 0000 0001 0111 0011 0111 0011 0000 0001 LRC Check Checksum MSB Checksum LSB The sum of all bytes in the message is 173 Hex Checksums are transmitted in a sixteen bit format The value 01 Hex is equivalent to the ASCII control code SOH 73 Hex is equivalent to the ASCII character s Publication 2755 833 Appendix Objectives Connecting Terminal to AUX Port on NEMA Type 1 Decoder 3 14 AUX PORT female Connector 25 ic Connecting Terminal to AUX Port of NEMA Type 4 Decoder AUX PORT male Connector Appendix D Setting Up Terminals This appendix provides instructions on how to setup and connect the followin
128. ame Viktor Schiffer Position Manager Quality Engineering Position Engineering Manager Date Nov 3 1995 Date Mev s 330 Publication 2755 833 Glossary Glossary A ACK See acknowledgement acknowledgement An ASCII control character used to acknowledge the reception and acceptance of a transmission block address 1 A character string that uniquely identifies a memory location 2 A character string that uniquely identifies the physical location of an input or output circuit AIM Acronym for Automatic Identification Manufacturers alphanumeric The character set containing letters numbers punctuation marks and symbols ASCII American standards code for information interchange It is a seven bit code with an optional parity bit used to represent alphanumeric punctuation marks and control code characters AutoLoad The ability to automatically fill the match code table with character strings and symbology types by scanning bar codes AUX Port Serial port that communicates with a standard ASCII terminal The AUX port can switch between two modes of operation configuration or manual data entry AUX Terminal Terminal that connects to the AUX port and is used for configuration or manual data entry functions AUX Terminal Selector Mechanism that switches the AUX port between configuration and manual data entry mode bar The dark element of a printed bar code symbol Publication 2755 833 G 2 Glo
129. and restarts the decoder Operation then resumes using the new configuration parameters None 97 lt end gt 97 Indicates the command was received and the decoder is resetting The reset takes approximately 5 seconds lt end gt end of message code SA Save Configuration to Storage Memory No Restart Command Format SA Function Parameters Response Publication 2755 833 Saves current configuration to storage memory None 00 lt end gt 00 Indicates the command was received lt end gt end of message code Important Host communication parameter changes do not take effect until the decoder is restarted ASCII Host Commands 15 75 DD Set Configuration to Default Values Command Format DD Function Sets configuration in operating memory to the default values Important Host port communication parameters and the contents of storage memory are not changed with the DD command Parameters None Response rr lt end gt rr response code lt end gt end of message control code Example DD Command DD Response 0O0CRLF 00 command complete response code CRLF end of message control code for Carriage Return and Line Feed RD Set Configuration to Factory Defaults and Restart Command Format RD Function Parameters Response Resets decoder to factory defaults saves the configuration in storage memory and then restarts the decoder Operation then resumes usin
130. ans the decoder does not check lengths You can specify up to 8 code lengths maximum of 64 characters The code length includes the check character but not the start and stop characters If you specify a code length other than 0 the decoder will only decode labels with the number of characters specified Important Enter specific lengths starting with the leftmost blank field Specific lengths entered to the right of a blank field are ignored Correct Incorrect SYMBOLOGY LENGTHS _ SYMBOLOGY LENGTHS CODE 39 Yes 1015 S CODE 39 Yes 10 15 A 15 is to the right of a blank field and will be ignored Configuration Symbology 6 3 Code 39 Check Character Field Type Options No Yes Select Controls whether the decoder is required to compute and verify a code check character for Code 39 bar codes The code check character ensures that the data is read correctly The default is No which means the decoder treats all decoded characters as data The Code 39 check character is computed as a Modulus 43 sum of all characters value as specified in the AIM specification USS 39 Include Code 39 Check Character Field Type Options No Yes Select Controls whether the code 39 check character computed by the decoder is included in the message sent to the host The default is No which means the Code 39 check character is not sent to the host Inter
131. arameter Function Values Response 00CR 00 command complete response code CR _ end of message control code for Carriage Return Publication 2755 833 15 50 ASCII Host Commands SR Set Search and Replace Rule for Host Message Fields Command Format SRnnmmsccbbffapppllstringllstring Function Set parameters for the host message replacement rules Parameters nnmmsccbbffapppllstringllstring Command Parameter Function Valid Values Parameters The number of the Search and nn Replace Rule ed mm The host message field number 00 All or 01 to 16 1 Scanner A s Source i 4 Aux 01 Code 39 02 Interleaved 2 of 5 03 Codabar 04 UPC A UPC E cc Symbology TE 07 EAN 13 08 Code 128 09 Pharma Code 16 Any bb Symbol number 00 AIl or 01 to 16 ff Minimum field length 00 to 64 O Right a Alignment i Left 000 to 255 ppp Fill character 000 No alignment Il Length of search pattern string 00 Empty or 01 to 24 string Search pattern string up to 24 characters Il Length of replace pattern string 00 Empty or 01 to 24 String Replace pattern string up to 24 characters Response rr lt end gt rr response code lt end gt end of message control code Publication 2755 833 ASCII Host Commands 15 51 SR Set Search and Replace Rule for Host Message Fields continued Example Command SR02013010009004807 S 02 1 Parameters 02
132. are grouped by function on the screen The following pages describe each group of parameters Scanner A Control Parameters These parameters control the operation of Scanner A Each parameter is defined below The options for each parameter are summarized in a table and explained more fully in the text The default setting for each parameter is displayed in bold letters in the table Publication 2755 833 7 2 Configuration Scanner Control Primary Match Table Discrete I O Publication 2755 833 Laser Light Scanners A and B Field Type Options On Select Triggered Off Determines whether the Scanner A laser is on continuously turns on and off with the trigger or is off regardless of the trigger Use triggered mode with slower package rates to extend the life of your laser This parameter also affects Scanner B when it is set to operate in coordinated mode with Scanner A See Scanning Mode under Scanner B Control On The scanner scans continuously Triggered The scanner scans only when receiving a trigger from a package detector host or internal timer The scanner continues scanning until an end trigger condition occurs Off Turns the scanner laser off Use this setting as a safety precaution during decoder maintenance or troubleshooting Important It is important that you understand the following terms before proceeding e valid scan e valid symbol e valid read e valid package e no read See Glo
133. ary match table and then the extended match table This is the equivalent of a manual Autoload except the data is supplied by the host instead of a scanner Parameters abeestring Command Parameters Parameter Function Source Valid Values 1 A 2 B Symbology 1 Code 39 2 Interleaved 2 of 5 3 Codabar 4 UPC A 5 UPC E 6 EAN 8 7 EAN 13 8 Code 128 9 Pharma Code ee Length of match string 00 to 32 string Match string Response rr lt end gt Up to 32 ASCII characters rr response code lt end gt end of message control code ASCII Host Commands 15 27 AL Autoload continued Example Command AL Parameters 1110ABCDE12345 oe Parameter Function Valid Values a Source 1 A b Symbology 1 Code 39 ee Length of match string 10 Characters String Match string ABCDE12345 Response 00CR 00 command complete response code CR end of message control code for Carriage Return Publication 2755 833 15 28 ASCII Host Commands OS Set Output Normally Open Closed Command Format OSnf Function Sets the state of a discrete output to normally open or normally closed Parameters nf Command Parameters Parameter Function Valid Values n Discrete output number 1 through 8 f Switch operation normally 0 Normally Open open or normally closed 1 Normally Closed Response rr lt end gt rr response code lt end gt end of messag
134. at package see Send Message to Host The data is sent to the host as an ASCII string The figure below shows the structure of the string For each field in the string the figure shows e the type of data in each field e length of the field in parentheses Publication 2755 833 11 2 Configuration Host Message Format Some of the fields are controlled by the bar code itself However most of the fields are controlled by the host message configuration parameters In addition many of these same functions can be performed using the Host Replacement Rules described earlier in this manual Bar Code Host Message Format ASCII BAR CODE DATA 12 Transmission Check 0 to 2 11 End Message 0 to 3 10 Performance Indi cators 0 or 6 9 Package Count 0 or 6 DD 0 or 3 DS 8 Field Delimiter 0 or 1 7 Field Delimiter 0 or 1 L 6 Bar Code Data or No Read Message 0 to 64 characters including start stop and check characters Up to 64 characters will be sent for each field read Codabar Stop Character follows Codabar Check Characters if sent 5 Symbology 0 or 2 4 Field Delimiter 0 or 1 3 Header Message 0 to 32 2 Source Identifier 0 to 4 1 Start Character 0 or 1 In messages containing multiple bar code data strings each string will be separated by a single field delimiter A double delimiter follows the final string Below are some sample host messages to help you config
135. ation To use the built in configuration menus and screens you must first connect a terminal to the RS 232 AUX port of the decoder Appendix D provides details on how to connect and setup each terminal The AUX port communication parameters are 8 Data Bits 1 Stop Bit 9600 Baud Rate Parity None XON XOFF Flow Control Refer to Chapter 5 for information on getting started with the AUX communication software Publication 2755 833 14 2 Display and System Configuration Display Bar Code Strings The Display Bar Code Strings function on the Select Operation menu allows you to monitor bar code labels as they are decoded 2755 DD1P DD4P Bar Code Decoder Copyright 1992 Allen Bradley Company Inc CONF IGURATION 1 Symbology 2 Scanner Control Primary Match Table Discrete I D 3 Extended Match Table and Counters 4 Aux and LCD Display Format 5 Host Message Replacement Rules 6 Host Message Format 7 Host Communications 8 Aux Terminal Data Entry Display System A Bar Code Strings C Reset Status and Primary Counters B Status and Primary Counters D Reset Extended Match Counters E Restart System F Select Language G Save Configuration Press 1 8 A G or ESC To select this function press the A or a key The screen will clear and display decoded bar code strings You might see 19876367 3456721 59874292 45763819 56474821 18945288 45674895 7689577 87599839 35426881 11987454 54664778 87997878
136. atus of OOH no errors Reply All Data Returned in Host Buffer High Byte Low Byte If the host buffer contains more data than the number of bytes specified in the size byte the reply is returned with truncated data and a status of 80H data truncated Publication 2755 833 16 6 PCCC Host Commands Reply Truncated Data Host Buffer Contains More Data High Byte Low Byte To read the rest of the data in the buffer send one or more additional read commands In each command offset the address appropriately from the previous command A status of OOH is returned in the reply when the last segment of data from a bar code packet is read Here is an example The host buffer contains a bar code packet that is 200 bytes To read the entire packet you need to send two read commands The first command would read 124 bytes 62 words of data The second command would read the remaining 76 bytes 38 words of data The following table shows the start and end address for each read command Read Address Commands HEX Decimal Read 100 words 200 bytes Ist Read Command Start Address 100 256 2nd Read Command Start Address 17C 380 Note By always setting the size of 7C Hex you will know that the decoder will always return up to 124 bytes 62 words 124 bytes 38 words 76 bytes Read Counters and Performance Indicator Counter values package output no read and performance data are stored at addresses 600H to 6FFH
137. be coordinated with the output modules because the buffering may delay receipt of the data by the host Send Message to Host Field Type Options At End of Trigger Select Immediately After Valid Package Specifies when the decoder sends data to the host or activates an output module The default is At End of Trigger The end of trigger condition is determined by the decode mode The end of trigger conditions for the triggered decode modes are Timing Host Package Detect Internal Timer End of Trigger send message to host at end of trigger Stop scan character Detect signal goes inactive No read timer ex pires No read timer ex pires No read timer ex pires Immediately After Valid Package Symbols package count met Symbols package count met Symbols package count met The response mode for the continuous and continuous unique decode modes is always Immediately After Valid Package The decoder sends data and activates the outputs immediately after a valid package symbols package count is met or a no read whichever comes first Use this mode for maximum speed Configuration Host Communications 12 7 Transmission Check Field Type Options None LRC Checksum LSB Checksum MSB Select Specifies the type of transmission check that is generated at the end of a message sent to the host The default is None which means no transmission check is g
138. be present in a scan for a valid read The default is On a single scan movement of laser beam from one side to another the decoder can decode up to 6 successive bar code symbols Valid settings for this parameter include 1 2 3 4 5 6 or Any If you select Any the decoder looks for up to 6 symbols The decoder will ignore any damaged symbols it encounters Select Any for those applications where the number of symbols varies or cannot be controlled For all other applications specify a number Publication 2755 833 7 8 Configuration Scanner Control Primary Match Table Discrete I O Publication 2755 833 Important If you select Any and the decoder is operating in a triggered mode the symbols within each label must be unique The decoder interprets identical symbols as duplicates and ignores the second symbol Symbols Package Field Type Options 1 16 1 Select Edit Specifies the number of valid symbols that must be decoded to produce a valid package The default is 7 You can enter a numeric value between 1 and 16 If the Symbols Package setting is satisfied a valid read occurs If the Symbols Package setting is not satisfied a no read occurs for that package as well as for each symbol not read Match Complete Field Type Options 1 16 1 Select Edit Specifies the number of times that symbols on a package must match entries in the match code table before a Match Complete condition occur
139. by protecting against short reads The decoder will only decode bar code symbols that contain the exact number of characters specified in the length fields Especially useful for Interleaved 2 of 5 when check characters are not being used optimizes operations by allowing the decoder to select scans for decoding from several labels with different lengths For example the decoder can select the 6 character code from a carton that has 14 6 and 4 character codes e Enable supplements for UPC EAN symbologies e Enable verification of guard bars with Interleaved 2 of 5 symbols e Adjust and set the quiet zone ratio if necessary e Configure parameters for Pharma Code labels Publication 2755 833 6 2 Configuration Symbology Publication 2755 833 The decoder will auto discriminate between multiple symbologies For optimum performance enable only those symbologies and code lengths you intend to use The following pages define each symbology parameter along with the field type and possible values The default value is shown in bold letters Code 39 Field Type Options No Yes Select Enables disables decoding of Code 39 bar code labels The default of Yes except on Pharma Code decoders enables decoding of this symbology Select No to disable decoding Code 39 Specific Lengths Field Type Options Edit Numeric 0 through 64 0 Sets length checking for Code 39 bar code labels The default is 0 which me
140. cator 099 LF end of message control code 00 command complete response code LF end of message control code Publication 2755 833 15 70 ASCII Host Commands PR Read Package Counter Command Format PR Function Parameters Response Example Returns the count maintained by the package counter None pppppp lt end gt rr lt end gt pppppp lt end gt mr lt end gt package count up to 999999 end of message control code response code end of message control code Command Response Publication 2755 833 PR 000075LF OOLF 000075 LF 00 L number of packages read by decoder end of message code for Line Feed command complete response code end of message code for Line Feed ASCII Host Commands 15 71 NR Read Symbols Not Read Counter Command Format NR Function Returns the count in the no read counter Parameters None Response pppppp lt end gt rr lt end gt pppppp no read count up to 999999 lt end gt end of message control code rr response code lt end gt end of message control code Example Command NR Response 000016CR 00CR 000016 no read count of 16 CR end of message control code for Carriage Return 00 command complete response code CR end of message control code Carriage Return Publication 2755 833 15 72 ASCII Host Commands MC Read Output Counter Command Format MCn Function Reads the se
141. ch using a separate trigger source and set of configuration parameters Decode Modes The decoder has three decode modes Continuous Mode In continuous mode the decoder attempts to decode every scan Additional scans are accumulated until the capture count is satisfied When the symbols per package is satisfied a valid read occurs In Continuous Mode there is no concept of a No Read Damaged or missing symbols are ignored This mode is useful during initial setup to determine the optimum location of the scanner relative to the bar code labels Continuous Unique Mode This mode is similar to continuous mode except the decoder compares a valid read to the previous valid read If the valid reads are identical the new data is discarded In continuous unique mode the decoder defines a package as a valid read if it is different unique from the previous valid read The Symbols Read counter and the Package counter increment with every valid read In Continuous Unique Mode there is no concept of a No Read Damaged or missing symbolssignals are ignored Triggered Mode In triggered mode the decoder only attempts to decode data after receiving a trigger The three trigger sources are Host The trigger source is a command generated by a host computer or programmable controller Package Detect The trigger source is a package detector connected to the scanner Overview of Decoder Operations 3 9 Internal Timer The
142. code data 9 4 displaying decoder performance values 9 4 displaying default prompt message 9 5 displaying host messages 9 5 displaying package counter 9 4 displaying primary output counters 9 5 displaying symbols not read counter 9 5 enabling device to display data 9 1 enabling scrolling 9 3 format of bar code data 9 2 function 2 4 9 1 scrolling 9 1 LED Indicators 2 3 7 21 18 1 Loading and discrete outputs 8 7 in Extended Match Code Table 8 7 Lot 8 4 M Manual conventions 1 3 Manual Data Entry Mode switching to 13 6 Manual Data Entry Parameters 13 2 AUX data format 13 4 confirm entry 13 3 default prompt message 13 5 echo to terminal 13 4 enabling 13 5 enabling data entry for no reads 13 2 enabling data entry from host 13 2 enabling manual data entry 13 2 format of data sent to host 13 11 rubout character 13 4 size of display 13 5 Match Complete 7 8 Match Entry in Extended Match Code Table 8 4 Match Pattern String in Extended Match Code Table 8 6 Match Complete Output Condition 7 17 Match Entry Output Condition 7 17 Memory operating 3 6 storage 3 6 types of 3 5 Message Field vs bar code symbol and host message 10 2 Messages from the Host 9 5 13 8 15 66 15 67 16 12 Metacharacters introduction to 10 3 table summarizing 10 4 10 8
143. command 16 1 16 8 PCCC Unprotected Read Command read configuration data 16 8 read counters and performance indicator 16 6 read current bar code data 16 5 read last host message 16 7 PCCC Unprotected Write Command cancel repeat read command 16 12 display message on AUX Terminal 16 12 execute decoder functions 16 9 hold output open or closed 16 13 modify configuration data 16 8 16 9 send repeat read command 16 11 Percent sign use in Extended Match Code Tables 8 3 Pharma Code bar tolerance 6 12 code verification list 6 15 decode direction 6 14 enabling 6 10 minimum number of bars 6 13 quiet zone ratio 6 11 space tolerance 6 12 wide to narrow bar ratio 6 14 PhotoSwitch Package Detectors 2 13 Power Connector and On Off Switch NEMA Type 1 decoder 2 5 4 4 NEMA Type 4 decoder 2 5 4 4 Power Cords options NEMA Type 1 2 7 4 4 options NEMA Type 4 2 8 4 4 replacement numbers NEMA Type 1 2 7 replacement numbers NEMA Type 4 2 8 Power Requirements 4 1 Power Supply source voltage 2 2 Primary Match Table 7 13 compared to Extended Match Code Table 8 1 configuration 7 1 including check digits 7 14 match code length 7 14 match code string 7 14 match code symbology 7 14 number of entries 7 13 parameters 7 13 setting up match codes 7 13 wild card character 7 14 Processing O
144. cording to these Standards the factor which determines for EMC purposes whether an apparatus is deemed to be Industrial or Residential commercial and light industrial is given in Clause 1 of EN50081 2 as follows Apparatus covered by this standard is not intended for connection to a public mains network but is intended to be connected to a power network supplied from a high or medium voltage transformer dedicated for the supply of an installation feeding a manufacturing or similar plant The product described in this manual is intended for use solely in an industrial environment as defined above When installed in Europe any other application is in contravention of European Union Directives and a breach of these laws Publication 2755 833 K 2 European Union Directive Compliance Declaration of Conformity DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY This Declaration of Conformity is suitable to the European Standard EN 45014 General criteria for supplier s declaration of conformity The basis for the criteria has been found in international documentation particularly in ISO IEC Guide 22 1982 Information on manufacturer s declaration of conformity with standards or other technical specifications Allen Bradley liability under this declaration is limited to that set forth in the current Allen Bradley publication 6500 Terms and Conditions of Sale as well as similar publications from Allen Bradley affiliates doing business in the Eu
145. count mmmmmm_ Value of count 000000 nnn 128 Response 00CR 00 command complete response code CR end of message control code for Carriage Return Publication 2755 833 ASCII Host Commands 15 45 CS Disable Extended Match Code Set Command Format CSnnnnnnnn Function Disables a group of Extended Match Codes Parameters 9 nnnannnnn Command Parameters Parameter Function Valid Values Allows the 128 Extended Match 00000000 All Codes to be treated as eight Disabled ANANANNN sets of sixteen each Each set through can be individually marked 11111111 All enabled Response rr lt end gt rr response code lt end gt end of message control code Example Command CS01100011 Parameters 01100011 Command Paramet rs Parameter Function Values Enables positions 17 32 33 48 nnnnnnnn 97 112 and 113 128 01100011 Response 00CR 00 command complete response code CR end of message control code for Carriage Return Publication 2755 833 15 46 ASCII Host Commands RS Read Extended Match Set Status Command Format RS Function Reads the status of the extended match sets Parameters none Response nnnnnnnn rr lt end gt rr response code lt end gt end of message control code Example Command RS Response 10010001 OOCR 10010001 Sets 1 4 and 8 enabled all others disabled 00 command complete response code CR end
146. d operate identically Single head decoders have one port for connecting a scanner That port is designated Scanner Port A Dual head decoders have two ports for connecting scanners They are designated Scanner Port A and B Both ports support scanners from the 2755 L4 LS L7 L9 LD4 and LD8 families with the appropriate cables The scanners do not require a separate power supply They receive power from the decoder through the cable The NEMA Type 1 decoder also supports the 2755 G3 and G6 Hand Held Scanners and 2755 LD1 and LD2 Scanners Catalog Numbers are incomplete The 2755 L4 L5 L7 L9 LD4 and LD8 scanners are available in different configurations The 2755 G3 and G6 Hand Held Scanners and 2755 LD1 and LD2 Scanners require the 2755 NC16 Gun Adapter Publication 2755 833 2 2 Decoder Features Dual head scanners can operate in two modes e Independent Mode Both scanners operate independently of one another each using a separate trigger source Scanner A and Scanner B e Coordinated Mode Both scanners operate in a coordinated mode each using the same trigger source Scanner A Power Supply An internal power supply provides power to both the laser scanner s and the decoder The source voltage may range from 100 to 240 volts AC nominal 50 to 60 Hz The power supply automatically adjusts to the input voltage Figure 2 1 NEMA Type 1 Decoder Catalog No 2755 DD1A SCANNER B Port AUX Port HOST
147. defines the operating parameters for Scanner B when the scanning mode is set to independent NOTE This command is valid only for dual head decoders Parameters abtttt commana Parameter Function Valid Values Parameters 0 Coordinated 1 1 Independent A Package Detect a Scanning mode of scanner B 2 Independent Host Triggered 3 Coordinated 2 b Reserved Ignored er 0000 0010 9999 ttt Trigger timeout for scanner B in milliseconds in milliseconds 0000 disables timeout Decoder ignores character but it must be supplied to maintain compati bility with previous decoders Important See Chapter 7 for a description of the Scanner Control parameters Response rr lt end gt rr response code lt end gt end of message control code Example Command PB110100 Parameters 110100 Commana Parameter Function Values Parameters 1 Independent a Scanning mode of scanner B Package Detect b Ignored 1 Ignored Trigger timeout for scanner B ai tttt in milliseconds 0100 100 milliseconds Response 00CR 00 command complete response code CR end of message control code Publication 2755 833 for Carriage Return ASCII Host Commands 15 21 IF Configure Scanner A Package Detect Filter and Sense Command Format Ff Function Enables or disables the 15 ms input filter and determines the sense of the package detect signal for Scanner A Parameters f disable or enable filter select
148. detail on using a terminal to configure the decoder and monitor operations Connect AUX Terminal Connect your terminal s RS 232 serial port to the AUX port of the 2755 DS or DD decoder To make easy connection to the NEMA Type 4 decoders a 3 03 meter 10 foot cable is available Cat No 2755 CT1 Set Communication Parameters Set the terminal s serial port parameters to 9600 Baud 8 Data Bits 1 Stop Bit No Parity Parity None Apply Power and Select Language Turn the decoder on The decoder will send the Select Language screen to the terminal If the screen does not appear then press the ESC key on your terminal The Communications LED on the decoder should light momentarily and the decoder will resend the Select Language screen If the LED does not light when you press ESC verify the terminal s communications settings and all connections The AUX port supports a terminal for either configuring the decoder or for man entry For information on use of the AUX port for manual data entry consult Chi SELECT LANGUAGE 1 English 2 French 3 German 4 Italian 5 Spanish Press 1 2 3 4 or 5 SELEZIONARE LINGUA 1 Ingeles 2 Francese 3 Tedesco 4 Italiano 5 Spagnolo Prenere 1 2 3 4 05 Installing the Decoder CHOIX DU LANGUAGE 1 Anglais 2 Francais 3 Allemand 4 Italien 5 Espagnol Appuyer 1 2 3 4 ou 5 SELECCIONAR LENGUA 1 Ingles 2 Frances 3 Aleman 4 Italiano 5 Castellano Pu
149. dicator is a three digit value for DS units and a six digit value for DD units The first three digits apply to Scanner A and the last three digits apply to Scanner B End Message Field Type Options None CRLF CR LF ETX CRETX LFETX CRLFETX Select Defines an ASCII control code to terminate or end each message sent to the host The default is CRLF which terminates each message with a carriage return and line feed Default No Read Message Field Type Options Any ASCII Character String 32 chars max Blank Edit Text Defines a 1 to 32 character no read message to include in each message sent to the host when a no read occurs and a specific no read message has not been defined for that field see below The default is Blank which means a default no read message string is not defined An example no read message is NO READ Publication 2755 833 11 8 Configuration Host Message Format Publication 2755 833 No Read Replacement Strings Field Type Options Any ASCII Character String 32 chars max Blank Edit Text If the rules are active See Chapter 10 defines a 1 to 32 character string to include in the message sent to the host These strings are sent when a no read or a specific host replacement rule is not satisfied for a specific field 1 through 16 The default is Blank which means a no read replacement string is not defined for that field If a no read does occur or a replaceme
150. direction to determine the least significant bar of a symbol The examples below show how a Pharma Code label is decoded depending on the direction Example 1 The decode direction is set to forward The decode direction fixes the position of the least significant bar regardless of scan direction The decoded value is 94 Most Significant Bar Least Significant Bar Ss Scan Direction Decode Direction F orward 94 Decoded Value 94 Decode Direction __ Example 2 The decode direction is set to reverse The decode direction fixes the position of the least significant bar The decoded value is 125 Least Significant Bar Most Significant Bar Ss ae Scan Direction Decode Direction Reverse a Decoded Value 125 Decode Direction 125 Wide to Narrow Bar Ratio Pharma Code Decoders Only Field Type Options 2 through 4 2 Midrange Edit Specifies the minimum ratio of the widest bar to the narrowest bar within a symbol Valid settings are 2 to 4 or midrange The default is 2 The default value for this parameter has been optimized for most applications and it is unlikely you will ever have a reason to change it If the setting is 2 to 4 the decoder will reject symbols whose wide to narrow bar ratio is less than the parameter setting Configuration Symbology 6 15 The midrange value is half the sum of the widths of the narrowest and widest bar in the symbol If the se
151. ds 15 7 Parameters Contains data requested by the command parameters Some commands do not return any parameters End of Parameter Code Delimiter that indicates the end of the parameter list This code is the same as the End of Message Code Response delimiter Response Code Indicates the status of the processed command The table below lists the response codes and what they mean Response Codes and Descriptions Response Description 00 Command complete normal termination 01 Valid and successful command Applies only to TM command 02 Display buffer is full Applies only to TM command 11 Valid command but format is invalid 50 Unknown command 97 Reset to new configuration received 98 Reset to default configuration received End of Message Code Indicates the end of the message Typical end of message control codes are CR CRLF LF ETX or None All examples in this chapter use lt end gt to represent the end of message control code The End Message configuration parameter defines the end of message control code Refer to the Host Message Format screen described elsewhere in this manual for additional details Publication 2755 833 15 8 ASCII Host Commands CT Configure Bar Code Symbology and Supplements Command Format CTfccs Function Enables or disables the decoding of a specific bar code symbology and supplements Parameters fccs Command F Paramet
152. ds are configured on the Host Communications screen described elsewhere in this manual The two character commands perform the same functions as the settings on the configuration screens and can be used to configure and monitor decoder operations The rest of this chapter defines the two character ASCII commands ATTENTION When controlling discrete outputs locally using AUX port configuration suspend host communications to prevent outputs from unintentionally changing state The DH485 interface supports the two character ASCII commands To use these commands the decoder requires you to set the Host Protocol parameter on the Host Communications screen to one of the following e DH485 ASCII 1 Protocol with Responses e DH485 ASCII 2 Protocol without Responses Note The DH485 ASCII 2 Protocol without responses reduces data traffic on the link Responses are unnecessary since the link layer of the Allen Bradley DH485 network insures that a command is properly received The decoder supports the following DH485 communication addresses DH485 LSAP Function 0 Diagnostic Commands Perform Application Layer lor 128 ASCII Commands Perform Application Layer 129 Perform Link R eset immediate Block Publication 2755 833 15 2 ASCII Host Commands Table 15 A Two character ASCII commands grouped by Publica
153. ds decoded symbols with lengths that do not match the specific length parameter This allows you to filter out all decoded symbols except those that have a specific length that appears in the specific length table e The decoder uses it to determine if the number of bar to space transitions that occur during a scan is appropriate for the symbologies and specific length values Scans that occur in the absence of a symbol or part of a symbol are not valid and therefore result in extra processing overhead for the decoder The decoder discards these scans before the microprocessor sees them Once the microprocessor sees a scan it uses the specific length parameter to search within the symbol for a valid number of bar to space transitions The decoder will ignore Code 128 FNC2 FNC3 and FNC4 characters regardless of the Code 128 FN Character setting FNC2 FNC3 and FNC4 are also ignored by the specific length parameter Configuration Symbology 6 7 This check differs from the one above because instead of looking at the number of transitions in the entire scan this search only considers the number of transitions contained within the symbol The decoder rejects the scan if the number of transitions does not correspond to a selected specific length It attempts to decode all scans if no specific length is specified Code 128 FNC1 Character Field Type Options Valid ASCII 0 None Edit Instructs the decoder to substit
154. e Decoder not configured correctly Solution Check decoder configuration to verify that parameters are set appropriately for your application Cause Loose cables or connections Solution Check cables and connections Problem Decoder cannot read label Cause Scanner is at incorrect angle or distance from the bar code Publication 2755 833 Maintenance and Troubleshooting 17 5 Solution Determine the optimum reading angle by using a static bar code label position and checking the Decoder Performance Indicators with the Decode Mode set to Continuous Fix the scanner at a position that produces a high decoder performance value After properly positioning the scanner return the decoder configuration to the correct triggered mode of operation Cause Scanner lens is incorrect for the label size Solution Select a scanner with a lens appropriate for the label size Refer to scanner User Manual Cause Label out of specification Solution Use labels that are within industry standards Problem Excessive No Reads during decoding Cause Poor or marginal quality bar code labels Solution Use labels that meet Automatic Identification Manufacturer s AIM specifications for the selected symbology Cause Incorrect scanner selected for application Solution Measure narrow bar width or space whichever is narrowest of bar code and note minimum and maximum reading distance Consult your scanner s User Manual to
155. e you will see the Select Operations menu 2755 DD1P DD4P Bar Code Decoder Copyright 1992 Allen Bradley Company Inc CONFIGURATION Symbo logy Scanner Control Primary Match Table Discrete 1 0 Extended Match Table and Counters Aux and LCD Display Format Host Message Replacement Rules Host Message Format Host Communications fux Terminal Data Entry Display System A Bar Code Strings C Reset Status and Primary Counters B Status and Primary Counters D Reset Extended Match Counters E Restart System F Select Language G Save Configuration Press 1 8 A G or ESC Publication 2755 833 Installing the Decoder 4 9 Press 1 to proceed to the Symbology configuration screen A Caution screen will appear This screen allows you to disable the decoder s optional output modules during configuration It will appear each time you select a configuration screen from the Select Operations menu while the outputs are enabled More information on this subject appears in Chapter 5 For now press any key except ESC to continue configuration Note Restarting the decoder by selecting E from the Select Operations menu after configuration will reactivate the output modules SYMBOLOGY LENGTHS CHECK CHARACTERS CODE 39 EM No INCLUDE No 125 o No INCLUDE No GUARD BARS No CODABAR No 2 2 No INCLUDE No CODE 128 No o aa FNC1 CHAR None UP
156. e 39 check character 6 3 enabling 6 2 specific lengths 6 2 Code Verification with Pharma Code 6 15 Index 1 3 Command Line valid keys 5 10 Communications Parameters AUX port 14 1 Configuration discrete I O 7 1 Host Message Replacement Rules 10 1 LCD and AUX display 9 1 primary match table 7 1 scanner 7 1 Configuration Mode 5 1 enabling 13 5 switching to 13 6 vs manual data entry mode 13 2 Configuration Options decoder screens 3 1 host commands 3 2 Configuration Screen Commands Default 5 12 Next Page 5 10 Recall 5 11 Save 5 12 This Page 5 11 Configuration Screens 3 2 changing data 5 7 command line 5 10 commands 5 10 edit field 5 7 editing conventions 5 5 5 7 5 10 editing keys 5 7 help line 5 9 highlight 5 6 moving around the screen 5 6 select field 5 7 types of fields 5 7 Continuous Decode Mode description 3 8 when to use 3 8 Continuous Unique Decode Mode affect on valid reads 3 8 7 3 description 3 8 7 3 Contrast adjusting LCD 9 10 Coordinated 1 Decode Mode 7 9 Coordinated 2 Decode Mode 7 9 Coordinated Scanning Mode 2 2 3 8 Count in Extended Match Code Table 8 6 Counter Display on AUX Terminal 9 4 on configuration screen 14 4 Publication 2755 833 Index Publication 2755 833 on LCD Display 9 5 Counter Status Extended Match Code T
157. e 9600 Baud Rate e 8 Data Bits e 1 Stop Bit e Parity None e XON XOFF Flow Control Specific terminal types for data entry and display include e Allen Bradley Industrial Terminal Catalog No 1771 T1 T2 T3 e Allen Bradley laptop computers Catalog No 1784 T45 47 48 e Allen Bradley 2708 DH5 Series of Attended Workstations e DEC VT100 e Lear Siegler ADM 3E Appendix D provides details on how to connect and setup the terminals listed above To set the above communication parameters for other types of terminals refer to your terminal s User Manual Publication 2755 833 13 2 Configuration AUX Terminal Data Entry AUX Terminal Function 8 on the Select Operation screen accesses the AUX Configuration Terminal Data Entry screen Use this screen to configure the AUX terminal for manual data entry operations These parameters are used by the terminal when the AUX port is set to manual data entry not configuration mode Note Manual data entry and configuration modes are mutually exclusive Each manual data entry parameter is defined below along with the field type and possible values The default value is shown in the tables in bold letters fiUX TERMINAL DATA ENTRY ENABLE KEYBOARD ENTRY CONFIRM ENTRY No AUX DATA FORMAT Unformatted RUBOUT CHAR 8 BS ECHO TO TERMINAL No SIZE OF DISPLAY 80 DEFAULT PROMPT MESSAGE Commands ESC Change SPACE Cursor Control ARROWS Enable Keyboa
158. e Identifier 15 61 HM Configure Header Message 0 eee eeee 15 62 NM Configure Default No Read String 005 15 63 AX Configure AUX Terminal Data Entry Operations 15 64 TM Display Text Message atAUX TerminalandLCD 15 66 PM Default Prompt Message for AUX Terminal 15 68 P Read Decoder Performance Indicators 15 69 PR Read Package Counter cee eeee 15 70 NR Read Symbols NotRead Counter 0005 15 71 MC Read Output Counter anasa a 15 72 PC Clear Package Counter ccc eee a 15 73 PCCC Host Commands Maintenance and Troubleshooting Specifications Table of Contents toc ix NC Clear Symbols NotRead Counter 000 eeu 15 73 RN Save Configuration to Storage Memory and Restart 15 74 SA Save Configuration to Storage Memory No Restart 15 74 DD Set Configuration to Default Values 0 15 75 RD Set Configuration to Factory Defaults and Restart 15 75 RE Reset Decoder ccc su ceued ame descend oiidowee das 15 76 ID Version of Software iwc se see s ade dese ne daleale wes 15 76 DM Configure Bar Code Data Mask 0 15 77 PD Configure Pad Data Character 1 cee eee eee eae 15 77 Chapter 16 Chapter Objectives ccc cece eee eee 16 1 Protocol OPUONS ssc0ekcasdedevendecaedasd ted daaaeas 16 1 PCCC COMMANDS x2cc2 ce dtadened ader sed
159. e Output Open or Closed Allows the host to control the discrete outputs regardless of their normal state for a set duration When the specified duration expires the output reverts to its previous state If a normally open or closed output is held open or closed the state of the output will not change due to other conditions Holds Discrete Output Open or Closed High Byte Low Byte MSB LSB o 2 4 Pulse Duration in milliseconds 6 Command Reply High Byte Low Byte MSB LSB o 3 TNS 2 Appendix A lists the command addresses for holding a discrete output 1 8 open or closed Valid duration values in milliseconds are 0010 through 9999 Note that the duration must be expressed in hex format OA through 270F hexadecimal Publication 2755 833 16 14 PCCC Host Commands Example holds output closed for 10 milliseconds High Byte Low Byte O A N O Important A duration of 0000 holds the specified output in the programmed state until it is changed with another host command or via the AUX terminal configuration screens The condition field on the AUX terminal will display Open or Closed Diagnostic Link The diagnostic commands 06H allow you to obtain diagnostic data Commands on an DH485 communications link The decoder supports these diagnostic commands e Diagnostic Loop CMD 06H FNC 00H e Read Diagnostic Counters CMD 06H FNC 01H e Read Diagnostic Status CMD 06H FNC 03H e Reset Diagnostic Counte
160. e Symbols Package setting must be satisfied by each scanner individually For example the Symbols Package setting is 2 Scanner A must decode two symbols to produce a valid read or scanner B must decode two symbols to produce a valid read If both scanners are triggered from their respective package detects and Scanner A decodes only one symbol and Scanner B decodes only one symbol two packages will be sent to the host with a no read indicated in each In Independent Host Command mode the decoder starts and stops decoding symbols as instructed by a host computer For example the Symbols Package setting is 2 Scanner A must decode two symbols to produce a valid read or scanner B must decode two symbols to produce a valid read If both scanners are triggered using their respective Start Scan and Stop Scan characters and Scanner A decodes only one symbol and Scanner B decodes only one symbol two packages will be sent to the host with a no read indicated in each The following example illustrates the difference between Coordinated 1 and Coordinated 2 modes and how the Symbols Package setting affects scanner operation in both the Coordinated and the Independent modes Symbols Package 2 Coordinated 1 Mode Coordinated 2 Mode Independent Modes Example 1 Scanner A reads 1234 ScnA 1234 ABCD Example 2 ScannerA reads 1234 ScnA 1234 1234 Example 3 ScannerAreads 1234 Publication 2755 833 ScnA 1234 ABCD Scanner B r
161. e aa uia eoawasire cea drome aes 5 7 Select EditNumeric Field 0 cece cece eee eee 5 7 CGhangingi Fields Jchtvovedunuege pumas dees tke e aces 5 7 Audible Beep crsciek toe bag eudebamand awe ten ees 5 9 HelpLine ganres dence ack aaia a duit ox a E ated wah 5 9 Select Mde ound aune onani iea shies oaks 5 9 Edit MOUE iag Aurai a daen i n e dee 5 9 Command Line aoaaa 5 10 Command SUMMA a 5 10 Chapter 6 Configure Symbology coscisvebsterveksdeerueuseae gees 6 1 Codio 5a sie oan eae ae ee ees I ees eeest 6 2 Code 39 Specific Lengths sc cciceccvardabvseusaraceeas 6 2 Code 39 Check Character uaaa 6 3 Include Code 39 Check Character oaaae 6 3 Interleaved 2 of 5 aoaaa 6 3 Interleaved 2 of 5 Specific Lengths oaaae 6 3 Interleaved 2 of 5 Check Character aaae 6 4 Include Interleaved 2 of 5 Check Character 6 4 Interleaved 2 of 5 Guard Bars cece eee 6 4 COMED tidvexediSeetidupaeoheursvessounrens owas 6 5 Codabar Specific Lengths eccaceCsaseceavouweeaowens 6 5 Codabar Check Character sive tues eieaa wh 6 5 Include Codabar Check Character 000 eee 6 5 00 a0 ee 6 6 Code 128 Specific Lengths 0ccceeeeeees 6 6 Code 128 FNC1 Character 2 cece eee ee 6 7 UPCA siaakviadistisidedakds dedabdacdeabeaseees 6 7 UPC A Supplements cece eee eee ees 6 7 PCS a ceunest ner E mes eats Goss te A 6 8 UPC E SUDDIEMENIS c244shs beebbbeds deeeee sae eoues 6 8 Expand UPCE J sg
162. e board with optional I O modules installed MOD8 accepts 1 0 Board input or output 1 0 Modules module O MOD1 MOD2 MOD3 MOD4 MODS MOD6 MOD7 MOD8 O 12V DC Power Source 100 mA 9 Max for Autoload Input Only 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 miia eog es es es es S eS es 12 V Fuses F1 F8 DC o F F F F F E 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 To install a module on the I O board 1 Verify that power is disconnected from decoder and module connectors 2 Loosen the two screws which secure the cover of the decoder and open 3 Carefully align module pins over sockets in board Plug module into MOD position on I O board 4 Note The module pins must puncture the silicon seal of the TO board sockets 5 Tighten the hold down screw to secure module in position To remove a module verify that the power is off loosen the hold down screw and pull out module Publication 2755 833 4 20 Installing the Decoder Connecting I O Modules to External Devices Connect I O Devices using 7 8 inch holes for 1 2 inch conduit Two Catalog No 2755 NBO NEMA 4 Connector Kits Wiring I O Modules Publication 2755 833 The bottom of the decoder has two holes for I O module field wiring The 7 g inch holes accept standard 3 inch conduit fittings or NEMA 4 Conduit Hubs or the 2755 NBO NEMA 4
163. e control code Example Command OS20 Parameters 20 Command Parameters Parameter Function Values n Discrete output number 2 Switch operation normally a open or normally closed 0 Normally Open Response 00CR 00 command complete response code CR end of message control code for Carriage Return Publication 2755 833 ASCII Host Commands 15 29 OC Set Output Condition and Output Duration Command Format OCnctttt Function Sets the condition that will activate an output and the length of time in milliseconds the output is activated Parameters nctttt Command Parameters n Output number 1 through 8 one ead Package o Read Package atch Complete atch Entry ead and No Match o Read or atch 7 Auto Load 8 Auto Load Input 9 Host buffer full A Host buffer overflow 0000 0010 to 9999 milliseconds 0000 disables condition The AutoLoad Input function applies only to output 8 Parameter Function Valid Values OO 2 c Condition activates output ZOunRWNEH ol i tt t tt i tl ttt Time in milliseconds that output is activated Response rr lt end gt rr response code lt end gt end of message control code Publication 2755 833 15 30 ASCII Host Commands OC Set Output Condition and Output Duration continued Example Command 0C510110 Parameters 510110 Command Parameters Parameter Function Values
164. e ee aminah 16 1 COMMANG Format at yccausGadaeeededeardsadeaideas 16 2 Command Reply Format 0 2 cece e eee eee 16 3 Unprotected Read Command ccc cece eee eee ene 16 4 Read Current Bar Code Data 00 cee 16 5 Read Counters and Performance Indicator 16 6 Read Last Host Message a 16 7 Read Decoder Configuration Data 00 00 16 8 Unprotected Write Command 4 40sebssewee ned eters cess 16 8 Modify Configuration Data 65 cscg 4 eee a 16 9 Execute Decoder Functions eee eeeeeee 16 9 Send RepeatRead Command cc eee eee aes 16 11 Cancel RepeatRead Command ccc cece ees 16 12 Display Text Message on AUX Terminal Enable AUX Terminal Keyboard A ide ed ausewe edhe te meeds ores awe 16 12 Hold Discrete Output Open or Closed c cece ee eee 16 13 Diagnostic Link Commands ccc eee e eee tenes 16 14 Diagnostic hop enigeen danas deed ew ei 16 14 Read Diagnostic Counters aaas denned Sew eeN 6 okw eee 16 15 Reset Diagnostic Counters civ ead ew deeded ean d 16 16 Read Diagnostic Status si0c2pavenseeadeed dee dean aes 16 16 Chapter 17 Chapter Objectives cece eee eee ees 17 1 Replacing the Battery voces seewesaswsneeecewe wews dae bore 17 1 Replacing Module Fuses 0 cece eee eee eee 17 2 Troubleshooting iss eke pte bode ded welede bbe deweaes 17 3 Chapter 18 Bar Code Decoders Catalog Numbers 2755 DD1_ 2755 DD4_
165. e for display on the AUX terminal and or LCD Display use the command address 900H or 901H The 900H command address configures a message for display at the AUX terminal but does not enable the keyboard The 901H command configures a message for display and enables the keyboard for one entry Display Message on AUX Terminal 900H Display Message and Enable Keyboard Entry 901H High Byte Low Byte MSB LSB STEW TNS Command Address 900H 901H Nn ow O A N O Length of message string Message Data to AUX Port If the message exceeds the size of the AUX terminal display it will be truncated If the LCD is enabled to display data and scrolling is disabled data that exceeds 40 characters is truncated If scrolling is enabled for the LCD data that exceeds 20 characters is truncated If you do not enter message data the Default Prompt Message defined during AUX terminal configuration is used Below is the reply to both the 900H and 901H command PCCC Host Commands 16 13 Command Replies High Byte Low Byte MSB LSB 1 STS 00H CMD Reply 48H 0 3 TNS 2 If the AUX port is not set to manual data entry mode CONFIG jumper is open the LCD will display the message but not the AUX terminal The command returns a status of 01H If the decoder has not processed the previous text message the command returns a status of 02H indicating the command failed because the display buffer was not available Hold Discret
166. e labels are read before the No Read Timer expires set the Inter Scan Timer to a value that is less than the No Read Timer setting A valid read starts the timer See Figure 5 2 The decoder decodes a scan within Field 1 which starts the Inter Scan Timer and immediately stops decoding The decoder waits for the timer to expire or timeout to resume decoding Use the following equations to create a delay between decodes Equation 1 Minimum Inter Scan Timer Value W cm or inches x 1000 msec sec Approximate Inter Scan Timer Value msec Line Speed cm sec or inches sec Equation 2 Maximum Inter Scan Timer Value S cm or inches x 1000 msec sec Approximate Inter Scan Timer Value msec Line Speed cm sec or inches sec You may have to experiment with several settings since factors such as label quality determine when the first read occurs ATTENTION Set output durations in multiples of 5 milliseconds Actual output will have a worst case precision of 0 to 5 milliseconds varying with the timing of the output Durations that are not set in multiples of 5 milliseconds will be rounded up to the nearest multiple of 5 and function within the same 0 to 5 millisecond precision For example a setting of 25 milliseconds will result in a duration of from 20 to 25 milliseconds A setting of 23 milliseconds will result in the same duration range Publication 2755 833 7 6 Configuration Scanner Control Primary Match
167. e packages now loaded into table Conditions for Outputs 1 2 and 3 show Match Entry After all the table entries are loaded AutoLoad INPUT must be disabled and re enabled to load additional packages AutoLoad Configuration after AutoLoad INPUT Activated Again No new data scanned MATCH CODE TABLE DISCRETE I O Enabled l 1 Any 0 AiB Auto Load 100 2 ny D AiB Auto Load 100 3 Any D AiB Auto Load 100 4 ny D AiB None 8 5 Any O AiB None 13 6 Any 0 AIB None 8 7 Any O AiB None 8 8 Any 0 AiB Auto Load INPUT 0 Commands ESC Change SPACE Cursor Control ARROWS Notes Table is restored to previously saved configuration Data cleared from match code table for entries 1 2 and 3 Output conditions change from Match Entry to AutoLoad for Outputs 1 2 and 3 Ready to Autoload next symbol read into match code table Publication 2755 833 Extended Match Table Chapter 8 Configuration Extended Match Table and Counters You can use the screen illustrated below to set up match code entries in the Extended Match Code Table You can define up to 128 entries here that provide added flexibility in response to incoming data over the Primary Match Codes described in the previous chapter Using Extended Match Codes you can compare all incoming data against table entries that you create to meet your own unique needs The decoder can then count valid matches and optionally fire one or m
168. e provide external control of the outputs using host commands e indicate a buffer full condition no data lost e indicate a buffer overflow condition e load bar code data into the match code table using an external switch along with an input module ATTENTION When controlling outputs locally using configuration screens suspend host communications to prevent outputs from unintentionally changing state Each discrete I O parameter is defined below The options for each parameter are shown with the default setting in bold letters Output State Field Type Options O Normally Open Select C Normally Closed Defines the normal state of each discrete output or input The default is O Normally Opened To change the state of the output to C Normally Closed select C Publication 2755 833 7 16 Configuration Scanner Control Primary Match Table Discrete I O Publication 2755 833 ATTENTION Outputs are initially open off when power is first applied to the decoder and again when the decoder is powered off If a fault condition is detected the outputs open and the CPU ACTIVE indicator light turns off Source Field Type Options A Default for DS B Select AIB A or B Default for DD A B Precedent determined Specifies from which scanner s an event can originate and meet the primary match pattern requirements For single head decoders Scanner A is the default value For dual head decoders the defau
169. e symbology 1 Ye5 0 Forward 1 Reverse ee 2 Forward Scanner A b Decode direction Reverse Scanner B 3 Reverse Scanner A Forward Scanner B cc Quiet zone ratio 04 to 10 00 Ignore dd Space tolerance 05 to 40 00 Ignore ee Bar tolerance 05 to 40 0 midrange f Wide to narrow bar ratio 2t04 gg Minimum number of bars 03 to 12 Applies only to Dual Head Decoder Response Publication 2755 833 rr lt end gt rr response code lt end gt end of message code ASCII Host Commands 15 17 CP Configure Pharma Code Symbology continued Example Command CP10040000005 Parameters 10040000005 Command Parameter Function Valid Values Parameters a Enable symbology 1 Yes b Decode direction 0 Forward cc Quiet zone ratio 04 dd Space tolerance 00 Ignore ee Bar tolerance 00 Ignore f Wide to narrow bar ratio O midrange gg Minimum number of bars 05 Response 00CR 00 command complete response code CR end of message control code for Carriage Return Publication 2755 833 15 18 ASCII Host Commands SC Configure Scanner A Control Command Format SCldcsprrrrttttm Function Specifies the operating parameters for Scanner A or Scanners A and B in coordinated mode Parameters Idcsprrrrtttttm Command Parameter Function Valid Values Parameters 0 On Laser light 1 Triggered 2 0ff 0 Package Detect 1 Host d Trigger mode 2 Internal Timer 3
170. e the Laser On Mode parameter of the decoder to ON Cause Trigger not active Laser on Mode parameter of decoder is set to Triggered Solution Activate trigger and look at the Trigger Active indicator on decoder When the trigger is activated the indicator should light Publication 2755 833 17 4 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Problem Laser On indicators on both the decoder and scanner light but the scanner does not emit the laser light Cause Mechanical shutter on scanner closed 2755 L4 L5 scanners only Solution Open shutter Cause Scanner Laser On switch is in OFF position 2755 L7 L9 scanners only Solution Turn on switch Cause Cable connections between decoder and scanner are loose or defective Solution Check cable and connections Cause Laser tube or diode burned out or defective Solution Replace scanner Problem Decoder Trigger Active indicator will not light Cause Wrong or improperly wired trigger source Decode Mode is set to Triggered Solution Verify that an appropriate package detector is properly connected to the scanner Most photoelectric package detectors have a built in LED Verify operation of this package detect LED Some photoelectric switches have sensitivity adjustments Check adjustment Cause Cable connections between decoder and scanner are loose or defective Solution Check cables and connections Problem Decoder cannot read label Caus
171. ead String Length 1 0 32 0 Empty String 32 32 characters No Read Timer 0 10 9999 0 None Inter Scan Timer 0 10 9999 0 None symbology in Match Code Table Entry 1 0 Code 39 Interleaved 2 of 5 2 Codabar 3 UPC A 4 UPC E 5 EAN 8 6 EAN 13 7 Code 128 8 Pharma Code 15 ANY Enable Match Code Table Enty1 Match Code Table Entry 1 Ignored Match Code 1 String Length 0 32 0 Empty String 32 characters E N Output 1 Event 0 None 1 Read Package No Read Package atch Complete atch Entry Read and no match o Read or no match 7 Auto Load 8 Invalid 9 Host Buffer Full A Host Buffer Overflow B Open C Closed Output 1 Duration 0 10 9999 0 None symbology in Match Code Table Entry 2 0 Code 39 1 Interleaved 2 of 5 2 Codabar 3 UPC A 4 UPC E 5 EAN 8 6 EAN 13 7 Code 128 8 Pharma Code 15 Any Enable Match Code Table Entry 2 Ignored nue WN ow ou ou a 4BE Match Code 2 String Length 1 0 32 0 Empty String 32 32 characters Publication 2755 833 A 6 Decoder Configuration Addresses Number of Acceptable Values PCCC Address Bytes Default in bold Configuration Parameter Output 2 Event Output 2 Duration symbology in Match Code Table Entry 3 4E3 Enable Match Code Table Entry 3 4E4 Match Code 3 String Length String Output 3 Event Output 3 Duration symbology in Match Code Table Entry 4 509 Enable Match Code Table Entry 4 50A Match Code 4
172. ead bar code data configuration data counter values performance indicators and the last message sent to host 2 Unprotected Write Command The unprotected write command is used to modify or write over configuration data clear counters flush data set defaults and perform other functions 3 Diagnostic Command The diagnostic command is used to read link layer diagnostic counters and statuses reset diagnostic counters and perform a diagnostic loop Publication 2755 833 16 2 Publication 2755 833 PCCC Host Commands ATTENTION When controlling discrete outputs locally using AUX port configuration suspend host communications to prevent outputs from unintentionally changing state Command Format The general structure and definitions of all commands is shown below The structure shows the high and low byte of each data word word 2 bytes Data is always transmitted with the low byte of each data word first and then the high byte In the command explanations below MSB stands for Most Significant Bit and LSB stands for Least Significant Bit High Byte Low Byte MSB LSB 1 STS 0 3 Transaction Number Sequence TNS 2 5 High Address FNC Code or Low Address 4 7 6 Data 122 or 124 bytes maximum 127 126 e CMD Byte 0 specifies the command to perform Bits 0 1 2 and 3 of the CMD byte contain the command code The options are 0001 01H Unprotected Read Command 1000 08H Unprotected Write Command
173. eads ABCD ScnA 1234 ABCD ScnA 1234 No R ead ScnB ABDC No Read Scanner B reads 1234 ScnA 1234 No Read ScnA 1234 No Read ScnB 1234 No Read Scanner A reads ABCD cnA 1234 ABCD ScnA 1234 ABCD ScnB No Read No Read In this example the field delimiteris the source identifiers are ScnA and ScnB for scanner A and B respectively and the default no read message is No Read Configuration Scanner Control Primary Match Table Discrete I O 7 11 Trigger Timeout Field Type Options Edit 10 through 9999 or 0 Determines the length of time in milliseconds the Scanner B laser remains on after receiving a start trigger The trigger timeout determines a no read condition for Scanner B The default is 0 which disables the timer To set the trigger timeout enter a number between 10 and 9999 The timer has an accuracy of 5 milliseconds Select a value that allows enough time for the decoder to read an entire package or a no read will occur When Scanner B is triggered the timer starts If a package is not processed successfully within the elapsed time Symbols Package setting is not satisfied a no read occurs Note The Trigger Timeout acts like the No Read Timer if the Scanning Mode is independent it is not used if the Scanning Mode is set to coordinated Package Detect Input Parameters These parameters control the package detect input for Scanner A and B Each parameter is defined belo
174. ecific start value when desired Configuration Extended Match Table and Counters 8 7 Loading Field Type Options 0 through 9 X 0 Edit Numeric In the most general sense loading provides a means to distribute the response to incoming data among the eight discrete outputs Loading instructs the decoder to respond to a match by activating the discrete corresponding to the next column number in which a nonzero value appears The default value of 0 disables loading for a given discrete Values include 0 through 9 and X Activation occurs from left to right in a round robin fashion During operation a greater than symbol gt will appear on the terminal screen to indicate the next discrete scheduled to fire Any output set to X will fire every time a match is successful in addition to the appropriate round robin output Note The duration of Extended Match Code Table outputs are established in the Primary Match Code Table See below Given a situation where discretes 5 6 and 8 are activated with loading values of 1 3 and 1 the table below shows what would happen during three complete cycles 15 total matches In the example below a bold horizontal line marks the beginning of each new cycle Publication 2755 833 8 8 Configuration Extended Match Table and Counters Publication 2755 833 Match Internal Status of Counters On Terminal Display
175. ect The Mode parameter controls the operational status of individual entries in the extended match code table The default setting is Disabled Other choices include e Autoload which configures the specified extended match code table entry to match the bar code data from the first valid package s into the extended match code table Once a pattern is entered the Mode parameter changes to Match Entry If the bar code data contains the character the decoder displays in the match code table but records a single in the data Use the character to enter any non printable character For example M represents CTRL M or carriage return See Appendix I e Match Entry which activates the specified output when bar code data matches the string in that row The duration of Extended Match Code Table outputs are established in the Primary Match Code Table below Publication 2755 833 8 4 Configuration Extended Match Table and Counters Publication 2755 833 Used for verification of specific label information The corresponding output counter increments each time a match entry occurs Lot which is an advanced capability available only in the extended match code table and not in the primary match code table When Lot is selected the decoder will change the Mode parameter to Match Entry M place into the extended match code table entry the value of the first Interleaved 2 of 5 label it reads and increment the
176. ection Code Verification List Laser Light Decode Mode No Read Timer Inter S can Timer Capture Count Symbols Scan Symbols P ackage Match Complete Laser Light Decode Mode Trigger Timeout Publication 2755 833 J 2 Custom Settings Category of Parameters Parameter Default Setting Bar Code Symbology Match Code Text String Match Code Table 1 8 Normal State Source Duration Scanner A Filter Scanner A Sense Scanner B Filter Scanner B Sense Counter Status Status of Counter Set Mode Source Package Detect Input Extended Match Code Table Symbology Match Pattern String Count Loading Display Data Message Format Scroll LCD Display Bar Code Strings Position Decoder Performance Position Package Counter Position bols Not Read Counter tion Primary Counter 1 Position Primary Counter 2 Position Primary Counter 3 Position Primary Counter 4 Position Primary Counter 5 Position Primary Counter 6 Position Primary Counter 7 Position Primary Counter 8 Position Rule Number wh AUX and LCD Display Format Source Symbology Symbol Number Find String Containging Host Message Replacement Replace Entire String With Rules Minimum Field Length Alignment Fill Character Host Message Field Number Bar Code String Examples Publication 2755 833 Custom Settings J 3 Category of Parameters Parameter Default S etting Start Character Source Identifier for AUX Source Identifier
177. ed 15 28 set search and replace rule for host message fields 15 50 symbology and supplements 15 8 symbology lengths 15 9 using DH485 15 1 using RS 232 RS 422 15 1 version of software 15 76 write primary match code table entry 15 34 write scanner source to match code table 15 24 Audible Beep 5 9 Auto Refresh 8 2 AutoLoad activate using AutoLoad INPUT 7 19 H 1 H 2 activate using AUX port connector pins 7 19 H 2 activate with a restart 7 19 description of 7 19 with Extended Match Code Table entries 8 3 AutoLoad INPUT 7 20 activating autoload function 7 20 7 23 H 1 loading multiple packages 7 21 7 24 using input module 7 20 H 1 when to use 7 21 AUX Display 9 1 AUX Port communication parameters 14 1 configuration mode 2 4 5 1 13 6 connecting AUX Terminal 4 15 4 16 connector pinouts NEMA Type 1 4 15 connector pinouts NEMA Type 4 4 16 data entry mode 2 4 13 6 switching between configuration and data entry mode 2 4 13 5 AUX Terminal Data Entry 13 1 13 2 confirming entries 13 3 defining default prompt message 13 5 enabling data entry 13 2 enabling data entry for no reads 13 3 enabling data entry from host 13 2 formatting data sent to host 13 11 processing no reads 13 8 size of display 13 5 AUX Terminal Display Functions 13 7 display examples 9
178. ed mode If you use one of the independent decode modes either Host or Package Detect Scanner B will operate independently of Scanner A and use its own trigger source If the Decode Mode is package detect decoding is triggered by the Scanner B package detect signal If the Decode Mode is host decoding is initiated by the Scanner B Start Character and concluded by the Scanner B Stop Character In the Coordinated modes the Symbols Package setting can be satisfied by either or both scanner s For example the Symbols Package setting is 2 Scanner A can decode one valid symbol and Scanner B can decode one valid symbol to produce a valid read or both symbols can be read from either scanner The difference between the two coordinated modes is in how each defines what constitutes a unique decoding event within a package e In Coordinated 1 mode source dependent the decoder always considers the source of the data as well as its content Data will be treated as unique if it originates from different scanners or if the value or symbology is different e In Coordinated 2 mode source independent the decoder will consider data to be unique only when its value or its symbology is different Identical data originating from different scanners will be treated as a single decode and the second decode is ignored Publication 2755 833 7 10 Configuration Scanner Control Primary Match Table Discrete I O In Independent Package Detect mode th
179. ed to display in position 21 will not display because the AUX terminal has not been enabled to display data Publication 2755 833 9 12 Configuration AUX and LCD Display Parameters DISPLAY DATA None Disables the display of data on any device MESSAGE FORMAT Unformatted SCROLL LCD No POSITION 21 BAR CODE STRINGS Configures bar code data to display in position 21 IE DECODER PERFORMANCE O PACKAGE COUNTER O SYMBOLS NOT READ COUNTER PRIMARY COUNTERS 1 None 2 None 3 None 4 None 5 None 6 None 7 None 8 None eoooeoooce Example 3 In Example 3 the AUX terminal is enabled to display bar code data decoder performance values and the package counter DISPLAY DATA Aux Only Enables AUX terminal to display data MESSAGE FORMAT Unformatted Displays unformatted bar code data SCROLL LCD No POSITION 21 BAR CODE STRINGS Displays bar code data starting at position 21 50 DECODER PERFORMANCE Displays Decoder Performance values at position 50 60 PACKAGE COUNTER lt Displays Package Counter at position 60 O SYMBOLS NOT READ COUNTER PRIMARY COUNTERS E 1 None 0 2 None 0 3 None 0 4 None 0 5 None 0 6 None 0 7 None 0 8 None The terminal display will look like this for the above configuration Publication 2755 833 Bar Code Data Configuration AUX and LCD Display Parameters 9 13 Decoder Performance Values ScannerA Scanner B Package Co
180. eight installed Dimensions Inches Centimeters Environment Ambient Temperature Operating Storage Relative Humidity Chapter 1 8 85 Min to 264 Max VAC 100 to 240 VAC Nominal 47 Min to 63 Max Hz 50 to 60 Hz 80 VA Max DD decoderss 55 VA Max DS decoders Fuse Replacement Part No 77104 899 01 3 60 VDC 0 5A Max 12 140 VAC 0 5A Max 24 280 VAC 0 5A Max 3 3 32 VDC 90 140V RMS DC 180 280V RMS DC NEMA Type 1 NEMA Type 4 Green Green Yellow Red Yellow Green Red Yellow Green Red 10 Ibs 4 5 kg maximum with all options 10 25 H x12 W x 4 57 D 26 0 H x 30 5 W x 11 6 D Oto 50 C 32 to 122 F 40 to 85 C 40 to 185 F 5 to 95 noncondensing Publication 2755 833 18 2 Specifications Publication 2755 833 Scanner Ports Scanner Ports A and B Connector NEMA Type 1 Connector NEMA Type 4 Communications HOST Port Electrical Standards Protocols Connector NEMA Type 1 Connector NEMA Type 4 Baud Rate Parity Data Bits Stop Bits Flow Control AUX Port Electrical Standard Connector NEMA Type 1 Connector NEMA Type 4 Data Bits Stop Bit Baud Rate Parity LCD Display Optional Number of lines Number of characters line Backlighting Decoded Symbologies Certifications 25 pin female subminiature D 19 pin male circular Cannon KPT series RS232 RS422 RS485 ASCII RS232 RS422 DH485 Allen Bradley PCCC RS485 only 25 pin
181. elect Operation menu Press Y to recall the values from storage memory The recalled configuration will then control decoder operations Saves the configuration currently in operating memory to storage memory The Save command does not alter the current operation of the decoder The following message prompts you to confirm the save operation SAVE CONFIGURATION TO EEPROM Confirm CY N Press N or Esc to cancel the operation and return to the Select Operation menu Press Y to save the configuration to storage memory Copies the factory default configuration parameters into operating memory All parameters take effect immediately with the following exceptions Host communications parameters baud rate bits character parity host protocol device address ACK character and NAK character These parameters will take effect only after a Restart When you select Default the following confirmation message will appear SET DEFAULT CONFIGURATION C N Press N or Esc to cancel the operation and return to the Select Operation menu Press Y to restore the factory defaults in storage memory to operating memory This operation has no effect on any configuration parameters previously saved to storage memory with the Save command The factory defaults are listed in Appendix B ATTENTION It is good practice to save your configuration once the required host communications parameters have been set Doing so ass
182. ement string metacharacters Character Description and Use The backslash plus a number 1 through 9 recalls a previously saved string Any character string or expression that is surrounded by parentheses in the search pattern as described earlier can be recalled by the replace pattern using the n format Since the parentheses may be nested the number n represents the order of the groupings as defined by the order of the left parenthesis in the search pattern Examples Search Pattern 123 ABC Replace Entire String With 1 Incoming String 123ABC456 Result for Host Message ABC The search pattern above matches the incoming string The Replace Entire String With value states that the string identified within the first parentheses should be sent to the host Search Pattern 123 ABC Replace Entire String With 1 2 Incoming String 123ABC456 Result for Host Message 123ABCABC The search pattern above matches the incoming string The Replace Entire String With value states that the string identified within the first parentheses 123ABC plus the string identified by the second parentheses ABC should be sent to the host When the ampersand amp is used in a replacement pattern it indicates that the part of the string that matches the search pattern should be sent to the host Therefore if the string read contains more characters than the search pattern then the additional characters are discarded E
183. emove defective fuse by pulling it from the I O board Align fuse pins over sockets in board before inserting fuse Insert new fuse into correct position F1 F8 Note The pins must puncture the silicon seal of the I O board sockets Close cover of decoder and tighten screws Note The discrete I O LED indicators still operate when a fuse is blown Troubleshooting Maintenance and Troubleshooting 17 3 This section lists problems that may occur with the decoder and or connected equipment Each problem lists possible causes and solutions Problem Decoder Power On indicator does not light Cause Decoder power switch is in OFF position Solution Turn decoder power switch to ON position Cause No incoming power Solution Verify power source Cause Improper connection to power source Solution Check connections Cause Faulty decoder Solution Return decoder to Allen Bradley for repair Problem Decoder Power On indicator lights but CPU Active indicator does not stay lit Cause Internal decoder failure Solution Return decoder to Allen Bradley for repair Problem Decoder Laser On indicator lights but scanner Laser On indicator does not light Cause Cable connections between decoder and scanner are loose or defective Solution Check cable and connections Problem Decoder Laser On indicator does not light Cause Wrong configuration Solution Configur
184. enerated The decoder can generate three types of transmission checks 1 LRC Longitudinal Redundancy Check A byte developed by an exclusive OR of all bytes in a message 2 Checksum MSB Sixteen bit sum of all the bytes in a message with the most significant byte transmitted first 3 Checksum LSB Sixteen bit sum of all the bytes in a message with the least significant byte transmitted first Appendix C provides an example of a transmission check Do not use XON XOFF flow control with transmission check The transmission check bytes could be interpreted as an XOFF character Publication 2755 833 Chapter Objectives Supported Terminals Chapter 1 3 Configuration AUX Terminal Data Entry The terminal connected to the AUX port can be used for either configuration or manual data entry and display operations We refer to this terminal as the AUX terminal This chapter describes how to configure and use the AUX terminal for manual data entry and display operations Topics include supported terminals for manual data entry e configuration for AUX terminal data entry e how to enable manual data entry mode e how to display bar code data decoder performance and counter values e how to display host messages e how to perform manual data entry at the keyboard Any terminal that supports the following features can be used for manual data entry or display operations at the AUX port e Carriage Return and Line Feed
185. ens while going over editing conventions Publication 2755 833 5 6 Introduction to AUX Terminal Configuration Publication 2755 833 Tole SCANNER CA LASER LIGHT DECODE MODE NO READ TIMER INTER SCAN TIMER CAPTURE COUNT SYMBOLS SCAN SYMBOLS PACKAGE Highlighted Box Select Field CONTROL Triggered Cont inuous LASER LIGHT Triggered DECODE MODE Coordinated 1 None msec TRIGGER TIMEOUT None msec None msec 2 1 1 MATCH COMPLETE 1 MATCH CODE TABLE _ DISCRETE 170 Enabled Prompt Line Highlight Edit Field PACKAGE DETECT INPUT A FILTER No SENSE LO Package B FILTER No SENSE LO Package 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Help Line Command Line Each screen displays a group of configuration parameters and settings The cursor displays as a highlighted reverse video box indicating the current selection The above screen shows the Laser Light setting of Triggered as the current selection Moving Around the Screen Use the arrow keys to move the highlight or selection cursor around the configuration screen T Moves the highlight or selection cursor up one field Moves the highlight or selection cursor down one field The Return key is equivalent to the J key when moving around the screen Moves the highlight or selection cursor to the right one field lt Moves the highlight or selection cursor to the left one field Note
186. er The counter increments for each symbol not read in a package Package Counter Displays the number of packages detected by the decoder The package counter increments each time a trigger is generated by the package detector a host command or the internal timer It also increments each time a package is read in the continuous or continuous unique operation modes Primary Counters Displays the number of output conditions that occur for each 1 8 discrete output 1 8 Each output counter increments when a TRUE condition occurs for that output Publication 2755 833 Restart System Display and System Configuration 14 5 The counters are six digit values that increment up to 999999 When exceeding 999999 the display automatically advances to 000000 To exit this function and return to the Select Operation menu press ESC Resetting the Counters You can reset the decoder status and counters to zero from the Display Status and Counters screen You can reset individual counters by pressing a number 1 through 8 and answering Y to the confirmation request that appears on the bottom of the screen You can reset reset the decoder status and all primary counters to zero by pressing the Space bar Press Y to reset the status and counters Press N or Esc to cancel the operation This operation is identical to the Reset Status and Counters function on the Select Operation menu Note The counters also reset when you r
187. er Parameter Function Valid Values f Enable a bar code 1 Yes symbology 0 No 01 Code 39 02 Interleaved 2 of 5 03 Codabar ee Specifies abarcode 04 UPC A symbology O5 UPC E 06 EAN 8 07 EAN 13 08 Code 128 0 None ix 1 2 character supplement al aa 4 ue 2 5 character supplement symbology 3 2 or 5 character supplement y gy 4 Auto None 2 or 5 character supplement See the CP command for Pharma C ode configuration Supplements are valid for UPC A UPC E EAN 8 EAN 13 For other symbologies select 0 None or omit the s parameter Response rr lt end gt rr response code lt end gt end of message control code Example Command CT1041 Parameters 1041 ee Parameter Functions Values f Enable bar code symbology 1 Yes cc Select bar code symbology 04 UPC A r Enable supplements for 1 2 character selected symbology supplement 00 command complete response code CR end of message control code for Carriage Return Publication 2755 833 ASCII Host Commands 15 9 SL Configure Specific Length for Bar Code Symbology Command Format SLccssttuuvvwwxxyyzz Function Configures specific lengths for Code 39 Interleaved 2 of 5 Codabar and Code 128 symbologies Parameters ccssttuuvvwwxxyyzz TE va values 01 Code 39 te Bar code 02 Interleaved 2 of 5 symbology 03 Codabar 08 Code 128 SS Ist specific length 00 through 64 t
188. er 10 for more information Publication 2755 833 11 6 Configuration Host Message Format Publication 2755 833 Send Symbology Field Type Options Yes Select No Controls whether the symbology type of the bar code is included in the message sent to the host The default is No which means the symbology type is not sent to the host If you select Yes the symbology type is transmitted as a two digit code Keyboard Data from AUX Terminal Code 39 Interleaved 2 of 5 Codabar UPC A UPC E EAN 8 EAN 13 Code 128 Pharma Code Send Package Count Field Type Options Yes Select No Controls whether the package count is included in the message sent to the host The default is No the package count is not sent to the host The six digit package count is maintained by the package counter Counter data can also be sent to the host when requested by a host command as described elsewhere in this manual Send Bar Code Strings Field Type Options Yes Select No Controls whether bar code data is sent to the host The default of Yes sends bar code data to the host Configuration Host Message Format 11 7 Send Decoder Performance Field Type Options Yes Select No Controls whether the performance indicators for Scanners A and B are included in the message sent to the host The default is No the performance indicators are not sent to the host The performance in
189. er does not detect the supplement the primary symbol is sufficient to ae a valid scan The Auto selection is not recommended when the Decode Mode is set to ontinuous If you select 2 5 or 2 or 5 the decoder must decode both the primary label and the supplement to produce a valid scan Publication 2755 833 6 10 Configuration Symbology Publication 2755 833 EAN 13 Field Type Options No Yes Select Enables disables decoding of EAN 8 labels The default of No disables decoding of this symbology Select Yes to enable decoding EAN 13 Supplements Field Type Options None 2 Select 5 2o0r5 Auto Enables disables decoding of EAN 13 supplementary codes The default of None disables decoding of supplements for this symbology Options are None Disables decoding of supplementary codes 2 Enables decoding of 2 character supplementary codes 5 Enables decoding of 5 character supplementary codes 2o0r5 Enables decoding of 2 or 5 character supplementary codes Auto Enables decoder to auto discriminate supplementary codes None 2 or 5 on label The Auto Selection allows you to mix labels without supplements with labels containing 2 or 5 digit supplements The supplements are often a different size than the primary symbol Therefore it is critical that both the primary symbol and the supplement be present when the decoder is triggered If the decoder does not detect the supplement the primary symbol is
190. eretneeanetaiwa Mark eague ee baeare Hats 10 13 Fill CHAVA is ad dtbe eee debe aba ke Bb awe See eee 10 13 Host Message FieldNumber ccc a 10 13 Assembling a Host Message naaa 10 14 EXGINDICS e saaan a i Boe ala oiek EER aaea ETEA A 10 15 Example 1 Sorting by DataSource ouaaa 10 15 Example 2 Identifying the Source of Data 10 15 Example 3 Sorting bySymbology 005 10 16 Example 4 Sorting by SymbolNumber 10 16 Example 5 Sorting Symbols by Data Identifiers 10 17 Publication 2755 833 toc vi Table of Contents Configuration Host Message Format Configuration Host Communications Configuration AUX Terminal Data Entry Publication 2755 833 Example 6 Sorting by Unique Characters and or Strings 10 18 Example 7 Stripping Unwanted Characters 10 18 Example 8 Stripping Unwanted Characters 10 19 Example 9 Substituting Characters Within a String 10 19 Chapter 11 Host Message Format civceeatceedpadtew deed few eed oud 11 1 Introduction to Host Message Format aoaaa 11 1 Bar Code Host Message Format oaaae 11 2 Host Message Parameters oaaae 11 4 Start Character aoaaa aaa 11 4 Source Identifier for AUX A and B cece eee eee 11 4 Header Message nuaa 11 5 Field Delimiter oonu a 11 5 Number of Fields in Message ouaaa 11 5 Send Symbology aaa 11 6 Send Package Count nnua 11 6 Send Bar Code Strings 2 cece cece eee 11
191. erformance display enter a starting character position between 1 and 40 For example to start the display at character position 21 select 21 Assuming scrolling is disabled the display will appear beginning in the first position on the second line of the LCD display Remember when selecting a starting position that you will need space for up to 3 characters for a single scanner and 6 characters for two scanners Position Package Counter Field Type Options 0 through 40 0 Edit Numeric Defines the character position at which to start displaying the 6 digit package counter The default of 0 disables the display of the package counter The Default Prompt Message and host messages always start in position 1 To prevent other data fro overwriting these messages on the LCD Display select a position greater than the message length LCD scrolling Configuration AUX and LCD Display Parameters 9 5 To start the package counter display at a specific position enter a starting character position between 1 and 40 For example to start the display at character position 30 select 30 0 Position Symbols Not Read Counter Field Type Options 0 through 40 0 Edit Numeric Defines the character position at which to start displaying the 6 digit no read counter The default of 0 disables the display of the no read counter To start the no read counter display at a specific position enter a starting character posi
192. ermined by a modulus calculation on the sum or the weighted sum of the data field contents msec Abbreviation for millisecond 1 1 000 of one second Publication 2755 833 G 6 Glossary Publication 2755 833 multi drop link A link that has more than 2 stations contrasted with a point to point link multiplexer The incorporation of 2 or more signals into a single wave from which the individual signal can be recovered N NAK See negative acknowledgement Negative Acknowledgment An ASCII control character transmitted by a receiver as a negative response to the sender NEMA standards Consensus standards for electrical equipment by the members of the National Electrical Manufacturers Association NEMA NEMA Type 1 Enclosure intended for indoor use Provides a degree of protection against contact with the enclosed equipment in locations where unusual service conditions do not exist The enclosure is sheet steel treated to resist corrosion NEMA Type 4 Enclosure intended for indoor or outdoor use primarily to provide a degree of protection against windblown dust and rain splashing water and hose directed water and to be undamaged by the formation of ice on the enclosure No Match An output condition in which decoded data does not match an entry in the match code table No Read An output condition in which bar codes on a package are not read correctly or are incomplete fields per package count not satisfied
193. ers E Restart System F Select Language G Save Configuration Press 1 8 A G or ESC Connecting the AUX Terminal Construct your own cable using the pinouts in Appendix D Installing the Decoder 4 15 6 Adjust the position of the scanner to maximize decoder performance 7 Fix the scanner in this optimized position Customize As Required Your system is now ready to customize for best performance in your particular application The software screens used to do that have been structured to walk you through the configuration process We recommend stepping through the screens in the order they appear using this manual as a reference If your application requires a host device or I O modules the next two sections Connecting Host Device and Installing I O Modules will help guide you through the hardware configuration required to use them The AUX port supports a terminal for either configuring the decoder or for manual data entry The AUX port on the NEMA Type 1 decoder is configured as shown below and communicates over an RS 232 serial communication line It has a 25 pin D shell female connector Figure 4 7 shows terminals you can connect to the AUX port of the NEMA Type 1 decoder Figure 4 7 Connecting terminal to AUX port of NEMA Type 1 decoder Cy Cy Co Cy SCANNER A SCANNER B AUX HOST RS 232 RS 232 422 485 lt lt _ 7
194. ers for each match code string including non printable control characters Enter the characters as they will be transmitted to the host Do not include check digits if you disabled the Include Check Character parameter for the selected symbology The string accepts the question mark as a single character wild card A position containing a will match any single ASCII character in the same position of the decoded data Note The Primary and Extended Match Code tables interpret a question mark differently than do the Host Replacement rules The question mark functions as a generic wildcard when used in the primary match code table and as a metacharacter in the Host Message Replacement Rules See Chapter 10 Configuration Scanner Control Primary Match Table Discrete I O 7 15 Discrete I O Parameters These parameters define conditions that control the discrete outputs Each output is defined by four parameters e normal state of an output O opened or C closed e source of the event Scanner A or B e condition that activates an output e duration of pulsed output e send Host Message parameter The discrete outputs can be controlled locally via the configuration screens or remotely using host commands The discrete I O system can e indicate the success or failure of the decoder to read bar code data from a package indicate the results of a compare operation between decoded bar code data and match code data
195. essage START JOB but does not enable the keyboard TMOLOSTART J OB START JOB Message Text String START J OB Length of Text String 10 Keyboard Not Enabled 0 Command Code TM When the host sends this command to the decoder the text string displays on the AUX terminal at the beginning of the line in position Ol Messages that are longer than the size of the AUX terminal display truncate Configuration AUX Terminal Data Entry 13 11 If the TM command is sent with a string length of zero no message defined the decoder displays the Default Prompt Message instead The following TM command sends the message gt ENTER DATA to the AUX Terminal and enables the keyboard for one entry TMUIENTER DATA ENTER DATA Message Text String ENTER DATA Length of Text String 11 1 Enables Keyboard for Data Entry Command Code TM When the host sends this command to the decoder the following text string displays on the AUX terminal prompting you to enter data The message displays at the beginning of the line in position 01 If the TM command is sent without a message defined the decoder displays the Default Prompt Message instead Messages that are longer than the size of the AUX terminal display truncate When receiving the host or default prompt message the keyboard is enabled for one entry Type the data and press Enter ENTER DATA 123456 Enter After pressi
196. estart the system with function Restart System There is a second way to reset the decoder performance indicators and all counters to zero from the Select Operation menu select the Reset Status and Primary Counters function Press the C or c key Press Y to reset the decoder performance indicators and counters to zero Press N or Esc to cancel the operation This operation is identical to pressing Space on the Display Status and Counters screen The Restart System function allows you restart the decoder This operation reboots the decoder enables autoload functions and enables lotting and activates certain host communications parameters Refer to Chapter 12 To restart the decoder press the E or e key Press N or Esc to cancel the operation and return to the Select Operation menu Press Y to restart the decoder During a restart all configuration parameters are reset to the values last saved to storage memory and the Select Language screen is displayed Publication 2755 833 14 6 Display and System Configuration Select Language Save Configuration Publication 2755 833 The Select Language function allows you to access the Select Language screen Press the F or f key from the Select Operation menu SELECT LANGUAGE CHOIX DU LANGAGE WAEHLE SPRACHE 1 English 2 French 3 German 4 Italian 5 Spanish 1 Anglais 2 Francais 3 Allemand 4 Italien 5 Espagnol 1
197. et host communication parameters e define up to 8 primary and 128 extended match codes specify up to eight discrete outputs and the conditions that will activate each output e set display format for data on LCD display and or AUX port terminal e define operating parameters for AUX port ASCII terminal when used for manual data entry Configuration Screens The decoder has built in menus and screens for configuration and monitoring operations You access these menus by connecting one of several standard ASCII terminals or a computer emulating one of those terminals to the AUX port of the decoder The process of configuring the decoder at the AUX port is called AUX terminal configuration The configuration menus support five different languages English French German Italian and Spanish Host Commands The decoder also supports a set of host commands for configuring the decoder and monitoring operations Host commands are sent to the decoder from a PLC controller or computer and perform the same functions as the configuration software The HOST port accepts commands using the RS 232 and RS 422 interfaces and a variety of communication protocols as well as the RS 485 interface using Allen Bradley DH485 protocol Appendix F lists the protocol options for each interface The decoder can operate as a stand alone device or connected to a host device As a stand alone device the decoder uses output modules to control external dev
198. etacharacters to form expressions Parentheses must be used in pairs Examples AB The plus sign applies to the expression AB Strings that would match this expression include AB ABAB 123AB and AB123 Parentheses can also be used to identify strings for use in the Replace Entire String With field If a character string or expression is surrounded by parentheses in a search pattern then it can be later recalled in a replace pattern with the n metacharacter described elsewhere in this chapter Note Parentheses may be nested to form complex expressions Publication 2755 833 10 6 Configuration Host Message Replacement Rules Character Description and Use A vertical bar the shifted character on the keyboard instructs the rule to match an incoming string if the character or expression on the left or right of the vertical bar appears in the string Examples A B Matches A or B abc 123 Matches abc or 123 The backslash indicates that the following character which would normally be interpreted as a metacharacter should instead be interpreted as a literal ASCII character Note The backslash is used differently in the Replace Patterns See Table 10 E Example The period will be interpreted as a period rather than a single character wildcard Publication 2755 833 Configuration Host Message Replacement Rules 10 7 Table 10 E Replac
199. etect A package detect signal triggers decoding on and off The package detect is typically an external presence sensor or the trigger of a hand held laser scanner The package detect signals the arrival and departure of a package Internal Timer This mode uses the No Read Timer as a trigger source A set time interval triggers decoding on and off The No Read Timer determines the time interval Publication 2755 833 7 4 Configuration Scanner Control Primary Match Table Discrete I O Publication 2755 833 Figure 7 1 Internal timer trigger XY ON OFF X Y No Read Timer value in milliseconds Minimum value 10 msec Maximum value 9999 msec Resolution 5 msec A no read occurs if the timer expires before a valid package occurs The Internal Timer decode mode is useful during initial setup to simulate the package detect signal Note When Scanner B is operating independently from Scanner A its decode mode is always either Package Detect or Host No Read Timer Field Type Options Edit 10 through 9999 or 0 Specifies the length of time the decoder will try to decode a label when triggered by a host command or package detector The timer starts when the decoder is triggered If a valid package does not occur within the specified time Symbols Package setting is not satisfied a no read occurs The default of O disables the timer To set the timer enter a number between 10 and 9999 Select a value t
200. exchange of data between a host computer and the decoder A host computer can configure the decoder remotely control the decoder receive messages and data from the decoder and exchange messages with the AUX terminal The HOST port on the NEMA Type 1 decoder is configured as shown below and communicates over an RS 232 RS 422 or RS 485 communication line It has a 25 pin female D shell connector Figure 4 9 shows host devices you can connect to the HOST port of the NEMA Type 1 decoder Installing the Decoder 4 17 Figure 4 9 Connecting device to HOST port of NEMA Type 1 Cy Cy C SCANNER A SCANNER B decoder Supported Host Devices eS S e Allen Bradley PLC Controller via AUX HOST Cat No 1771 DB BASIC Module RS 232 RS 232 422 485 Cat No 1771 DA ASCII I O Module Cat No 2760 RB Flexible Interface Module with Cat No 2760 SFC1 SFC2 Protocol Cartridge e Any RS 232 or RS 422 ASCII Device Construct your own cable using pinouts in Appendix E Pin Abbreviation Function 1 Chassis Ground 2 RS 232 Transmit Data from decoder to host 3 RS 232 Receive Data from host 4 RS 232 Request to Send 5 CTS RS 232 Clear to Send 6 RS 232 Data Set Ready 7 SIG GND RS 232 Signal Common 9 SHLD RS 485 Shield Ground 12 485 TERM RS 485 Line Termination J umpers to 13 13 485 A TERM RS 485 Line Termination J umpers to 12 14 RS 422 B or RS 485 B Transmit Data from decoder to h
201. f the number of outputs configured for AutoLoad is greater than the symbols package setting the Autoload function will fill entries until the symbols package setting is satisfied See AutoLoad INPUT below for an explanation of how to load match code data into the table where the number of match codes is greater than the value of the Symbols Package parameter All entries configured for AutoLoad are filled NOTE If the Symbology parameter is set to anything other than Any then only symbols of the currently selected symbology will be AutoLoaded Publication 2755 833 7 20 Configuration Scanner Control Primary Match Table Discrete I O Publication 2755 833 If an invalid operation occurs decoder is unable to decode a symbol in a package it will wait for the next package For each match code entry the decoder if Symbology is Any the decoder changes the setting of the Symbology parameter to match the symbology of the first symbol read loads the match code string changes output condition to Match Entry If the bar code data contains the character the decoder displays in the match code table but records a single in the data Use the character to enter any non printable character For example M represents CTRL M or carriage return See Appendix I ATTENTION It is good practice to save your configuration once the required AutoLoad parameters have been set Doing so assures you wi
202. f the match table AutoLoad INPUT is useful in product verification applications where you need to load new match codes into the decoder regularly or when multiple packages must be used to fill the table A switch or push button can be used to enter new product label data in the match code table Output Duration Field Type Options 10 to 9999 0 Edit Specifies the length of time in milliseconds that an output is activated Enter a value between 10 and 9999 The default of 0 disables the timer Important The pulsed outputs will not operate unless you specify an output duration The LED indicator for an output lights only when the output is in its closed state Therefore the LED for a normally open output lights when the output is closed The LED for a normally closed output lights when the output is in its closed state and turns off when the output is opened ATTENTION Set output durations in multiples of 5 milliseconds Actual output will have a worst case precision of 0 to 5 milliseconds varying with the timing of the output Durations that are not set in multiples of 5 milliseconds will be rounded up to the nearest multiple of 5 and function within the same 0 to 5 millisecond precision For example a setting of 25 milliseconds will result in a duration of from 20 to 25 milliseconds A setting of 23 milliseconds will result in the same duration range Publication 2755 833 7 22 Configuration Scanner C
203. fields and selects next value In a select or select edit field pressing the asterisk will set the field to its default value An asterisk in an unopened edit text field will open the field and enter an asterisk in the first position When pressed in an edit text field that is already open the asterisk will behave like any other printable character Note Most fields may be set to their default value by pressing the Space key and then Enter Otherwise press an asterisk followed by Enter In open fields accepts the field selection or entry and closes the field You must press Return to close an open field before you can use the arrow keys to move to another field Moves the cursor to the next field if applied to a closed field This key is labeled 4 or Enter on some computers Cancels the selection change or edits before pressing Return and restores the field to its initial contents Introduction to AUX Terminal Configuration 5 9 Audible Beep The terminal beeps when you enter invalid data into an edit field for example entering a letter into a numeric field Some numeric fields have a range of minimum maximum values If you enter a value outside the range the terminal beeps Help Line The help line at the bottom of the screen displays keys that are active in the current mode of operation When first accessing a configuration screen this help line displays The help line indicates tha
204. for A Source Identifier for B Header String Field Delimiter Number of Fields in Message Host Message Format Send Symbology Send Package Count Send Bar Code Strings Send Decoder Performance End Message Default No Read String No Read Replacements Strings 1 16 Baud Rate Bits Character arity Host Protocol Device Address Host Communications ACK Character NAK Character Parameters marked with an asterisk Start Character Scanner A require a save and restart to take effect top Character Scanner A iil uo Start Character Scanner B Stop Character Scanner B Large Buffer Send Host Message Transmission Check Enable Keyboard Entry Confirm Entry AUX Data Format Aux Terminal Data Entry Rubout Character Echo Data to Terminal Size of Display Default Prompt Message i Publication 2755 833 European Union Directive Compliance Intended Use of Product Appendix K European Union Directive Compliance If this product is installed within the European Union or EEA regions and has the CE mark the following regulations apply EMC Directive This apparatus is tested to meet Council Directive 89 336 Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC e EN 50081 2 EMC Generic Emission Standard Part 2 Industrial Environment e EN 50082 2 EMC Generic Immunity Standard Part 2 Industrial Environment The product described in this manual is intended for use in an industrial environment Ac
205. ftware to set up scanner s define match B code strings and control discrete 1 0 Match Table Discrete 1 0 functions Configuration Explains how to use the configuration 8 Extended Match Table software to set up and use the decoders and Counters advanced extended match code capabilities Explains how to use the configuration 9 Configuration software to enable and format the display of Display Parameters various types of data on the AUX terminal or optional LCD screen a ia Explains how to use the configuration 10 a a software to further control decoder operations Replacement i and output with host message replacement rules Pare Explains how to use the configuration Configuration 11 software to format bar code data sent to the Host Message Format host SE Explains how to use the configuration 12 PEE o a lre eie software to configure HOST port communications 13 Configuration Explains how to use the AUX terminal for AUX Terminal Data Enty manual data entry and display functions i Explains how to use the configuration 14 oa m software to display data and counters and 9 perform a number of system level activities ASCII Defines ASCII commands you can send from 15 a host device to configure and control Host Commands decoder operations PCCC Defines PCCC commands you can send from 16 a host device to configure and control Host Commands decoder operations Publication 2755 833 17 Maintenance Provides information on troubleshootin
206. g 5 7 Electrical Recommendations 4 1 Electromagnetic Interference EMI 4 2 Enclosres type ratings 2 1 Event source of 7 16 Extended Match Code Table and AutoLoad 8 3 and check characters 8 6 and loading 8 7 and question mark 8 6 compared to Primary Match Table 8 1 count 8 6 counter status 8 2 lot 8 4 match entry 8 4 match pattern string 8 6 mode 8 3 number of entries allowed 8 1 output duration 8 9 purpose and use of 8 1 search pattern 8 6 source 8 5 status of counter set 8 3 symbology 8 5 use of percent sign in 8 3 wild card characters 8 6 F Factory Default Settings 5 12 J 1 Filter debounce 7 11 FNC1 Character 6 7 Fuses ordering replacment fuses 2 9 replacing I O module fuses 17 2 G Grounding Recommendations 4 2 Guard Bars Interleaved 2 of 5 6 4 H Header Message 11 5 Help Line edit mode 5 9 select mode 5 9 Host Command Trigger start stop scan characters 12 5 Host Commands 3 2 ASCII commands 15 1 PCCC commands 16 1 Host Communication Parameters 12 2 ACK character 12 4 baud rate 12 2 bits character 12 2 host protocol 12 3 NAK character 12 4 node device address 12 3 parity 12 2 send message to host 12 6 start scan character 12 5 stop scan character 12 5 transmission check 12 7 using large buffer 12 6 Host Decode Mode 7 9 Hos
207. g you are likely to pass your intended destination It is not necessary to assign extended match code values in sequence One could for example assign match patterns to entries 1 2 5 7 12 and 16 in set 1 nothing in set 2 and 33 through 35 in set 3 The details of each application will determine the strategy used in assigning or not assigning extended match code patterns Configuration Extended Match Table and Counters 8 3 Status of Counter Set Field Type Options Enabled Disabled Select This parameter activates or deactivates the counters within the particular set of extended match code values currently displayed The default value is Enabled which means that any extended match code table entry in the currently displayed set to which a match pattern has been assigned will be enabled Selecting Disabled turns off all entries in the currently displayed set Keep in mind that this parameter affects only the currently displayed set Use the Screen Status parameter described above to move among sets within the table Note that when moving from one screen to another the Set identifier changes to reflect the number of the set currently displayed The ability to turn individual sets of extended match code table entries on and off at will provides a potentially useful additional level of process control and flexibility Mode Field Type Options A Autoload M Match Entry D Disabled L Lot Sel
208. g and and Troubleshooting maintaining the decoder 18 Specifications Lists specifications of the decoder Appendices Glossary Index What You Need to Know European Union Directive Compliance Terminology Conventions Used Using this Manual 1 3 No special knowledge is required to read this manual or use the decoder However if using the decoder to communicate with a programmable controller or host device you should be familiar with communication devices standards RS 232 RS 422 RS 485 and terminology This manual defines commands a host device can send to the decoder and responses to those commands However the manual does not include programs which are required to generate the commands If this product is installed within the European Union or EEA regions and has the CE mark the following regulations apply EMC Directive This apparatus is tested to meet Council Directive 89 336 Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC using a technical construction file and the following standards in whole or in part e EN 50081 2 EMC Generic Emission Standard Part 2 Industrial Environment e EN 50082 2 EMC Generic Immunity Standard Part 2 Industrial Environment The product described in this manual is intended for use in an industrial environment This manual contains many terms that are used within the bar code industry and terms that are unique to the decoder Refer to the glossary at any time for definitions of
209. g roteeeebosececs Geese youre 6 9 CANS ti tPuomae sehen edaslavedatd aesdde skews s 6 9 EAN 8 Supplements ic sscesedantedgsd aaea adic eae alas 6 9 EAN ks ee ee pee eee ee yer ee ee ee ee ere cee 6 10 EAN 13 Supplements 5 lt 0 seaecdmste cacao eon a datas 6 10 Enable Pharma Code Symbology Pharma Code Decoders Only 6 10 Publication 2755 833 toc iv Table of Contents Configuration Scanner Control Primary Match Table Discrete I O Configuration Extended Match Table and Counters Publication 2755 833 Quiet Zone Ratio All Decoders ccc eee eee Space Tolerance Pharma Code Decoders Only Bar Tolerance Pharma Code Decoders Only Minimum Number of Bars Pharma Code Decoders Only Decode Direction A or B Pharma Code Decoders Only Wide to Narrow Bar Ratio Pharma Code Decoders Only Code Verification List Pharma Code Decoders Only Chapter 7 Scanner Control Primary Match Code Table Discrete I O Scanner A Control Parameters 0c c cece eee Laser Light Scanners A and B cc ceee ee neees Decode Mode aana No Read Timer naaa Inter Scan Timer naaa Capture COUNE oiea iia gaia pa aa Sowa T Be wees SMOG SCAN acy rere rier E pe E E Symbols Package oaan a Match Complete nnna aaa Scanner B Control Parameters oana aaa Laser Light o ceee a aii diaa ak eaa ae aaa i dlei a DecogeMOde fungus eanekee teva ee ee eee ab se Ee Tagger T
210. g terminals to the AUX port of the NEMA Type 1 or Type 4 decoder Lear Siegler ADM 3E DEC VT100 1784 T45 1771 T1 T2 T3 Function GND Chassis Ground Transmit Data carries data from terminal to decoder input to decoder Receive Data carries data from decoder to terminal Output from de coder SIG GND Signal Ground 16 17 25 Pin oO ovo gt O I THA AUX Terminal AUX Terminal Selector Determines whether the AUX terminal is used Selector for configuration or manual data entry To use the AUX terminal for manual data entry tie pin 15 to 16 To use the AUX terminal for configu ration leave pins 15 and 16 open UX Terminal Connect to pin 15 to use the AUX terminal for manual data entry func elector tions When connected to 15 you cannot access the configuration menus IN8 Auto Load Input You can connect a normally opened N 0 contact IN8 between pins 17 and 25 Close the contacts to activate the AutoLoad Function See Chapter 6 and Appendix H Abb Function GND Chassis Ground Transmit Data carries data from terminal to decoder Input to decoder Poo Receive Data carries data from decoder to terminal Output from decod er SIG GND Signal Ground AUX Terminal AUX Terminal Selector Determines whether the AUX terminal is used Selector for configuration or manual data entry To use the AUX terminal for manual data entry tie pin G to H To use the AUX terminal for configura
211. g the new configuration parameters Refer to Appendix B for factory default settings Important Host port communication parameters are not changed to default values with this command None 98 lt end gt 98 Indicates the command was received and the decoder is resetting The reset takes approximately 5 seconds lt end gt end of message control code Publication 2755 833 15 76 ASCII Host Commands RE Reset Decoder Command Format RE Function Resets decoder Recalls the configuration from storage memory and restarts the decoder Parameters None Response 97 lt end gt 97 Indicates the command was received and the decoder is resetting The reset takes approximately 5 seconds lt end gt end of message code ID Version of Software Command Format ID Function Read the version of decoder software presently running Parameters None Response aa aa lt end gt 00 lt end gt aa aa Software revision number 00 Complete and successful response code lt end gt end of message control code Publication 2755 833 ASCII Host Commands 15 77 DM Configure Bar Code Data Mask Command Format DM Function Obsolete command Formerly used to define a data mask to return and or suppress selected characters in each field sent to the host Host Message Replacement Rules replace this function Response 50 rr lt end gt 50 Unknown Command response code lt end gt end of mess
212. ge displays on the LCD at the beginning of the line in position 01 The message remains on the display until it is overwritten by another message or data Remember the LCD can only display 20 or 40 characters depending on whether scrolling is enabled Messages that are longer than 20 or 40 characters will be truncated If the PCCC 900H command is sent without a message defined the decoder displays the Default Prompt Message instead How Scrolling Affects the Display of Host Messages Scrolling affects the placement of host messages and default prompt messages on the LCD Display When scrolling is disabled each new message overwrites the last message When scrolling is enabled new messages display on line 2 scrolling the previous message up to line 1 The following example shows how the LCD handles the host messages START JOB and END JOB when scrolling is disabled and enabled Scrolling Disabled Default Scrolling Enabled 1 Line x 40 Character Display 2 Line x 20 Character Display 1 START JOB Host message displays 21 Host message displays on line 2 START JOB u host message over END JOB 20 Host message scrolls up to line 1 START JOB writes previous host message 21 40 New host message displays on line 2 END JOB Publication 2755 833 9 8 Publication 2755 833 D POSITION a D 15 DECODER PERFORMANCE D PRIMARY COUNTERS 7 211 None lt Displays Primary Counter 1 a
213. h Code Table Entry 15 33 MW Write Primary Match Code Table Entry 15 34 CM Clear Primary Output Counters 00005 15 35 CO Clear All Primary Output Counters 15 36 CA Clear Extended Match Counters 004 15 36 SE Set Extended Match Counters 000000 15 37 RC Read Extended Match Counters 0005 15 38 SM Set Extended Match Data cece eee 15 39 RP Read All Extended Match Data ccc cece 15 41 RA Read All Extended Counters 0 0c eee 15 43 RA Read All Extended Counters continued 15 44 CS Disable Extended Match CodeSet 0 15 45 RS Read Extended Match SetStatus eee 15 46 DF Enable Data Display on AUX TerminalandLCD 15 47 DP Configure Data Display Positions for AUX TerminalandLCD 15 48 SD Enable LCD Scrolling y2cccasetcentas shudeas ad oe 15 49 SR Set Search and Replace Rule for Host Message Fields 15 50 SF Set No Read Replacement Strings aaa 15 52 HC Configure Host Communications saaa aaa 15 53 HB Configure Scanner B Start amp Stop CharactersA 15 55 MF Configure Host Message Format 005 15 56 HF Setthe Number of Fields inHostMessage 15 58 IX Configure AUX Terminal Source Identifier 15 59 IM Configure Scanner A Source Identifier 15 60 IB Configure Scanner B Sourc
214. h the byte size of the data and the default value To read or examine one or more parameters send the read command with the appropriate starting address and byte size referenced in Appendix A Read Configuration Data High Byte Low Byte MSB LSB STS 00H CMD 01H Configuration Data Address 300H to 5FFH O Ff N O The reply returns the configuration data at the specified address Reply to Read Configuration Data High Byte Low Byte MSB LSB STS 00H CMD Reply 41H a wo A N O Configuration Data You can read more than one parameter however the read operation must specify an address within the valid address range and start on a parameter boundary If you try to read outside a valid address range the reply returns with a status of 10H invalid address The unprotected write command 08H performs these decoder functions e Modifies or writes over decoder configuration data e Executes a decoder function e Sends a repeat read command e Sends a message to the AUX port terminal and LCD Display e Holds a discrete output on or off Each command modifies or overwrites data at a specific address in decoder memory or executes a specific decoder function The following sections define each of the write commands Important If the configuration date is a text string you must send the length of the string as the first byte of the string PCCC Host Commands 16 9 Modify Configuration Data Appendix A list
215. hat allows the decoder enough time to read an entire package or a no read will occur Note When the decode mode is set to internal timer the no read timer functions as a trigger source The trigger remains on until the no read timer expires See Internal Timer under Decode Mode ATTENTION Set output durations in multiples of 5 milliseconds Actual output will have a worst case precision of 0 to 5 milliseconds varying with the timing of the output Durations that are not set in multiples of 5 milliseconds will be rounded up to the nearest multiple of 5 and function within the same 0 to 5 millisecond precision For example a setting of 25 milliseconds will result in a duration of from 20 to 25 milliseconds A setting of 23 milliseconds will result in the same duration range Configuration Scanner Control Primary Match Table Discrete I O 7 5 Inter Scan Timer Field Type Options Edit 10 through 9999 or 0 Disables decoding for a set time interval after a valid read The default is 0 which disables the timer The Jnter Scan Timer is valid in both continuous and triggered modes of operations You can use the nter Scan Timer to e provide a delay between decodes to enable multiple labels that are not necessarily unique to be read within the same package e enable multiple decodes of the same label for verification purposes The Inter Scan Timer accepts a value between 10 and 9999 Important To ensure that packag
216. hat support an RS 232 ASCII port Publication 2755 833 Overview of Decoder Operations Figure 3 1 PLC Controller Configurations Point to P oint Link using PLC 5 family processor Point to P oint Link using Flexible Interface Module with serial ASCII port RS 232 RS 422 or DH485 point to point Flexible Interface Module witi 2760 SFC1 or SFC2 1771 1 01 0 1771 1 01 0 Rack Protocol Cartridge Rack PLC Processor H PLC Processor 2755 DD1A 4A 2755 DD1A 4A 2755 DD1A 4A 2755 DD1A 4A Decoder Decoder Decoder Decoder Multi drop Link using Flexible Interface Module and DH485 Data Link Flexible Interface Module with 2760 SFC2 Protocol Cartridge 1771 1 01 0 Rack 2755 CY 1 with NEMA Type 4 device or 2760 A485 connectors with NEMA Type 1 device PLC Processor 2755 DD1A 4A 2755 DD1A 4A 2755 DD1A 4A 2755 DD1A 4A 2755 DD1A 4A 2755 DD1A 4A Decoder Decoder Decoder Decoder Decoder Decoder 31 2 1 1 2 31 see ae 2755 DD1A 4A _ 2755 DD1A 4A 2755 DD1A 4A Decoder Decoder Decoder SLC 5 03 Controller Multidrop l 2 31 Using DH485 Datalink O P
217. he opportunity for entering data for additional no reads that occurred during manual data entry will be lost In other words if you can enter data manually more quickly than no reads occur then you will lose no data If two no reads occur before you have completed entering data for the first then you will have no opportunity to enter data for the second no read in the sequence Publication 2755 833 13 10 Configuration AUX Terminal Data Entry Decoder Operations Host Recieves Package AUX Terminal Screen Package 1 m Sends Default Prompt Message to AUX Terminal no read _no read 1 i Keyboard enabled for package 1 no read Enter Carton Data 12 Package 2 Data entry started no read no read 2 Completed after package 2 arrives The opportunity to enter data for the Package 2 no read is lost 12345 2 Using ASCII and PCCC Commands Publication 2755 833 Important To process a no read and guarantee that the package count of the manually entered data corresponds to the scanned data prevent future triggers from occurring You can configure a discrete output for the no read condition or a host message containing no read to prevent subsequent packages from being processed ASCII Commands The Display Text Message TM command allows you to send a message to the AUX terminal and optionally enable the AUX terminal keyboard for one entry The following TM command sends the m
218. ications is critical No read messages are always sent at the end of the trigger Publication 2755 833 Chapter Objectives Power Requirements Electrical Recommendations Chapter 2l Installing the Decoder This chapter presents recommendations and instructions on how to install and connect equipment to the NEMA Type 1 and Type 4 Single and Dual Head Bar Code Decoders The information is organized by task and can serve as a useful quick start tutorial to guide you through system installation and setup Topics covered include e meeting electrical and grounding requirements e installing alternate language LED indicator labels e mounting dimensions e connecting power cord setting communication parameters e selecting language e selecting CRT type e selecting operations to perform e connecting and configuring scanners e setting symbology parameters e customizing setup e connecting AUX terminal e connecting host device e installing and wiring optional I O modules Before Installation e verify that incoming power source is 100 to 240 volts AC nominal 50 to 60 Hz protect power source with an external fuse or circuit breaker rated at no more than 15 amps e connect decoder to its own branch circuit when possible to reduce electrical noise Install equipment using guidelines in publication NFPA 70E Electrical Safety Requirements for Employee Workplaces In addition e do not use signal wiring and powe
219. ices The decoder sends discrete output signals to external control equipment based on the results of decoded data The discrete outputs can be controlled remotely by host commands or manually via the configuration screens Chapter 7 provides information on how to control the discrete I O Appendixes G and H show various examples of input and output module connections Overview of Decoder Operations 3 3 Host Operation The decoder can also communicate directly with a host computer or PLC in a control or data collection application The decoder communicates with and transmits bar code data to a host computer or PLC controller via the HOST port of the decoder Programmable Logic Controllers PLC The decoder connects to an Allen Bradley PLC Controller in the following ways see Figure 3 1 1 Flexible Interface Module Catalog No 2760 RB which supports a point to Point link using the RS 232 RS 422 or DH485 interface to the HOST port multi drop link using the DH485 interface of the HOST port and the Flexible Interface Module Each port of the Module operates as a separate network supporting up to 31 decoders Use the Catalog No 2760 SFC2 protocol cartridge with the Flexible Interface Module and configure the decoder for DH485 mode 2 Catalog No 1771 DB BASIC Module or 1771 DA ASCII I O Module connects decoder directly to a PLC 3 Programmable logic controllers from the Allen Bradley PLC 5 family of products t
220. id metacharacters appears in the table below Each appears with a general explanation of its function and syntax More detailed examples of their use appear at the end of this chapter Note The host replacement rules interpret a question mark differently than does the match code table As a metacharacter used with the host replacement rules a question mark is not interpreted as a single character wild card See Table 10 B and 10 C later in this chapter Note There are two distinct sets of metacharacters used by the host message replacement rule software One set applies only to search patterns and the other only to replacement strings If the decoder encounters a search pattern metacharacter in a replacement message it will interpret it as a standard ASCII character Conversely if the decoder detects a replacement string metacharacter in a search pattern it will interpret it as a standard ASCII character For example a in a replacement string will be treated as normal text and amp in a search pattern will be treated as normal text Use the characters described in the following tables to help establish the exact search patterns that meet your needs Proceed carefully however While the individual metacharacters perform easily understood actions combining and nesting them will quickly create extremely complex logical expressions Be sure to test your expressions thoroughly in the lower half of the screen to make certain yo
221. ide SCANNER Group LD4 LD8 LD4 LD8 NEMA TYPE 1 Group Ill iai Group IV TYPE 4 DECODER DECODER Group V L4 L5 Group VII G3 G6 LD1 LD2 Decoder Scanner Combination l NEMA 1 to LD4 LD8 Optional extension cable there is a 10 ft 3 05 m cable D ferS m eine C TDI hard wired to the scanner 40 ft 12 19 m 2755 C40D1 a Group Il NEMA Group VI Group Description Length Catalog No Il NEMA 4to LD4 LD84 Optional extension cable there is a 10 ft 3 05 m cable 1st 4 15 m 2755 c15D4 hard wired to the scanner 0 ft 12 19 m 2755 C40D4 10 ft 3 05 m 2755 CL10 25 ft 7 62m 2755 CL25 Ill NEMA1toL7 L9 Scanner Cable 40 ft 12 19 m 2755 CL40 50 ft 15 24m 2755 CL50 10 ft 3 05m 2755 CN10 25 ft 7 62m 2755 CN25 IV NEMA 4toL7 L9 Scanner Cable 40 ft 12 19 m 2755 CN40 50 ft 15 24m 2755 CN50 10 ft 3 2755 CK10 V NEMA 1toL4 L5 Scanner Cable 25 ft 7 62 m 2755 CK25 10 ft 3 2755 CM10 Vi NEMA 4toL4 L5 Scanner Cable 25 ft 7 62m 2755 CM25 8 ft 2 4 m 2755 CG08 Hand Held Scanner Cable Coiled NEMA 1 to G3 G6 15 ft 4 6 m 2755 CG15 0 ft 4 6 m Hand Held Scanner Cable Straight 20 ft 6 1 m 2755 CG20 1 83 m Vil NEMA 1to LD1 LD2 oe Cable Straight with 9 pin connectors on each 6 ft 1 83 m 2755 CD06 ft Adapter that plugs directly into the scanner port of a NEMA ae a riety av 1 decoder and provides the circuitr
222. ide Bar Space A lt gt B aeai i dircctionte Clear Space Width an direction st Bar Width Wide j p sc ection is Ist Bar Width Wide Bar Clear Space Width If direction is B SCA ECHAN 1st Bar Width Narrow Bar The decoder uses the quiet zone to determine the necessary clear space on both sides of the syne A symbol not preceded by an adequate quiet zone is ignored The quiet zone after the bars and spaces of a symbol indicates the end of data If you specify a quiet zone ratio that is too small the decoder may interpret a space within the symbol as the end of the symbol resulting in no reads or misreads A general rule to use is Maximum Space Width in Symbol Width of the Smallest Quiet Zone Minimum Narrow Bar Width lt QuietZone Ratio lt Maximum Wide Bar Width Ifthe Quiet Zone is found to be inadequate the decoder will examine the symbol further to attempt a We recommend however that all labels be printed within specified limits Publication 2755 833 6 12 Configuration Symbology Publication 2755 833 A typical quiet zone value for the Pharma Code symbology is 5 Space Tolerance Pharma Code Decoders Only Field Type Options 5 through 40 15 Ignore Edit Defines the percent difference in width between the narrowest and widest space elements of the Pharma Code symbol Space tolerance is expressed mathematically as Widest Space Narrowest Space leer F x
223. imary Counters screen Decoder performance is a measure of the percentage of good reads compared to the total number of read attempts The manual you received with your scanner will instruct you on the proper implementation of pitch tilt and skew When properly scanning a good quality label your decoder performance should be at or only slightly below 100 percent To get to the Status and Primary Counters screen press ESC twice The first ESC brings up the Command Line NEXT PAGE THIS PAGE RECALL SAVE DEFAULT The second ESC brings up the Prompt Line asking if you want to save your changes to EEPROM SAVE CONFIGURATION TO EEPROM Confirm CY N Note EEPROM is a form of retentive memory that will retain your settings even if power to the decoder is lost Press Y to approve the save When your are finished you will be at the Select Operation menu Press B to open the Status and Primary Counters screen 2755 DD1P DD4P Bar Code Decoder Copyright 1992 Allen Bradley Company Inc CONFIGURATION 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Symbo logy Scanner Control Primary Match Table Discrete 1 0 Extended Match Table and Counters Aux and LCD Display Format Host Message Replacement Rules Host Message Format Host Communications Aux Terminal Data Entry Display System A B Publication 2755 833 Bar Code Strings C Reset Status and Primary Counters Status and Primary Counters D Reset Extended Match Count
224. ined RS 232 RTS CTS ASC RS232 RTS CTS 2 Bulletin 2760 Modem Controls RS 232 RTS CTS ACK NAK ASC RS232 RTS CTS 2 Bulletin 2760 Modem Controls ACK Character Defined NAK Character Defined RS 422 one ASC RS422 RS 422 ACK NAK ASC RS422 ACK Character Defined NAK Character Defined RS ROWROFF SS E a E RS422 XON XOFF ACK Character Defined RS 422 XON XOFF ACK NAK ASC NAK Character Defined RS 485 DH485 Local Area Network DH485 Local Area Network PCCC with Write Replies RS485 PCCC 1 LSAP 128 or 1 RS 485 DH485 Local Area Network DH485 Local Area Network PCCC without Write Replies RS485 PCCC 2 LSAP 128 or 1 RS 485 DH485 Local Area Network DH485 Local Area Network ASCII with Responses RS485 ASCII 1 LSAP 128 or 1 RS 485 DH485 Local Area Network DH485 Local Area Network ASCII without Responses RS485 ASCIl 1 LSAP 128 or 1 Publication 2755 833 Appendix G Output Module Applications Figures G 1 through G 3 show typical output module applications Outputs are open when power is first applied to the decoder during initial diagnostics and again when the decoder is powered off DC Output Module Application Figure G 1 illustrates a typical DC output module application When using high impedance loads you may have to add an additional resistor R in parallel with the load Select a value for R that maintains a minimum current of 10mA through the output module in the closed state
225. ing output counter increments each time a match entry occurs In the following example Output 1 normally open contact will activate close for 100 milliseconds if decoded data matches 123456 MATCH CODE TABLE DISCRETE 1 0 Disabled l 1 Code 39 123456 0 AiB Match Entry 100 Match Complete Activates the specified output when bar code data from a valid package matches the number of entries in the primary match code table as set by the Match Complete parameter The match complete condition is used to verify that multiple symbols with different information appear on the same package Read Package Activates the specified output when bar code data results in a valid package The read package condition is used to verify the presence of a good label The corresponding output counter increments once for each package read No Read Package Activates the specified output when a no read occurs for the last processed package The no read condition is used to detect missing or damaged labels A no read occurs when end of trigger occurs without a valid package The corresponding output counter increments once for each package not read NOTE The no read condition does not exist in continuous mode Publication 2755 833 7 18 Configuration Scanner Control Primary Match Table Discrete I O Read and No Match Activates the specified output when a valid read occurs but the bar code data
226. input or output devices or package detect do not attach those devices at this time Figure 4 5 shows the scanners you can connect to Scanner Port A and B of the NEMA Type 1 decoder and the cables available for each scanner Figure 4 6 shows the scanners you can connect to Scanner Port A and B of the NEMA Type 4 decoder and the cables available for each scanner Each shows the optional package detectors connected to each scanner Refer to the appropriate manuals for scanner mounting instructions Publication 2755 833 4 12 Installing the Decoder Figure 4 5 Connecting scanners to NEMA Type 1 decoder SCANNER A SCANNER B AUX HOST RS 232 RS 232 422 485 CABLES CABLES 2755 CL10 2755 CL10 2755 CL25 2755 CL25 2755 CL40 2755 CL40 2755 CL50 2755 CL50 2755 L7 L9 i 2755 L7 L9 Scanner sag Peed Scanner i JSS bane i i 2755 NP3NPS i OR Package Detector Package Detector OR Cables Cables 2755 CK10 2755 CK10 2755 CK25 2755 CK25 2755 L4 L5 5 2755 L4 L5 Scanner H 7 Ta Scanner i 2755 NP1 NP4 i 1 2755 NP1 NP4 OR Package Detector 1 Package Detector OR boe a ee a a Optional Extension Cables 2755 C15D1 j 2755 C40D1 2755 LD4 LD8 Scanner 229 See Photoswitch oR Catalog 2755 G3 G6 i Hand Held Laser Scanner Aer Cables 2755 CG08 2755 CG15 2755 CG20
227. install in the two output module field wiring holes in the bottom of the enclosure Each hole size is 7 g inch and accepts 1 inch conduit Conduit Connections ATTENTION To guard against enclosure damage align the conduit so as to prevent unnecessary stress on the enclosure walls You can connect conduit to the conduit connector hub before or after the conduit connector is secured into the prepared hole using the connector locknut Tighten connector locknut securely to provide bonding to equipment enclosure ATTENTION To complete the bonding between grounding bushings and the enclosure bonding must be provided in accordance with all applicable codes Chapter Objectives Connect and Set Up AUX Terminal AUX Terminal Selector Chapter 5 Introduction to AUX Terminal Configuration This chapter describes the basic concepts you ll need to understand before attempting to use the built in configuration menus and screens of the Dual Head Bar Code Decoders to e select bar code symbology and supplements e configure scanner operations reset decoder status and counters e configure AUX port terminal and LCD display e display bar code values e configure host communications and host message format e restart decoder To use the built in configuration menus and screens you must first connect a terminal to the RS 232 AUX port of the decoder Supported terminals include e Allen Bradley Industrial Terminal Catalog N
228. is metacharacter is used in a search string where the character may not appear at all or may appear once The plus sign instructs the rule to match one or more occurrences of what precedes it This metacharacter is used in a search string where the character will be present but you are unsure how many times it appears The asterisk instructs the rule to match none or more occurrences of what precedes it This metacharacter is used in a search string in cases where the character may not appear or may appear one or more times Table 10 D Search patter metacharacters logical operators and other special functions Character Description and Use Square brackets instructs the rule to match an incoming string if any character enclosed within the brackets appears in the string A range of values can be represented within the brackets by separating the first and last characters in the range by a hyphen Square brackets must be used in pairs Note The circumflex can be used as the first character within the Square brackets to reverse the sense of the expression Examples ABC Matches A B or C L P Matches L M N O or P 0 9 Matches O 1 2 3 4 S T 7 8 or 9 A Z Matches any character that is not upper case alphabetic Parentheses can be used in two different ways They can be used in search patterns to group characters and m
229. is not specified in catalog number The decoder is not UL listed CSA approved when used with European Harmonized power cords To order a replacement power cord for the NEMA Type 1 decoder use the following replacement part numbers Replacement Part No 77121 801 01 Power Cord Description noe IEC 320 terminated 6 ft three prong U S style power cord 6 ft 1 83 m cee IEC 320 three wire U S Color Code unterminated power cord 6 ft 1 83 m 77121 801 03 240 VAC IEC 320 three wire European Harmonized unterminated power cord 2 5 m 8 ft 2 in The decoder is not UL listed CSA approved when used with European Harmonized power cords 77121 801 02 Publication 2755 833 2 8 Decoder Features Decoder Options Options available when ordering the NEMA Type 4 decoder are NEMA Type 4 Decoders listed inside the decoder s cover Note that on actual production labels e the base catalog number will appear in the first field following the words Cat No e the series letter will appear in the field following Ser the revision letter will appear in the field following Rev a A CAT NO SER REV I POWER CORD 1 0 l 0 NONE USER MANUAL gy y0 BOARD isid B AkD DISPLAY MODULE 3 NEMA 4 European B2 1 0 BOARD 2 CONN amp CABLES R1 DISPLAY BLANK NEMA4 US BAN OLENGLICN 1 D C IN 2 D C OUT B7 1 0 BOARD 2 CONN amp CABLES BLANK NONE
230. is on the inside the cover between the LED board and cover Remove the insert by pulling on the gray tab Slide the desired label into position Installing the Decoder 4 3 Figure 4 1 View of the front cover from inside O 0 LCD Display optional O O 2 LED Board 2 Pull on tab to remove LED Label insert Mounting the Decoder Figure 4 2 shows nominal mounting dimensions in inches and cm for the NEMA Type 1 and Type 4 decoders The horizontal mounting orientation is shown here Figure 4 2 Mounting dimensions for reference only S lt h gt 8 Q h a gt 2 ALLEN BRADLEY Ty 10 25 in 1 26 0 cm 9 5 in 24 1 cm 8 0 in 20 3 cm Zp y J SAM y LJ 10 5 in 26 7 cm A Mounting 12 0 in lt 30 5 cm gt Holes Allow clearance of 6 inches above and below decoder for cables You can mount the decoder horizontally or vertically When mounting allow clearance e at hinged side of cover for cover to swing open e of 6 inches 152 mm above the decoder to connect cables to the scanner ports and communication ports Publication 2755 833 4 4 Installing the Decoder Installing Power Cord e of 6 inches 152 mm below the decoder to wire I O modules and to access the power entry power switch To mount the decoder we recommend that you use four 4 inch M6 hex head capscre
231. it is in manual data entry mode See Chapter 13 for information on manual data entry Message Format Field Type Options Unformatted Select Host Format Controls the format of the bar code data that is displayed The default is Unformatted which means the bar code data is displayed unformatted Select Host Format to display scanned data in the host message format set by the parameters on the Host Message Format configuration screen Note Manually entered data cannot be sent to the LCD For example assume the scanned bar code data is 123456 If the data is displayed unformatted it is sent as 123456 If the data is displayed in the host format using predefined configuration parameters it is sent as LD8 AScanner A Data 01123456 000013CRLF E Field Delimiter Code 39 Bar Code Label Data Field Delimiters Package Count End Message Character See the Host Message Format screen configuration instructions in Chapter 11 for details on the configuration parameters that control the host message format Note The Aux Terminal internal selector described in Chapter 13 must be installed in the data entry position to send host formatted data to the Aux Port Message 1 displays in positions 1 40 Message 2 overwrites message 1 Message 3 overwrites message 2 Scrolling Disabled Default 1 Line x 40 Character Display 1 IBAR CODE DATA 000001 1 000000 Symbo
232. l the first time the decoder is started From then on operation is determined at restart by the contents of storage memory Other options include e RS232 XON XOFF uses XON XOFF flow control e RS232 CTS RTS 1 uses half duplex RTS CTS and DTR modem control lines to control the flow of data from the decoder to the host e RS232 CTS RTS 2 uses RTS CTS and DTR modem control lines for bidirectional full duplex flow control between the decoder and the 2760 RA RB module when the module has modem control enabled e RS422 no flow control uses no flow control e RS422 XON XOFF uses XON XOFF flow control e DH485 PCCC 1 uses PCCC commands with write replies e DH485 PCCC 2 uses PCCC commands without write replies e DH485 ASCI 1 uses ASCII commands with responses e DH485 ASCI 2 uses ASCII commands without responses Device Address Field Type Options 00 through 31 01 Edit Numeric Specifies the node address of the decoder if operating as a node on an RS 485 network Each node on the network must have a unique node address from 00 to 31 The default device address for the decoder is O the first time the decoder is started From then on operation is determined at restart by the contents of storage memory Publication 2755 833 12 4 Configuration Host Communications Publication 2755 833 ACK Character Field Type Options 0 through 255 Edit ASCII 255 None Defines an Acknowledge ACK character for
233. laser light source Dual head versions only The decoder is in triggered mode and scanning has been triggered for Scanner A or B Dual head versions only A valid read occurs from Scanner B Dual head versions only Input output module in position 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 or 8 is active The LED will light even if the scanner is disconnected or the Laser On switch for the scanner is in the OFF position Figure 2 2 NEMA Type 4 Decoder Catalog No 2755 DD4A SCANNER B PortAUX Port HOST Port SCANNER A DD Versions Onl 232 RS 232 422 485 ALLEN BRADLEY BAR CODE DECODER POWER LASER ON A LASER ON B t DISCRETE 0 _ CPU ACTIVE TRIGGERACTIVEA TRIGGER ACTIVEB 1234567 8 COMMUNICATION VALIDREADA VALID READ B Holes for Conduit or Optional Output Module Connectors ON OFF NEMA Type 4 shown installed on left and plugged on right Toggle Switch Power Connector Publication 2755 833 2 4 Decoder Features LCD Display AUX Port Publication 2755 833 The decoders support an optional 2 line x 20 character per line alphanumeric LCD Display for viewing e bar code data output counter values e decoder performance values The format of the display data is under user control via the configuration screens or host commands The LCD Display can be factory installed or ordered as a separate component for customer installation The AUX port communicates with a standard ASCII terminal using the RS 232 in
234. leaved 2 of 5 Field Type Options No Yes Select Enables disables decoding of Interleaved 2 of 5 bar code labels The default of No disables decoding of this symbology Select Yes to enable decoding Interleaved 2 of 5 Specific Lengths Field Type Options Even numbers Edit Numeric 5 through 64 0 Sets length checking for Interleaved 2 of 5 bar code labels The default is 0 which means the decoder does not check lengths You can specify up to 8 code lengths maximum of 64 characters Only even numbers 2 64 are allowed The code length includes the check character but not the start and stop characters If you specify a code length other than 0 the decoder will only decode labels with the number of characters specified Publication 2755 833 6 4 Configuration Symbology Publication 2755 833 We recommend that you enter specific lengths for Interleaved 2 of 5 labels Otherwise a partial scan of symbols could result in a valid shorter read The decoder will ignore 2 character Interleaved 2 of 5 labels unless you enter a specific length of 2 Interleaved 2 of 5 Check Character Field Type Options No Yes Select Controls whether the decoder is required to compute and verify a code check character for Interleaved 2 of 5 bar codes The code check character ensures that the data is read correctly The default is No which means the decoder treats all decoded characters as data The In
235. lected output counter Parameters n counter through 8 Response mmmmmm lt end gt rr lt end gt mmmmmm output counter count Maximum value of 999999 lt end gt end of message code rr response code lt end gt end of message code Example Command MC3 Parameters 3 read output counter 3 Response 000121LF OOLF 000121 Counter activated 121 times since last restart or reset LF end of message code for Line Feed 00 command complete response code LF end of message code for Line Feed Publication 2755 833 ASCII Host Commands 15 73 PC Clear Package Counter Command Format PC Function Clears the package counter to 0 Parameters None Response rr lt end gt rr response code lt end gt end of message control code Example Command PC Response 00 lt CR gt 00 command complete response code CR end of message control code NC Clear Symbols Not Read Counter Command Format NC Function Clears the no read counter to 0 Parameters None Response rr lt end gt rr response code lt end gt end of message control code Example Command NC Response 00CR 0 command complete response code CR end of message control code for Carriage Return Publication 2755 833 15 74 ASCII Host Commands RN Save Configuration to Storage Memory and Restart Command Format RN Function Parameters Response Saves current configuration in to storage memory
236. lign to the left or right edge of the field The default is Right As described above fill characters will be applied before the text pushing the text to the far right in right justified fields and after the text pushing the text to the far left in left justified fields Fill Character Field Type Options Any ASCII Character 0 255 0 None Edit ASCII Specifies a character to insert in the field when its length is less than the minimum field length selected above For example if the result of a successful replacement is the ABCD with a minimum field length of nine left alignment and a fill character of ASCII 35 the resulting field would look like ABCD Appendix I contains a complete chart of ASCII characters and their values Host Message Field Number Field Type Options 1 through 16 Edit Numeric All Specifies to which of the 16 available field numbers the currently displayed rule applies The default value is A Other allowable values include the numbers 1 through 16 Since rule processing applies to the rules in numerical order 1 through 16 once a field is satisfied by a rule no other rule with the same host message field number will be processed Note Using a combination of All in the symbol number field and All in the host message field number field within a rule creates a special situation in which the decoder will attempt to match the rule using only those symbols that ha
237. line at the bottom of the screen the Host Message Replacement Rules configuration screen is made up of three sections SOURCE SYMBOLOGY SYMBOL NUMBER FIND STRING CONTAINING REPLACE ENTIRE STRING WITH MINIMUM FIELD LENGTH ALIGNMENT FILL CHARACTER HOST MESSAGE FIELD NUMBER 5 vonna bwne t a BAR CODE STRING E E match match match match match match Configuration Host Message Replacement Rules 10 3 e Rule status located on the far left side of the screen Each number represents an available host message replacement rule Currently enabled rules are marked with an asterisk Rules are enabled by assigning a value to the Find String Containing field Host message replacement rule definition located in the upper half of the screen This section displays the current search rule criteria which include Source Symbology Symbol Number and Find String Containing and the replacement string to send to the host when matches are found The rule definition also includes parameters to fix the length of the field the character used to fill the field and the alignment of the string within the field e Example testing in the lower portion of the screen This section provides a worksheet where you can insert sample bar code strings to test the performance of your rules This feature allows you to conveniently debug your replacement rule expressions for structural and logical errors before
238. ll retain key AutoLoad parameters even after lengthy periods without power AutoLoad INPUT Configures discrete input output 8 for AutoLoad INPUT This function requires an input module in position 8 of the I O Module Board or connection of the appropriate pins on the AUX port Appendix H shows how to wire the input module in I O location 8 to a normally open contact Important AutoLoad INPUT requires that you configure one or more of the other outputs 1 7 for AutoLoad You can restore the AutoLoad condition to outputs configured and saved for Autoload by applying the appropriate input voltage to module 8 Refer to Chapter 4 for more information The AutoLoad INPUT condition serves two functions 1 Activates AutoLoad Activates the AutoLoad function without restarting the system via the Select Operation menu or host command Refer to the examples for more information Configuration Scanner Control Primary Match Table Discrete I O 7 21 2 AutoLoads Multiple Packages Loads multiple packages into the match code table as long as AutoLoad INPUT is held active If the number of outputs configured for AutoLoad exceeds the Symbols Package setting multiple packages can be loaded until all table entries are filled Do not use in Continuous Decode mode unless your intention is to load multiple versions of the same package When Output 8 is configured for AutoLoad INPUT the decoder will not load data into entry 8 o
239. ls Not Read Counter 1 f NEW DATA 000000 Symbols Not Read Counter 1 NO READ 21 1000001 Symbols Not Read Counter Configuration AUX and LCD Display Parameters 9 3 Scroll LCD Field Type Options No Yes Select Enables or disables scrolling of the LCD display The default of No disables scrolling and formats the LCD as a single line 40 character display Each new entry overwrites all positions Note Newly displayed data will overwrite existing display data from the lowest position specified to the end of the display with blanks so plan your LCD display parameters carefully For example messages written from the host to position 1 would not be overwritten by the decoder if the lowest position specified for LCD display was 21 Select Yes to enable scrolling With scrolling enabled the LCD operates as a 2 line x 20 character display New data always displays on line 2 moving the previous data up to line 1 The following figure illustrates how the LCD operates when scrolling is disabled left and enabled right Scrolling Enabled 2 Line x 20 Character Display Package Counter BAR CODE DATA 000001 000100 Message 1 displays on line2 1 Decoder Performance Package Counter 000002 Message 1 scrolls up to line1 1 BAR CODE DATA 000001 Message 2 displays online2 1 100000 Decoder Performance NEW DATA 000002 Package Counter 000003 NEW DATA 000002 Message 2 scrolls up to line1 1
240. lsar 1 2 3 405 4 7 WAEHLE SPRACHE 1 Englisch 2 Franzoesisch 3 Deutsch 4 Italienisch 5 Spanisch Druecken Sie 1 2 3 4 oder 5 Note When using the 2755 CT1 cable to interface with a NEMA Type 4 decoder it may be necessary to use a null modem adapter on some computers or terminals You can identify such equipment by comparing the pinout supplied with your computer or terminal with the schematic supplied with your cable You will need a null modem if pins 2 and 3 are reversed Choose a language from the Select Language screen by pressing the appropriate number on your keyboard All of the screens that follow will now be displayed in the language you select Select CRT Type After you have selected a language the Select CRT Type screen will appear on your terminal Select a terminal type from among those listed Publication 2755 833 4 8 Installing the Decoder 2755 DD1P DD4P Bar Code Decoder Copyright 1992 Allen Bradley Company Inc SELECT CRT TYPE 1 Allen Bradley 1770 Industrial Terminal 2 Allen Bradley T45 Portable Terminal 3 Lear Siegler ADM 3E 4 Digital UT100 Press 1 2 3 4 or ESC Note If the next screen that appears is not properly formatted or if strange characters appear press the ESC key to return to the Select CRT Type screen Review your CRT Type selection If you are using terminal emulation verify that your settings are correct Select Operations After you have selected a CRT typ
241. lt value is AIB which means that the decoder will accept input from either A or B to create a match Other options include Scanner B or precedent determined A B When set to A B the decoder will use the first input from either Scanner A or Scanner B to establish a precedent for all following inputs If for example the first input comes via Scanner B then only data from Scanner B will be matched from that point on Output Condition Field Type Options None Read Package No Read Package Match Complete Match Entry Select Read and No Match No Read or No Match Auto Load at Startup Buffer Full Buffer Overflow Auto Load INPUT Applies only to module position 8 Defines the condition that will activate a specified output The default is None which means a condition is not defined for the output The available output conditions appear below Select the output condition appropriate for your application Configuration Scanner Control Primary Match Table Discrete I O 7 17 None Match Entry The factory default setting for each output is None which means an output condition is not defined You can hold an output open or closed by setting the condition to None and then changing the Output State to normally open or normally closed Activates the specified output when bar code data matches the string to the left of the output Used for verification of specific label information The correspond
242. lt is Blank which means a prompt message is not defined This message is displayed when Enable Keyboard Entry is set to No Read and a no read occurs It is also displayed when Enable Keyboard Entry is set to No and the host remotely enables the keyboard for one message using the Display Text Message command If this command is sent with a zero length string no message the Default Prompt Message is displayed The AUX terminal port is set for configuration operations at the factory To enable the AUX terminal for manual data entry instead of configuration use one of the AUX Terminal Selectors The AUX Terminal Selectors allow you to switch between configuration and manual data entry operations using one of two methods e Internal Selector jumper on main logic board e External Selector pin connections on AUX port connector Note Manual data entry and configuration modes are mutually exclusive Publication 2755 833 13 6 Configuration AUX Terminal Data Entry Internal Selector The Internal Selector is a jumper on the main logic board labelled AUX Terminal The figure below shows the location of this jumper on the board Internal Selector AUX Terminal Jumper Internal Selector Enclosure AUX TERMINAL ae VV LCD DISPLAY CONTRAST ADJ UST DATA CONFIG ENTRY Main Logic Board AUX TERMINAL e e Default VV DATA CONFIG ENTRY AUX TERMINAL HH VV DATA CONFIG
243. ly is High Byte Low Byte MSB cad y LSB CMD Reply TNS Optional Data 124 bytes maximum e CMD Reply Byte 0 contains the response to a command Bit 6 is set for the reply and responses are Publication 2755 833 16 4 PCCC Host Commands Unprotected Read Command Publication 2755 833 41H Response to an unprotected read 01H command 46H Response to a diagnostic link 06H command 48H Response to an unprotected write 08H command If the CMD byte sent in any of the commands is invalid the STS byte will contain 10H STS Byte 1 contains the status of a processed command The table below lists the STS codes for all commands Status Response Codes Hex Value Meaning 00H Command successful no errors 01H Command complete and successful 02H Display buffer is full 10H Valid command but invalid format or address 20H Invalid or unsupported command 30H Hardware fault reserved and unused 40H Command successful but no data available read command only 80H Command successful but data truncated read command only Applies only to CMD Address 900H or 901H See page 16 12 TNS Bytes 2 and 3 contain the same transaction number sequence as the command The TNS value links the reply to the command Data The data area contains data requested by a read command The write commands do not return data The unprotected read command 01H performs these decoder functions Re
244. minal Also see Host Message Replacement Rules Chapter 10 Rubout Character Field Type Options 0 through 255 008 BS Edit ASCII Defines the terminal character that allows you to delete the previous character during keyboard data entry The default is backspace decimal ASCII 008 To define a different rubout character enter a numeric value between 0 and 255 Echo To Terminal Field Type Options No Yes Select Controls whether data entered at the keyboard is displayed echoed on the terminal display The default is No keyboard data is not echoed If the terminal itself is set to echo data select No to prevent the terminal from displaying duplicate characters otherwise select Yes Switching to Manual Data Entry Mode Configuration AUX Terminal Data Entry 13 5 Size of Display Field Type Options 10 through 80 80 Edit Numeric Defines the maximum number of characters that can display on one line of the terminal display The default is SO which means up to 80 characters can display on one line The typical display size is 80 To specify another display size enter a value between 10 and 80 Default Prompt Message Field Type Options ASCII Text to 20 Edit Text Characters Max Blank Defines a 1 to 20 character message that displays on the terminal prompting you to enter keyboard data or take some other action The message always starts at position 1 on the display The defau
245. n ASCII Host Commands 15 55 HB Configure Scanner B Start amp Stop Characters Command Format HCsssppp Function Configures Scanner B start and stop characters for independent host triggering Parameters sssppp Command Parameter Parameter Function Valid Values ASCII decimal value SSS Start character for Scanner B 000 to 254 255 None ASCII decimal value ppp Stop character for ScannerB 000 to 254 255 None Response rr lt end gt rr response code lt end gt end of message control code Example Command HB035043 Parameters 035043 Command Parameter SSS Start character for Scanner B 035 character ppp Stop character for ScannerB 043 character Parameter Function Values Response 00CR 00 command complete response code CR end of message control code for Carriage Return Implemented in Series B Revision C and later decoders Publication 2755 833 15 56 ASCII Host Commands MF Configure Host Message Format Command Format MFabcdefghhhiiijkl Function Configures the format of messages sent to the host Parameters abcdefghhhiiijkl a through g are Yes 1 and No 0 responses to the following parameters in sequence shown Command Parameters Parameter Function Valid Values a Send bar code data 1 Yes 0 No b Send package count 1 Yes 0 No c Send bar code symbology 1 Yes 0 No d Send s
246. n of the decoder and receive decoded information Independent Mode A scanner mode in which each scanner operates independently of the other Glossary G 5 Interleaved 2 of 5 A bar code in which characters are paired together using bars to represent the first character and spaces to represent the second Inter Scan Timer A timer that inhibits decoding for a set time interval after a valid read L LAN Local area network LSAP An acronym for Link Service Access Point Used by the DH 485 protocol Effectively a secondary address for an application service match A condition in which decoded data matches data in the match code table match code A sequence that specifies a symbology code type and character string which can be compared against decoded valid bar codes match code table A list of match codes that is compared to each valid read The decoder offers primary and extended match code tables each of which offers different capabilities match complete An output condition in which decoded data matches a set number of entries in the match code table match entry An output condition in which decoded data matches an entry in the match code table misread A condition which occurs when the data output of a reader does not agree with the encoded data presented modulo check digit or character A calculated character within a data field used for error detection The calculated character is det
247. n the main circuit board Orientation of the battery in the clip makes no difference as the clip serves only to secure the battery in position Place the female connector attached to the battery on the three pronged plug on the main circuit board The plug will fit in only one direction If you feel resistance reverse the plug and try again You will hear a click when the connector locking mechanism engages Publication 2755 833 17 2 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Replacing Module Fuses Publication 2755 833 The I O Module Board has fuses for each of the eight modules The module fuses are located below the module connectors When replacing fuses use Replacement Part No 77104 899 01 Figure 17 1 Module fuses Module Connectors 8 Fuses F1 F8 O MODI MOD2 MOD3 MOD4 MOD5 MOD6 MOD7 MOD8 O 12 VDC Power Source i ee l 2 3 4 5 6 7 eoo jlos jos les og es jos jes te O E E EE EE EE E E ii E F Fo FE F Fy Fy y F To 1 2 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 replace a module fuse on the I O board Disconnect power from decoder and module connectors Isolate cause of blown fuse and correct problem See Appendix G for details on the use of output modules with inductive loads Loosen the two screws which secure the cover of the decoder and open R
248. nal 00 through 20 prompt message String AUX terminal prompt Up to 20 characters message string Response rr lt end gt rr response code lt end gt end of message control code Example Command PM11ENTER DATA Parameters 11ENTER DATA Command Parameters i Length of the AUX terminal Parameter Function Values 1 prompt message String AUX terminal prompt ENTER DATA message string Response 00CR 00 command complete response code CR end of message control code for Carriage Return Publication 2755 833 ASCII Host Commands 15 69 PI Read Decoder Performance Indicators Command Format PI Function Reads the decoder performance indicators for Scanners A and B Parameters None Response Parameters Parameter Function Valid Values a Scanner A Performance 3 digit value Indicator 000 through 100 999 3 digit value ae a 000 through 100 2R 99900 999 indicates the decoder is not decoding because of a buffer overflow condition Applicable only with dual head scanner Response aaa lt end gt rr lt end gt for single head scanners or aaabbb lt end gt rr lt end gt for dual head scanners lt end gt end of message code rr response code lt end gt end of message code Example Command PI Response 000099LF OOLF Response Parameters Parameter Function Values Scanner A Performance aag Indicator 000 Scanner B Performance bbb Indi
249. nction or Command Addresses Refer to Chapter 16 for additional information on the use of these commands and functions Address 0600H 0604H 0608H 060CH 0610H 0614H 0618H 061CH 0620H 0624H 0630H 0631H 0632H 0633H 0634H 0635H 0636H 0637H 0640H 0641H 0642H 0643H 0644H 0650H 0651H 0652H 0653H 0654H 0655H 0656H 0657H 0660H 0661H Clear package cou Clear primary coun Clear primary coun Clear primary coun Clear primary coun Clear primary coun Clear primary coun Clear primary coun Clear primary coun Command nts t1 t2 t3 t4 t5 t6 t7 t8 Clear symbols not read count Clear all primary counts Clear all primary counts and symbols not read count Save configuration Start scan A to Storage Memory and restart Set configuration to default values Stop scan A Flush current packet from host buffer Restart decoder Send repeat read Cancel repeat read Clear all Extended counts Auto Load Start Auto load End Hold output 1 open Hold output 2 open Hold output 3 open Hold output 4 open Hold output 5 open Hold output 6 open Hold output 7 open Hold output 1 closed Hold output 2 closed The AUX port supports a terminal for either configuring the decoder or for man entry For information on use of the AUX port for manual data entry consult Chi Decoder Configuration Addresses A 11 Address Command 0662H Hold output 3 closed 0663H Hold output 4
250. nd terminal is displaying duplicate characters Cause The terminal itself is set to echo data and the Echo to Terminal configuration parameter is also set to Yes Solution Set the Echo to Terminal parameter to No Problem AUX Terminal is set to manual data entry mode and terminal is not displaying any characters Cause Neither the terminal nor the decoder configuration is set to echo data Solution Set the Echo to Terminal parameter to Yes Problem No communication between decoder and AUX terminal Cause Incorrect terminal selected from Select CRT Type screen Solution Select the correct terminal type See Chapter 5 Cause Improperly connected cable Solution Check connections See Appendix D Cause Improperly fabricated cable Solution Verify connections See Appendix D Cause Incorrect terminal setup Solution Verify that your terminal is set for 9600 baud no parity 1 stop bit See Appendix D Problem You cannot access the configuration screens on the AUX terminal Cause The AUX port is set to manual data entry mode not configuration mode Publication 2755 833 17 8 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Publication 2755 833 Solution Place the AUX Terminal jumper on the logic board in the CONFIG position and make sure the AUX port connector does not have a jumper between pins 15 and 16 NEMA Type 1 or G and H NEMA Type 4 Problem You are unable to perform manual data entry functions a
251. nd allows you to send a message to the LCD Display The following TM command sends the message START JOB TMOLOSTART J OB L Message Text String START J OB L Length of Text String 10 AUX Keyboard Not Enabled 0 Command Code TM When the host sends this command to the decoder the message displays on the LCD at the beginning of the line in position 01 The message remains on the display until it is overwritten by another message or data Remember the LCD can only display 20 or 40 characters depending on whether scrolling is enabled Messages that are longer than 20 or 40 characters will be truncated See the examples on the next page If the TM command is sent with a string length of zero the decoder displays the Default Prompt Message if defined instead The following prompt defines this message DEFAULT PROMPT MESSAGE lt Defines 1 to 20 character prompt message Initially the default message is undefined Refer to chapter 13 for additional information PCCC Command You can also send a PCCC command to display a message on the LCD The following command uses the command address of 900H to send the message START JOB Bytes 6 15 define the characters of the message Configuration AUX and LCD Display Parameters 9 7 Display Message at AUX Terminal 900H High Byte Low Byte STS TNS Command Address 900H When the host sends this command to the decoder the messa
252. ne 1 Read Package No Read Package atch Complete atch Entry ead and no match o Read or no match 7 Auto Load 8 Invalid 9 Host Buffer Full A Host Buffer Overflow B Open C Closed 0 Code 39 1 Interleaved 2 of 5 2 Codabar 3 UPC A 4 UPC E 5 EAN 8 6 EAN 13 7 Code 128 8 Pharma Code 15 Any 0 32 0 Empty 32 characters aun WN ou ow i a aa Decoder Configuration Addresses A 9 Number of Acceptable Values PCCC Address Configuration Parameter Bytes Default in bold Output 8 Event 1 0 None 1 Read Package 2 No Read Package 3 Match Complete 4 Match Entry 5 Read and no match 6 No Read or no match 7 Auto Load 8 Auto Load Input 9 Host Buffer F ull A Host Buffer Overflow B Open C Closed Duration 2 0 10 9999 0 None sce larre aJ O 5E6 Output 1 ally Open or Closed 1 0 Normally Open 1 Normally Closed 5E7 ally Open or Closed 1 Normally Open mally Closed ally Open or Closed 1 Normally Open ally Closed Output 4 ally Open or Closed 1 Normally Open ormally Closed Output 5 ally Open or Closed 1 Normally Open Normally Closed 5EB Output 6 ally Open or Closed 1 Normally Open ormally Closed 5EC Output 7 ally Open or Closed 1 Normally Open Normally Closed Output 8 ally Open or Closed 1 Normally Open ormally Closed Publication 2755 833 A 10 Decoder Configuration Addresses Publication 2755 833 Decoder Fu
253. necting to a Host E 5 The RS 422 interface uses pins 7 14 15 16 17 18 and 19 of the HOST port connector The transmit data and receive data lines are Pin 14 Transmits data from the decoder to the host Pin 15 Transmits data from the decoder to the host TXA Pin 16 Receives data from the host Pin 17 Receives data from the host RS 422 communication lines are unterminated To enable network termination 120 Ohm resistor in series with a 0 01 microfarad capacitor connect pins 18 and 19 together Important We recommend you terminate the RS 422 lines if excessive noise occurs on long RS 422 communication links RS 422 does not use modem control lines However the configuration software does allow optional flow control using XON XOFF characters The options are e RS422 No flow control e RS422 XON XOFF Enable XON XOFF flow control The RS 422 communication interface and protocol is selected during configuration See the Host Communications configuration screen Figure E 4 shows how to connect the NEMA Type 4 decoder to a host using RS 422 Use Belden cable 9829 shielded twisted pair or equivalent Figure E 4 Connecting NEMA Type 4 Decoder to Host using RS 422 Host Port 2755 NC17 Connector Host RS 422 Port on Decoder Shield RXB RXA TxA TXB RS 422 SIG GND Termination Pin designations depend on host device Ground to back shell following 2755 NC17 instruction
254. ng Enter the keyboard is immediately disabled until receiving the next host command To cancel the data entry operation without entering data press Esc Format of Manually Entered Data After entering data the decoder sends it to the host The format in which the data is sent is controlled by the AUX Data Format parameter which is described earlier in this chapter PCCC Commands You can also send a PCCC command to the decoder to display a message at the AUX terminal and optionally enable the AUX terminal keyboard Publication 2755 833 13 12 Configuration AUX Terminal Data Entry Publication 2755 833 START JOB The following PCCC command sends the message START JOB to the AUX terminal The command address 900H sends a message for display but does not enable the keyboard Bytes 6 15 in the example below define the characters of the message Display Message at AUX Terminal 900H High Byte Low Byte STS Command Address 900H Messages that are longer than the size of the AUX terminal display will truncate When the host sends this command to the decoder the message displays on the AUX terminal at the beginning of the line in position Ol If the PCCC 900H command is sent with a string length of zero no message defined the decoder displays the Default Prompt Message instead The following PCCC command sends the message gt ENTER CARTON DATA to the AUX terminal and enables the keyboard
255. nse 00CR Publication 2755 833 00 command complete response code CR end of message control code for Carriage Return ASCII Host Commands 15 41 RP Read All Extended Match Data Command Format RP Function Reads the value of all Extended data Parameters None Response Parameters Parameter Function Valid Values The number of the Extended 001 to 128 nnn match counts A Auto load M Match Entry D Disabled L Lot 01 Scanner A 02 Scanner B 03 A B 04 A B 01 Code 39 02 Interleaved 2 of 5 03 Codabar 04 UP C A 05 UP C E 06 EAN 8 07 EAN 13 08 Code 128 09 P harma Code 16 Any mmmmmm_ The value of the count 000000 to 999999 ll Length of match string 00 to 32 string Match string up to 32 characters a Mode SS Source cc Symbology Response 001assccmmmmmmmumllstring lt end gt 128assccmmmmmmmmlstring lt end gt rr lt end gt rr response code lt end gt end of message control code Publication 2755 833 15 42 ASCII Host Commands RP Read All Extended Match Data continued Example Command RP Response 001 M 03 01 001289 04 1289 CR 002 128 M 03 01 001289 04 1289 CR 00CR Command Parameter Function Values Parameters nni M the Extended 064 a Mode M Match Entry S Source 03 A B cc symbology 01 Code 39 mmmmmm_ The value of the count 001289 Il Length of match string 04 string Match string 1289 a Mode
256. nt fllstring Parameter Function Valid Values f Enable keyboard entry for one 1 Yes message 0 No Il Length of text message 00 through 80 Response Publication 2755 833 String Text message characters Up to 80 characters rr lt end gt rr response code see Table 17 D lt end gt end of message control code Note If the previous message has not displayed the response returns a code of 02 to indicate the command failed because the display buffer was not available If the AUX port is set to configuration mode CONFIG jumper is open the response returns a code of 01 The message will display on the LCD Display but not the AUX terminal ASCII Host Commands 15 67 TM Display Text Message at AUX Terminal and LCD continued Example Command TM111MESSAGETEXT Parameters 111MESSAGETEXT Command Parameters Parameter Function Values f Enable keyboard entry for one 1 Yes message ll Length of text message 11 String Text message characters MESSAGETEXT Response 00CR 00 command complete response code CR end of message control code for Carriage Return Publication 2755 833 15 68 ASCII Host Commands PM Default Prompt Message for AUX Terminal Command Format PMllstring Function Defines the default prompt message for the AUX port terminal Parameters Ilstring Command F Param ters Parameter Function Valid Values i Length of the AUX termi
257. nt the primary symbol is sufficient to poruce a valid scan The Auto selection is not recommended when the Decode Mode is set to ontinuous If you select 2 5 or 2 or 5 the decoder must decode both the primary label and the supplement to produce a valid scan UPC E Field Type Options No Yes Select Enables disables decoding of UPC E labels The default of No disables decoding of this symbology Select Yes to enable decoding UPC E Supplements Field Type Options None 2 Select 5 2o0r5 Auto Enables disables decoding of UPC E supplementary codes The default of None disables decoding of supplements for this symbology Options are None Disables decoding of supplementary codes 2 Enables decoding of 2 character supplementary codes 5 Enables decoding of 5 character supplementary codes 2o0r5 Enables decoding of 2 or 5 character supplementary codes Auto Enables decoder to auto discriminate supplementary codes None 2 or 5 on label The Auto Selection allows you to mix labels without supplements with labels containing 2 or 5 digit supplements The supplements are often a different size than the primary symbol Therefore it is critical that both the primary symbol and the supplement be present when the decoder is triggered If the decoder does not detect the supplement the primary symbol is sufficient to po uce a valid scan The Auto selection is not recommended when the Decode Mode is set to ontinuo
258. nt rule fails the default no read message if one is defined will be sent Host Communications BAUD RATEx BITS CHAR PARITY HOST PROTOCOL DEVICE ADDRESS ACK CHAR NAK CHAR Chapter 1 2 Configuration Host Communications Function 7 on the Select Operation menu accesses the Host Communications menu screen from which you can control communications for the HOST port of the decoder The screen displays with the first field highlighted The default settings are displayed the first time you access this screen Make changes appropriate for your application If the factory defaults are satisfactory you can exit the configuration software by pressing Esc twice or move on to the AUX Terminal Data Entry configuration screen by pressing Esc Return 8 Data 1 Stop None R5232 1 None 299 None 299 xSave and Restart required for these parameters to take effect START SCAN CHAR STOP SCAN CHAR LARGE BUFFER SEND HOST MESSAGE TRANSMISSION CHECK SCANNER A SCANNER B None 2595 None 259 None 259 None 299 No At End of Trigger Host communication parameters Baud Rate Bits Char Parity Host Protocol Device Address ACK NAK Char do not take effect until you SAVE them and restart the decoder Each parameter is defined below along with its field type and possible values The default value is shown in the table in bold letters Publication 2755 833 12 2 Publication 2755 833 Configuration Ho
259. ntheses in the search string and the 1 in the replace string we are able to strip off the data identifier and send only the data desired In this example if the part number does not have exactly 7 characters after the identifier it will fail the rule and not be sent In rule 2 we search for the quantity identifier If the symbol Q100 was read we would send Qty 100 with the replace string Qty 1 Publication 2755 833 10 18 Configuration Host Message Replacement Rules Publication 2755 833 Example 6 Sorting by Unique Characters and or Strings Parameter Rule 1 Value Source AIB Symbology Any Symbol Number All Find String Containing n6 2 9 7 9 0 9 Replace Entire String With amp Minimum Field Length 0 Alignment Right Fill Character None Host Message Field Number 1 This rule checks symbols as they are decoded for values between 62 and 99 All other symbols would be ignored by this rule Values between 62 and 99 are sent to the host Note the and are required to avoid matching strings such as 562 or 758 that do contain the desired string data 62 and 75 but are not the desired matches Example 7 Stripping Unwanted Characters Parameter Rule 1 Value Source AJB Symbology Any Symbol Number All Find String Containing A0 is optional in this example Replace Entire S
260. o 1770 T1 T2 T3 e Allen Bradley 1784 T45 Laptop Terminal Catalog No 1784 T45 e DEC VT100 e Lear Siegler ADM 3E computer or terminal that emulates one of the above Appendix D provides details on how to connect and setup each terminal The AUX port communication parameters are fixed at e 8 Data Bits e 1 Stop Bit e 9600 Baud Rate e Parity None e XON XOFF Flow Control Decoder responds to XON XOFF but does not generate XON XOFF characters to the terminal The AUX terminal can be used to either configure the decoder or for manual data entry and display functions The AUX port terminal is factory set for configuration functions Publication 2755 833 5 2 Introduction to AUX Terminal Configuration Getting Started Publication 2755 833 After connecting the terminal to the decoder and setting the communication parameters you can start using the configuration menus 1 Power on the terminal or computer and load communications software if required 2 Power on the decoder The POWER and CPU ACTIVE indicators light 3 The Select Language screen displays SELECT LANGUAGE 1 English 2 French 3 German 4 Italian 5 Spanish Press 1 2 3 4 or 5 SELEZIONARE LINGUA 1 Ingeles 2 Francese 3 Tedesco 4 Italiano 5 Spagnolo Prenere 1 2 3 4 05 CHOIX DU LANGUAGE 1 Anglais 2 Francais 3 Allemand 4 Italien 5 Espagnol Appuyer 1 2 3 4 ou 5 SELECCIONAR LENGUA 1 Ingles 2 Frances
261. o Load 100 4 Any 0 AiB None 0 5 Any 0 AiB None 0 6 Any 0 AiB None 0 7 Any 0 AiB None 0 8 Any 0 AiB None 0 Notes Table is restored to saved configuration Data cleared from primary match code table for entries 1 2 and 3 Output conditions change from Match Entry to AutoLoad for Outputs 1 2 and 3 Ready for Next AutoLoad using System Restart Publication 2755 833 First Valid Package Read Configuration Scanner Control Primary Match Table Discrete I O Figure 7 4 AutoLoad using AutoLoad INPUT AutoLoad Configuration at AutoLoad Input Saved Configuration 7 23 Output duration must be set for outputs and LE Ds to operate SSS MATCH CODE TABLE DISCRETE 1 0 Enabled l 1 Any 0 AiB Auto Load 100 2 Any 0 AiB Auto Load 100 3 Any 0 AiB Auto Load 100 4 Any 0 AiB None 0 5 Any 0 AiB None 0 6 Any 0 AiB None 0 7 Any 0 AiB None 0 8 Any 0 AiB Auto Load CINPUT 0 Commands ESC Change SPACE Cursor Control ARRDWS Notes AutoLoad is set for outputs 1 2 and 3 and applies to match code entries 1 2 and 3 Output 8 is set to AutoLoad INPUT which activates the AutoLoad function for entries 1 2 and 3 when an input signal is momentarily applied Symbols per package parameter is set to 1 M MATCH CI 1 2 of 5 001688421378 2 Any 3 Any 4 Any 5 Any 0016884213786 6 Finy 7 Any 8 Any After AutoLoad ODE TABLE None ooo0oo0co0o00d0 AIB AIB
262. o enter non printable ASCII control characters ASCII 0 through 31 into a text string For example to enter carriage return and line feed control characters enter 7M J The decoder interprets M J as the ASCII control characters CR and LF The character is equivalent to ASCII 37 decimal You always enter non printable control characters as a 2 character sequence and the second character must be listed in the following table To enter the character use Character Character W A WX C SO N EM Y D SI 0 SUB Z E DLE P ESC F DC1 Q FS G DC2 R GS H DC3 S RS A 04 a a wx w Appendix J Custom Settings Use a photocopy of the table below to record your own custom parameter settings as you develope new applications This table is a blank version of the default settings table from Appendix B Category of Parameters Bar Code Symbology Check Characters Bar Code Symbology Lengths Pharma Code Scanner A Control Scanner B Control Parameter Default S etting Enable Code 39 Enable Interleaved 2 of 5 Enable Codabar Enable Code 128 Code 128 FNC1 Character Enable UPC A able UP C E pand UPC E able EAN 8 able EAN 13 Code 39 12 of 5 Codabar Code 39 nterleaved 2 of 5 ode 128 odabar nable Pharma Code m S gt lt fo Quiet Zone Ratio Space Tolerance Bar Tolerance Wide to Narrow Bar Ratio Minimum Number of Bars Scanner A Decode Direction Scanner B Decode Dir
263. ode is available only on decoders equipped with the Pharma Code option Symbol Number Field Type Options 1 to 16 All Edit Numeric Determines the bar code symbol to which the displayed rule should be applied 1 would apply the rule only to the first symbol read 2 to the second symbol and so on up through 16 The default value of All applies the rule to all symbols read Use All in raster scanner applications or whenever you are uncertain of the order in which the symbols will be read Publication 2755 833 10 10 Configuration Host Message Replacement Rules Note Using a combination of All in the symbol number field and All in the host message field number field within a rule creates a special situation in which the decoder will attempt to match the rule using only those symbols that have not previously satisfied a rule A tule in which the host message field number is set to AH will try to process every symbol to satisfy the search criteria until all of the host fields are satisfied Important Do not set the host message field number to A unless The Number of Fields in Message parameter is set to 1 on the Host Message Format screen OR The Number of Fields in Message parameter is set to All on the Host Message Format screen and the Symbols per Package parameter is set to 1 on the Scanner Control screen OR The Symbol Number parameter is set to All Other configurations will result in multiple
264. of message control code for Carriage Return Publication 2755 833 ASCII Host Commands 15 47 DF Enable Data Display on AUX Terminal and LCD Command Format DFab Function Enables the AUX terminal and or the LCD Display to receive and display bar code data Note Before data will display at the AUX terminal you must set the AUX port to manual data entry mode as described in Chapter 13 Parameters ab Command Parameter Parameter Function Enable device to display formatted bar code data Valid Values 0 None 1 AUX terminal and LCD Display 2 AUX terminal only 3 LCD Only b Specify formatof 0 Unformatted bar code data 1 Host format Response rr lt end gt rr response code lt end gt end of message control code Example Command DF11 Parameters 11 Command Parameter Parameter Function Values Enable device to _ l l 3 display formatted 1 AUX terminal and LCD Display bar code data b Specify format of 2 tnstinnnat Response bar code data OOLF 00 LF command complete response code end of message control code for Line Feed Publication 2755 833 15 48 ASCII Host Commands DP Configure Data Display Positions for AUX Terminal and LCD Command Format DPdpp Function Enables the display of specific data items on the LCD and or AUX port terminal starting at a specific character position Note Before data will display at the
265. ommand MR3 Parameters 3 match code entry 3 SEU Parameter Function Values Parameters n Match code table entry number 3 f RESERVED 10 cc Bar code symbology 01 Code 39 ll Length of match string 05 string Match string 12345 This value is always returned as 1 Response 31010512345CR 00CR CR end of message control code 00 command complete response code CR end of message control code Publication 2755 833 15 34 ASCII Host Commands MW Write Primary Match Code Table Entry Command Format MWnfccllstring Function Configure a match code for table entry 1 8 Parameters _nfccllstring Command Parameters n Match code table entry number 1 through 8 f RESERVED Ignored 01 Code 39 02 Interleaved 2 of 5 03 Codabar 04 UPC A cc Bar code symbology a 07 EAN 13 08 Code 128 09 P harma Code 16 Any Il Length of match code string 00 to 32 String Match code characters up to 32 characters Decoder ignores character but it must be supplied to maintain compati bility with previous decoders A zero length string disables a match code entry A nonzero length string enables the match code entry The string must be as long as the specified string length Il Parameter Function Valid Values Response rr lt end gt rr response code lt end gt end of message control code Publication 2755 833 ASCII Host Commands 15 35 MW Write Primary Match Code Table
266. ompt Message 0 cece eee eee ees 13 5 Switching to Manual Data Entry Mode 00005 13 5 Interial Selector 2 sea tana wae eaweu d dene ad s deal wes 4 13 6 Internal Selector AUX Terminal umper 13 6 External Selector 1c24 comand scene sise vend Nee ade 4 13 6 Data Entry and Display Operations ccc eee eee eae 13 7 Displaying Data atthe AUX Terminal ccc eee eee 13 7 Displaying Host Messages 2 450 0cee ae eyewear ee eeeas 13 8 Processing No ReadS cciveepivivebiscievink aa 13 8 Using ASCII and PCCC Commands aoaaa 13 10 ASCI COMMONS ica ccaaeede ceed teu dentd ead onde ens 13 10 Format of Manually Entered Data 00 13 11 PCC COMMONS era e ssuenaheaeeesada cme daagiew 13 11 Chapter 14 Chapter Objectives cece eee eee ees 14 1 Connectand Set Up AUX Terminal ccc cece ees 14 1 Display Bar Code SWINGS asis cdusai ends oelvies eRarwely wes 4 14 2 Display Status and Primary Counters 00000e 14 3 Resetting the Counters eee eee ee teens 14 5 Restart SVSIEM ar iae oi daca lees rena aan wot aot area aok aae Sih 14 5 Select language ss tvevetanten uea A 14 6 Save COMMOUTAMION mesisan Sch wey taaie a ead tad 14 6 Chapter 15 Chapter Objectives ccc cee eee eee 15 1 Using RS 232 RS 422 2c cicscaccstadacsdnesevenaea iawn 15 1 Vsing DHAOS ost ues owe ceeude asa eeeeed rra ur e s 15 1 Command FPONNGU s0s 2 440bs cag outed eee eaten
267. on 2755 833 ASCII Host Commands 15 11 CC Configure Code 39 2 of 5 Codabar Check Characters Command Format CCabcdef Function Enables or disables bar code check characters Parameters abcdef a through f are Yes 1 and No 0 responses to the following parameters in sequence shown Command Parameter Function Valid Values Parameters a Code 39 check character 1 Yes 0 No b Send Code 39 check character 1 Yes 0 No c I 2 of 5 check character 1 Yes 0 No d Send I 2 of 5 check character 1 Yes 0 No e Codabar check character 1 Yes 0 No f Send Codabar check character 1 Yes 0 No Response rr lt end gt fr response code lt end gt end of message control code Example Command CC111100 Parameters 111100 Command Parameter Function Values Parameters a Code 39 check character 1 Yes b Send Code 39 check character 1 Yes c I 2 of 5 check character 1 Yes d Send I 2 of 5 check character 1 Yes e Codabar check character 0 No f Send Codabar check character 0 No Response 00CR 00 command complete response code CR end of message control code for Carriage Return Publication 2755 833 15 12 ASCII Host Commands CG Configure Interleaved 2 of 5 Guard Bar Command Format CGa Function Enables verification of guard bars on Interleaved 2 of 5 symbols Parameters a Command A Parameters Parameter Function Valid Values Enable verifica
268. ons All unused pins should be left open Pins 4 5 and 20 are optional flow control lines Flow control options are e RS 232 No flow control e RS 232 XON XOFF The XOFF character from the host suspends transmission and the XON character resumes transmission The receiving device removes the XON XOFF characters from the message e RS 232 RTS CTS 1 Enables the RS 232 RTS and CTS control lines for flow control e RS 232 RTS CTS 2 Enables the RS 232 RTS and CTS control lines for flow control Use this mode of flow control to communicate with Catalog No 2760 RA or RB module The RS 232 interface and flow control are selected on the Host Communications configuration screen Connecting to a Host E 3 Pin Modem Descriptions Control Line 20 DTR RTS CTS 1 The decoder sends a DTR Data Terminal Ready signal to tell the host the decoder is online and capa RTS CTS 2 ble of receiving data from the host The DTR line remains on while the decoder is on 4 RTS RTS CTS 1 The decoder sends the RTS Request to Send signal to tell the host it is ready to send data When the host receives an RTS signal from the decoder the host must assert CTS to tell the decoder to begin sending data When the decoder stops sending an RTS the host must stop sending a CTS before the decoder can assert RTS again 4 RTS RTS CTS 2 The decoder sends the RTS Request to Send signal to tell the host it can accept data The host only sends data when
269. ontrol Primary Match Table Discrete I O Figure 7 3 AutoLoad using System Restart AutoLoad Configuration at System Restart Output duration must be voava coniguration set for outputs and LEDs to operate _ MATCH CODE TABLE DISCRETE 1 0 Enabled First Valid Package Read 1 Any 0 AiB futo Load 100 2 Any 0 AiB Auto Load 100 3 Any 0 AiB Auto Load 100 4 Any 0 AiB None 0 5 Any 0 AiB None 0 6 Any 0 AiB None 0 7 Any 0 AiB None 0 8 Any 0 AiB None 0 eae ESC Change SPACE Cursor Control ARROWS Notes AutoLoad is set for Outputs 1 2 and 3 and applies to match code entries 1 2 and 3 Symbols package parameter is set to 3 After System Restart MATCH CODE TABLE DISCRETE I O Enabled l 1 12 of 5 001688421378 0 AiB Match Entry 100 2 I2 of 5 411528258538 0 AiB Match Entry 100 3 I2 of 5 611679808644 0 AiB Match Entry 100 4 Any 0 AiB None 0 611679808644 5 Any 0 AiB None 0 6 Any 0 AiB None 0 7 Any 0 AiB None 0 8 Any 0 AiB None 0 Commands ESC Change SPACE Cursor Control ARROUS Notes Bar code data loaded into match code table for entries 1 2 and 3 Output condition changes from AutoLoad to Match Entry for Outputs 1 2 and 3 The AutoLoad condition for outputs 1 2 and 3 is still saved System Restart No new data scanned MATCH CODE TABLE DISCRETE 1 0 Enabled 1l 1 Any 0 AiB Auto Load 100 2 Any 0 AiB Auto Load 100 3 Any 0 AiB Aut
270. ore outputs Extended Match Codes provide a way to gather extremely detailed information based on decoder activity and to exercise an additional level of control over decoder output activities The Extended Match Codes differ from the Primary Match Codes in a number of ways e Extended Match Code counters appear on the same screen from which they are controlled the primary counters appear on a separate Status and Primary Counters screen e Extended Match Codes can activate multiple outputs the duration of which are defined in the Primary Match Code Table Primary Match Codes can each fire only a single output This screen displays the extended match code table in eight sets of sixteen entries Set one includes entries 1 through 16 set 2 includes 17 through 32 and so on The entry numbers 1 through 128 appear on the left side of the screen SCREEN STATUS TUONE SET 1 Enabled MODE SYMBOLOGY COUNT LOADING NUMBER SOURCE EXTENDED MATCH CODE TABLE 12345678 D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D Commands ESC Change SPACE Cursor Control ARROUS Publication 2755 833 8 2 Configuration Extended Match Table and Counters Publication 2755 833 Each parameter is defined below The options for each parameter are summarized in a table and explained more fully in the text The default setting for each parameter is displayed in bold letters in the table Screen Status Field Type Options Auto Refresh Reset
271. ormally open or normally closed T 13 when a fault occurs 7 15 P Package Counter 7 17 9 4 14 4 Package Detect decode mode 7 3 Scanner A 7 3 Scanner B 7 9 Publication 2755 833 Index Publication 2755 833 signaling arrival and departure of package 7 3 Package Detect Decode Mode 7 9 Package Detect Input filter and sense Scanner A 7 12 filter and sense Scanner B 7 12 7 13 Package Detectors 2 13 PhotoSwitch 2 13 Parity 12 2 PCCC Commands use with an AUX terminal 13 11 PCCC Diagnostic Link Commands diagnostic loop 16 14 read diagnostic counters 16 15 read diagnostic status 16 16 reset diagnostic counters 16 16 reset diagnostic status 16 16 PCCC Host Commands 16 1 cancel repeat read command 16 12 command format 16 2 DH485 protocol options 16 1 diagnostic commands 16 1 diagnostic loop 16 14 display message on AUX Terminal 16 12 execute decoder functions 16 9 hold output open or closed 16 13 modify configuration data 16 9 read configuration data 16 8 read counters and performance indicator 16 6 read current bar code data 16 5 read diagnostic counters 16 15 read diagnostic status 16 16 read last host message 16 7 reply format 16 3 reset diagnostic counters 16 16 send repeat read command 16 11 status response codes 16 4 unprotected read command 16 1 unprotected write
272. ost 15 RS 422 A or RS 485 A Transmit Data from decoder to host 16 RS 422 Receive Data from host 17 RxB RS 422 Receive Data from host 18 422 A TERM RS 422 Line Termination J umpers to 19 19 422 TERM RS 422 Line Termination J umpers to 18 20 DTR RS 232 Data Terminal Ready The HOST port on the NEMA Type 4 decoder has a 19 pin male connector and communicates over an RS 232 RS 422 or RS 485 communication line Figure 4 10 shows host devices you can connect to the HOST port of the NEMA Type 4 decoder Publication 2755 833 4 18 Installing the Decoder Figure 4 10 Connecting device to HOST port of NEMA Type 4 decoder Supported Host Devices e Allen Bradley PLC Controller via Cat No 1771 DB BASIC Module Cat No 1771 DA ASCII I O Module A 7 Cat No 2760 RB Flexible Interface Module SCANNER A SCANNER B AUX HOST with Cat No 2760 SFC1 SFC2 Protocol Cartridge RS 232 RS 232 422 485 e Any RS 232 or RS 422 ASCII Device Use the Cat No 2755 CT1 communication cable or construct your own cable using the Cat No 2755 NC17 Connector Kit and the pinouts in Appendix E Use 2755 CY 1 for multidrop HOST Port male Connector applications Pin Abbreviation Function A GND ChassisGround sss SsSSCiSSCS Ground B RD Se 232 Receive Data RS 232Receive Data fromhos host C RS 232 Transmit Data from decode
273. ounters 1 8 15 36 co Clear All Primary Output Counters System Commands 15 74 RN Save Configuration to Storage Memory and Restart 15 74 SA Save Configuration to Storage Memory No Restart 15 75 DD Set Configuration to Factory Defaults 15 75 RD Set Configuration to Defaults Save and Restart 15 76 RE Restart 15 76 ID Version of Software Obsolete Commands For Reference 15 77 DM Configure Bar Code Data Mask 15 77 PD Configure Data Pad Character Publication 2755 833 15 4 ASCII Host Commands Table 15 B lists the two character ASCII commands in alphabetical order by command code Table 15 B Two character host commands Alphabetical Order Nuber a H Command Function 15 25 AB Auto load Begin 15 25 AE Auto load End 15 26 AL Auto load 15 64 AX Configure AUX Terminal Data Entry Operations 15 22 BF Configure Scanner B Package Detect Filter and Sense 15 23 BL Configure Scanner B Laser Mode 15 36 CA Clear Extended Match Count 15 11 cc Configure Code 39 2 of 5 Codabar Check Characters 15 14 CF Configure Code 128 FNC1 Character 15 12 CG Configure 2 of 5 Guard Bar 15 35 CM Clear Counter 1 8 15 36 co Clear All Primary Output C ounts 15 16 CP Configure Pharma Code 15 13 CQ Configure Quiet Zone 15 45 cs Disable Extended Match Code Set
274. our host message replacement rule table with care Here are a few general guidelines e Prioritize your replacement rules Only one rule can fill a field and once one rule has filled a field then no other rules will apply to that field Define the rule which will lead to the most preferable result first the next preferable result next and so on e Ifyou need to fill specific fields define the rules for those fields first e When using metacharacters define first those expressions which are most restrictive most specific and then proceed to those which are less so e Define rules specifying All as the host message field number last This is especially important because if such a rule creates a match then no other rules that occur after it and are directed to specific host fields can have any affect Remember once one rule has filled a field then no other rules will apply to that field Source Field Type Options A Default for DS Only B Select A B A or B Default for DD only Aux Specifies where an event can originate and meet the host message replacement rule requirements For DS decoders Scanner A is the default value For DD decoders the default value is AIB which means that the decoder will accept input from either A or B to create a match You can also select AUX or if you have a DD decoder Scanner B as the source The decoder processes rules for the AUX and each of the scanners separately For exam
275. ource identifier Ignored e Send header message Ignored f Send no read message Ignored g Expand UPC E 1 Yes 0 No ASCII Decimal Value hhh Label delimiter character 000 to 254 255 None ASCII Decimal Value il Start character 000 to 254 255 None 0 CRLF 1 CR 2 LF 3 ETX j End message control character A None 5 CR ETX 6 LF ETX 7 CR LF ETX 0 None ra 1 LRC k Transmission check method 3C hecksum LSB first 3 Checksum MSB first l Send performance indicator 1 Yes 0 No These parameters retained for compatibility with existing decoders The presence of each string type indicates that the string should be sent Response rr lt end gt rr response code lt end gt end of message control code Publication 2755 833 ASCII Host Commands 15 57 MF Configure Host Message Format continued Example Command MF1101110094042100 Parameters 1101110094042100 Command Parameter Function Values Parameters a Send bar code data 1 Yes b Send package count 1 Yes c Send bar code symbology 0 No d Send source identifier Ignored e Send header message Ignored f Send no read message Ignored g Expand UPC E 0 No hhh Label delimiter character 094 character il Start character 042 character j End message control character 1 CR k Transmission check method 0 None l Send performance indicators 0 No Response 00CR 00 command complete response code C
276. pe 1 Decoder to DH485 Network Host Port 25 pin DB Connector Host RS 485 Port on Decoder Shield fem Shield RS 485 ieee Pin designations depend Termination on host device Only one of the devices in the network must have the cable shield connected to chassis ground Do this by connecting shield to pin 1 instead of pin 9 Enable line termination for the device at each end of the network To enable line termination connect pins 12 and 13 together For all other devices in the network leave these pins open The following parameters are fixed for DH485 communications e 8 Data bits e Even parity e 1 Stop Bit The host protocol options are e DH485 PCCC 1 PCCC commands with write replies e DH485 PCCC 2 PCCC commands without write replies e DH485 ASCI 1 ASCII commands with responses e DH485 ASCII 2 ASCH commands without responses The communication interface and host protocol is selected during configuration See the Host Communications configuration screen Figure E 6 shows how to connect the NEMA Type 4 decoder to a DH485 network Use Belden cable 9842 or equivalent Publication 2755 833 E 8 Connecting to a Host Figure E 6 Connecting NEMA Type 4 Decoder to DH485 Network Host Port 2755 NC17 Host RS 485 Port on Decoder Shield Shield ae Shield SIG GND D SIG GND TXB P TXB TXA TxA R EZ RS 485 Pin designations depend Termina on host device
277. play terminals messages sent from the host always display in position 1 If the host sends the Display Text Message command to the decoder with a text string length set to zero the decoder will display the Default Prompt Message instead if defined The text string from the host and the default prompt message are always preceded by a carriage return and line feed and display at the beginning of the line in position 1 The following parameter defines the Default Prompt Message Defines 1 to 20 character prompt message Initially the default prompt message is undefined The amount of data to be displayed is restricted by the size of the terminal display For example most terminals support an 80 character display Formatted data other than host messages that exceeds the size of the display is truncated Text messages from the host that are longer than the size of the display will truncate Processing No Reads This section includes some examples to illustrate how the decoder handles subsequent packages while waiting for you to respond to a no read All examples assume that manual data entry is enabled only for no reads and the Default Prompt Message is defined as Enter Carton Data Example 1 What happens if you respond to a no read before the next package arrives If you complete the data entry process for a no read before the next package arrives the package count of the manually entered data which is sent to the hos
278. ple if all enabled rules specify Scanner A as the source then data received from Scanner B or the auxiliary terminal does not pass through the rules and will not be affected by them Configuration Host Message Replacement Rules 10 9 Note If any rule is enabled for a given source then all data from that source will pass through the rules For example if any rule is enabled for AUX data then all AUX data will pass through the rules Therefore if you construct a rule with Scanner A as the source and establish no rule for Scanner B then all data from Scanner A will pass through the rules while the data from Scanner B will not In that case a no read from Scanner A would be represented by the appropriate no read replacement string A no read from Scanner B in Independent Mode would be represented by the default no read string Use AlB as the source if you want the rule to apply to both scanners or whenever Scanner B is set to coordinated mode When AUX is selected as the source the rule processor ignores that rule s Host Field Number Symbol Number and Symbology parameters Symbology Field Type Options Code 39 Interleaved 2 of 5 Codabar UPC A UPC E EAN 8 EAN 13 Code 128 Pharma Code Any Select pole only to decoders equipped with the optional Pharma Code capabilities Selects the symbology to which the host message replacement rule should be applied The default value is Any Pharma C
279. put Modules Catalog Number 2755 IB5S 2755 IA5S 2755 IM5S Maximum Input Voltage 32 VDC 140V RMS VDC 280 V RMS VDC Minimum Input Voltage 3 3 VDC 90V RMS VDC 180 V RMS VDC Input Resistance 1k ohm Maximum Input Current 32mA DC 32 VDC 10mA RMS 140 VRMS 8mA RMS 280VRMS Drop Out Current 1 0 mA DC 2 5 mA RMS 1 5 mA RMS Allowable Off State Input Current 1 0 mA DC 3 0 mA RMS 2 0 mA RMS Allowable Off State Input Voltage 2 0 VDC AC or DC input module Publication 2755 833 Appendix A Decoder Configuration Addresses Number of Acceptable Values PCCC Address Configuration Parameter Bytes Default in bold Do 3C1 AUX Terminal 0 No Enable Keyboard Entry 1 Yes 2 No Read 3C2 AUX Terminal 1 0 No Confirm Entry 1 Yes 3C3 AUX Terminal 1 0 Unformatted Aux Data Format 1 Host Format 3C4 AUX Terminal 1 ASCII 0 255 255 None Rubout Char for Keyboard Entry 8 BS 3C5 Echo Keyboard Data 1 0 No 1 Yes Size of Display AUX Terminal Source Identifier String Length 0 4 0 Empty String 4 characters AUX Terminal Default Prompt Message String Length 0 20 0 Empty String 20 characters 3E2 Scanner B Trigger Source 0 Port A Coordinated1 1 PortB Ind Package Det 2 PortB Ind Host Control 3 PortB Coordinated2 Scanner B Trigger Timeout 0 10 9999 3E6 Scanner B Source Identifier String Length 0 4 0 Empty String 4 characters Enable UPC A
280. r but if possible disconnect power from module connectors 2 Loosen the two screws which secure the cover of the decoder and open 3 Using your fingers turn the LCD Display potentiometer to the left or right until the desired contrast or readability is achieved 4 Close cover of decoder and tighten screws AUX Terminal Display Examples The section provides examples to illustrate how data is displayed at the AUX terminal and how the configuration parameters control the format of the displayed data Example 1 In Example 1 the AUX terminal is configured to display unformatted bar code data in position 21 Configuration AUX and LCD Display Parameters 9 11 DISPLAY DATA Aux Only Enables AUX Terminal to display data MESSAGE FORMAT Unformatted Displays unformatted bar code data SCROLL LCD No POSITION 21 BAR CODE STRINGS lt Displays bar code data starting at position 21 IE DECODER PERFORMANCE O PACKAGE COUNTER O SYMBOLS NOT READ COUNTER PRIMARY COUNTERS 1 None 2 None 3 None 4 None 5 None 6 None 7 None 8 None eooqooeooce The AUX terminal display will look like this for the above configuration Bar Code Data 229176 229183 229192 229206 229240 229253 229263 229268 229285 229322 229327 229336 229345 229361 229371 229391 229427 229433 229438 229449 229456 229466 229476 229493 229517 Example 2 In Example 2 bar code data configur
281. r Function saue f Enable or disable 1 enable filter filter selectsense LO when package is present Response 00CR 00 command complete response code CR end of message control code Publication 2755 833 for Carriage Return ASCII Host Commands 15 23 BL Configure Scanner B Laser Mode Command Format BLa Function Configures the laser light for scanner B NOTE This command is valid only for dual head decoders Parameters a Command Parameters Parameter Function Valid Values 0 On a Scanner B laser light 1 Triggered 2 0ff Response rr lt end gt rr response code lt end gt end of message control code Example Command BL1 Parameters 1 Command Parameters Parameter Function Values a Scanner B laser light 1 Triggered Response 00CR 00 command complete response code CR end of message control code for Carriage Return Publication 2755 833 15 24 ASCII Host Commands SW Write Scanner Source to Match Code Table Command Format SWab Function Configures the source of an event Parameters ab Command Parameters a Match code table entry number 1 through 8 1 Scanner A 2 Scanner BO 3 A BO 4 lllegal 5 A B Parameter Function Valid Values b Source of event Applies only to Dual Head Decoder Response rr lt end gt rr response code lt end gt end of message control code Example Command SWI11 Parameters
282. r to host D GND RS 232 Signal Common E jor RS 232DataTerminalReady 232 Data Terminal RS 232DataTerminalReady F 2 RTS RS 232RequesttoSend sss 232 RS 232RequesttoSend sss Send H DSR RS 232 Data Set Ready RS 232 Clear to Send RS 485 Shield Ground 485 TERM RS 485 Line Termination J umpers to N 485 A TERM RS 485 Line Termination J umpers to M RS 422 Transmit Data from decoder to host RS 422 Transmit Data from decoder to host RS 422 Receive Data from host RS 422 Receive Data from host 422 A TERM RS 422 Line Termination J umpers to V 422 TERM RS 422 Line Termination J umpers to U See Appendix E for specific details on connecting to a host device using the different communication interfaces Publication 2755 833 Installing I O Modules Hold Down Screws Module Connectors 8 Installing the Decoder 4 19 This section shows how to install input and output modules on the optional I O Module Board The board has eight positions MOD1 MOD8 for I O modules All eight positions accept output modules The MOD8 position alternately accepts an input module for the match code AutoLoad function The Accessories section in Chapter 2 provides a complete list of modules supported by the I O board Figure 4 11 shows two output modules installed in the MOD1 and MOD 2 positions and one input module in the MOD8 position A screw holds each module into position on the I O board Figure 4 11 I O modul
283. r uses a standard 3 pin connector with a separate ON OFF toggle switch that is sealed to comply with NEMA Type 4 standards Power cord options are available for each decoder and are listed in the Decoder Options section The decoders are designed to retain configuration during short term power interruptions Controlled discharge of an on board capacitor supports configuration retention for 6 hours at an ambient temperature of 50 C 122 F or 50 hours at 30 C 86 F The capacitor accumulates a charge when power is restored An optional battery catalog number 1747 BA may be used to retain the configuration without outside power for up to five years When the optional battery is used power interruptions whether intentional or resulting from power supply glitches will have no affect on operating memory If the battery is not used long term power loss see above will result in the loss of the Extended Match Code Table configuration the Primary and Extended Match Code Counters and the text examples contained in the Host Replacement Rules Note that the Replacement Rules themselves will not be lost but the test examples you have entered at the bottom of each rule page will be lost Storage memory configuration is transferred into operating memory on restart if power is lost for a period longer than the on board capacitor and if installed optional battery can support Refer to Chapter 3 for an explanation of decoder memory
284. r wiring in the same conduit e route incoming power to the decoder using a separate path from the communication cables if paths must cross their intersection should be perpendicular Publication 2755 833 4 2 Installing the Decoder Grounding Replacing LED Label Publication 2755 833 When installing the decoder in a noise polluted industrial environment consider the effects of electromagnetic interference EMI Factors that minimize EMI include proper grounding e shielded cables e correct routing of wires Grounding is an important safety measure in electrical installations With solid state systems grounding also minimizes the effects of noise caused by electromagnetic interference EMI An authoritative source on grounding requirements is the National Electrical Code published by the National Fire Protection Association of Boston Massachusetts Article 250 discusses the types and sizes of wire conductors and safe methods of grounding electrical equipment and components The NEMA Type 1 and Type 4 decoders are shipped with LED indicator labels in six different languages English French German Italian Japanese and Spanish The decoders are shipped with the English label installed and a sheet of five alternate labels loosely packaged If desired replace the English label with another language label To replace the LED indicator label loosen the two screws on the decoder cover and open The LED label insert
285. rameters are discussed in Chapter 9 The sections that follow show how these parameters directly affect the display of data on the AUX terminal and control the type of data entry operations that are allowed at the AUX terminal Displaying Data at the This section shows how to configure the AUX terminal for display AUX Terminal operations You can configure the AUX terminal to display e Bar code data Decoder performance indicators Counter data e Host messages The parameters on the AUX and LCD Display Format configuration screen determine what data is displayed where the data is displayed and on which device Detailed definitions of these parameters appear in Chapter 9 DISPLAY DATA MESSAGE FORMAT Unformatted SCROLL LCD No POSITION O BAR CODE STRINGS O DECODER PERFORMANCE O PACKAGE COUNTER O SYMBOLS NOT READ COUNTER PRIMARY COUNTERS 1 None 0 2 None 3 None 0 4 None 0 5 None 6 None 0 7 None Publication 2755 833 13 8 Configuration AUX Terminal Data Entry Publication 2755 833 DEFAULT PROMPT MESSAGE Displaying Host Messages The AUX terminal can display text messages that are sent from the host using the Display Text Message command Typically this command is used during manual data entry to prompt the user to enter bar code data or take some other action The last section in this chapter describes manual data entry operations To accommodate the many variations in dis
286. rations including e function of decoder supported bar code symbologies e configuration options e stand alone vs host operations e types of memory e decoder operating modes The decoder acquires and decodes video information from one or two scanners The decoder can then send the decoded data to a host device host computer programmable logic controller ASCH terminal or LCD display compare the decoded data to previously stored data and use the results to operate up to eight discrete outputs match code operation The decoder also maintains counters for package count no reads and discrete output operations The decoder supports the following bar code symbologies e Code 39 standard character set e Pharma Code available on DSzP and DDzP catalog numbers only e UPC A and UPC E including optional 2 or 5 digit supplements e EAN 8 and EAN 13 including optional 2 or 5 digit supplements e Code 128 e Codabar e Interleaved 2 of 5 You can configure or monitor decoder operations using the built in configuration screens or by sending commands from a host device such as a PLC controller or computer Both configuration options allow you to e select a bar code symbology for decoding operations e define operating parameters for the scanner s set host message format for decoded bar code data Publication 2755 833 3 2 Overview of Decoder Operations Stand alone Operation Publication 2755 833 e s
287. rd Entry Field Type Options No Select Yes No Read Enables or disables use of the terminal keyboard when the AUX port is set to manual data entry mode The default is No which disables keyboard data entry No Disables the keyboard locally However the host can remotely enable the keyboard for one message using the Display Text Message command as explained later in this chapter Yes Enables the keyboard for data entry Selecting Yes enables you to manually enter data at the keyboard When entry is enabled pressing ESC will cancel the current entry Publication 2755 833 Configuration AUX Terminal Data Entry 13 3 Data entered at the keyboard is sent to the host with the AUX Port Source Identifier if defined and formatted according to the Aux Data Format parameter The data is either formatted like the host message or is unformatted No Read Enables the keyboard for data entry when a no read occurs for a package Selecting No Read allows you to manually enter a single string at the keyboard If a no read occurs the Default Prompt Message displays if defined prompting you to act You can also use the Display Text Message host command at any time to manually prompt for data Data is sent to the host with the AUX Port Source Identifier if defined and formatted according to the Aux Data Format parameter Note For safety considerations data entered at the keyboard cannot be used to control the discrete I O
288. rder host message replacement rules 10 7 Publications related 1 4 Q Question Mark as metacharacter 10 4 as wild card 8 6 with host message replacement rules 10 4 Quiet Zone Ratio Pharma Code 6 11 R Ratio wide to narrow Pharma Code 6 14 Read and No Match Output Condition 7 18 Recalling Configuration Parameters using configuration screens 5 11 Replacing Battery 17 1 Replacing I O Module Fuses 17 2 Reset All Counts 8 2 Reset Status and Primary Counters Function 14 5 Response Codes descriptions of 15 7 Response Mode at end of trigger 3 9 end of trigger 3 9 immediately after valid package 3 9 Restart System Function 14 5 Restoring Default Configuration affect on host communication parameters 5 12 using configuration screens 5 12 S Save Configuration 14 6 Saving Configuration using configuration screen 5 12 Scaning Modes coordinated 3 8 Index 1 9 Scanner A Control capture count 7 6 decode modes 7 2 inter scan timer 7 5 match complete 7 8 no read timer 7 4 Symbols package 7 8 symbols scan 7 7 Scanner B Control 7 8 decode modes 7 9 trigger timeout 7 11 Scanner B Start amp Stop Characters 15 55 Scanner Control configuration 7 1 Scanner Ports Scanner Port A 2 1 Scanner Port B 2 1 Scanners 2 11 available types 2 11 Scanning continuously 7 2 turning la
289. ropean Community Applied Council Directive s Electromagnetic Compatability Directive EMC 89 336 EEC and amending directives 91 263 EEC 92 31 EEC 93 68 EEC We Manufacturer Allen Bradley Company Inc Authorized Allen Bradley subsidary of 1201 South 2nd Street Representative in the Rockwell international GmbH Milwaukee WI 53204 Community and location Dusselberger Str 15 U S A of Responsible Person D 42781 Haan Germany declare under our sole responsibility that the product s name type model batch serial number Industrial barcode mading systems including the Bul 2755 DS and DD family of decoders and the Bul 2755 LD4 and LD8 family of scanners to which this declaration relates is in conformity with the relevant provisions of the following standard s or other normative document s EN 50082 2 1995 Generic Immunity Standard Industrial EN 50081 2 1993 Generic Emission Standard industrial Test Report is maintained at Report No 3530 amp 3556 August 1995 Allen Bradley Company Inc D L S Electronic Systems Inc 1201 South Second Street 1250 Peterson Drive Milwaukee WI 53204 Wheeling iL 60090 re a a ee L We the undersigned hereby declare that the product s specified above conforms to the listed directive s and standard s Manufacturer Authorized Representative in the Community sides through its Responsible Person EEN Sie ha id TA i 5 Signature Me SA AW Full Name Robert Gardiner Full N
290. rs CMD 06H FNC 07H The command code for all diagnostic functions is 06H A function code FNC identifies each command and specifies which command to perform Diagnostic Loop The Diagnostic Loop Command CMD 08H FNC 00H echoes data back to the host The reply returns the same data sent in the Diagnostic Loop Data area of the command The data area can contain up to 122 bytes Publication 2755 833 PCCC Host Commands 16 15 Diagnostic Loop Command High Byte Low Byte 1 STS 00H CMD 06H 0 3 2 5 FNC 00H 4 Diagnostic Loop Data 122 bytes maximum Diagnostic Loop Reply High Byte Low Byte MSB sey S 1 STS 00H CMD Reply 46H 0 3 2 5 4 Diagnostic Loop Data Same data as in command Read Diagnostic Counters The Read Diagnostic Counters command CMD 06H FNC 01H returns diagnostic counter values The command structure looks like this Read Diagnostic Counters Command High Byte Low Byte MSB LSB STS 00H CMD 06H FNC 01H O Aa N O The reply returns values for ten diagnostic counters The reply format looks like this Read Diagnostic Counters Reply High Byte Low Byte MSB LSB Total Message Packets Transmitted 2 bytes Msg ACK Timeout R etries Msg Replies NAK NoMemory Bad Messages Received Msg Replies NAK Solicit ono Aa NY O 10 12 14 Publication 2755 833 16 16 PCCC Host Commands Publication 2755 833 Each diagnostic counter increments when
291. rs more than once within the incoming data ABC will be substituted only for the last occurrence For example 01234567 would become 0ABC4567 and 01231237 would become 0123ABC7 Publication 2755 833 Chapter 1 1 Configuration Host Message Format Host Message Format Function 6 on the Select Operation menu accesses the Host Message Format configuration screen Use this function to configure the message format of bar code data sent to the host The screen displays with the first field highlighted START CHARACTER 228 255 SOURCE IDENTIFIER for AUX A B HEADER STRING FIELD DELIMITER None 255 NUMBER OF FIELDS IN MESSAGE ALL SEND SYMBOLOGY No SEND PACKAGE COUNT No SEND BAR CODE STRINGS Yes SEND DECODER PERFORMANCE No END MESSAGE CrLf DEFAULT NO READ STRING FIELD FIELD NUMBER NO READ REPLACEMENT STRING NUMBER NO READ REPLACEMENT STRING 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 The default settings are displayed the first time you access this screen Make changes appropriate for your application If the factory defaults are satisfactory you can exit the configuration software by pressing Esc twice or move on to the Host Communications configuration screen by pressing Esc Return The parameters are grouped by function on the screen The following pages describe each group of parameters Introduction to Bar code data is sent to the host at the end of a trigger or after a valid Host Message Form
292. s Publication 2755 833 E 6 Connecting to a Host RS 485 Using DH485 Protocol Publication 2755 833 The RS 422 interface uses pins D P R S T U and V of the HOST port connector The transmit data and receive data lines are Pin P Transmits data from the decoder to the host Pin R e Transmits data from the decoder to the host Pins Receives data from the host PinT Receives data from the host RS 422 communication lines are unterminated To enable network termination 120 Ohm resistor in series with a 0 01 microfarad capacitor connect pins U and V together Important We recommend you terminate the RS 422 lines if excessive noise occurs on long RS 422 communication links RS 422 does not use modem control lines However the configuration software does allow optional flow control using XON XOFF characters The options are RS422 No flow control e RS422 XON XOFF Enable XON XOFF flow control The RS 422 communication interface and protocol is selected during configuration See the Host Communications configuration screen The DH485 interface allows you to multi drop up to 31 decoders to each port of the Flexible Interface Module Catalog No 2760 RB Each of the three ports of the module operates as a separate communications network Figure E 5 shows how to connect the NEMA Type 1 decoder to a DH485 network Use Belden cable 9842 or equivalent Connecting to a Host E 7 Figure E 5 Connecting NEMA Ty
293. s NEMA Type 4 E 5 RS 485 connections NEMA Type 1 E 6 RS 485 connections NEMA Type 4 E 7 Host Protocol 12 3 Publication 2755 833 Index Host Trigger start stop scan characters 7 3 I O Module Board 2 5 customer installable options 2 10 ordering options 2 9 T O Modules available types 2 9 connecting to external devices using conduit 4 20 4 22 using NEMA 4 Connector Kit 4 20 field wiring holes 2 6 fuses 4 19 installing in I O Board 4 19 specifications 2 9 wiring 4 20 Independent Scanning Mode 2 2 3 8 Input Modules 2 9 specifications 2 9 18 3 using for AutoLoad INPUT H 1 H 2 Installation AUX terminal 4 15 electrical recommendations 4 1 grounding 4 2 host device 4 16 I O modules 4 19 4 20 mounting decoder 4 3 power cords 4 4 power requirements 4 1 replacing LED Indicator Label Inter Scan Timer equations for 7 5 Inter Scan Timer 7 5 Interleaved 2 of 5 check character 6 4 enabling 6 3 guard bars 6 4 include check character 6 4 specific lengths 6 3 Internal Timer as a trigger source 7 3 L Languages Supported 3 2 Publication 2755 833 Large Buffer description of 12 6 when to use 12 6 Laser Light off 7 2 on 7 2 triggered 7 2 LCD Display 9 1 adjusting contrast 9 10 customer installable option 2 10 display examples 9 8 displaying bar
294. s You can enter a value from 1 to 16 The default is 7 which means at least one symbol on a package must match an entry in the match code table Match Complete is one of ten output conditions that can activate an output See the Output Condition parameter Note The match complete count does not have to equal the Symbols Package setting However the match complete count must be less than or equal to the Symbols Package setting for a match complete condition to occur Scanner B Control Parameters These parameters control the operation of Scanner B Each parameter is defined below The options for each parameter are summarized in a table and explained more fully in the text The default setting for each parameter is displayed in bold letters in the table Configuration Scanner Control Primary Match Table Discrete I O 7 9 Laser Light Refer to Laser Light under Scanner A Parameters earlier in this section for information on Scanner B laser light control Decode Mode Field Type Options Coordinated 1 Coordinated 2 Package Detect Host Select Sets the decode mode for Scanner B The options are Coordinated 1 Coordinated 2 Package Detect and Host The default is Coordinated 1 If you set the scanning mode to either Coordinated mode Scanner B operates in concert with Scanner A and both scanners use the trigger specified for Scanner A The Trigger Timeout parameters is not used when Scanner B operates in coordinat
295. s Manual for the 2755 L7 and L9 Scan Heads Catalog No 2755 ND002 User s Manual for the 2755 L4F and L4R Enhanced Medium Speed Scan Heads Publication 2755 829 User s manual for the 2755 LD4 and LD8 High Performance Visible Laser Diode Scanners Publication 2755 832 Product Data for the 2755 NC16 Gun Adapter Catalog No 2755 2 37 User s Manual for the 2760 RB Flexible Interface Module Catalog No 2760 ND001 User s Manual for the 2760 SFC1 Protocol Cartridge Catalog No 2760 ND003 User s Manual for the 2760 SFC2 Protocol Cartridge Catalog No 2760 ND002 User s Manual for the 1771 DA ASCII I O Module Publication No 1771 6 5 13 User s Manual for the 1771 DB BASIC Module Publication No 1771 6 5 34 Chapter Objectives NEMA Type Enclosures Scanner Ports Chapter 2 Decoder Features This chapter describes features of the Dual Head Bar Code Decoders including available options and accessories It covers e NEMA type enclosures e scanner ports e power supply e LED indicators e serial communication ports HOST port and AUX port e LCD display e discrete input output modules The 2755 DS1_ and DD1_ decoders have NEMA Type 1 enclosures The 2755 DS4_ and 2755 DD4_ decoders have NEMA Type 4 enclosures All connections and ports on the NEMA Type 4 enclosure comply with NEMA 4 standards Although the installation varies for the NEMA Type 1 and Type 4 decoders they have the same features an
296. s operating in an independent mode See Scanning Mode under Scanner B Control Primary Match Table Parameters These parameters define match code entries in the primary match code table You can define up to eight entries here and another 128 entries in the extended match code table described later Each table entry has two parameters e symbology of match code string e match code string Each parameter is defined below The options for each parameter are summarized in a table and explained more fully in the text The default setting for each parameter is displayed in bold letters in the table Publication 2755 833 7 14 Configuration Scanner Control Primary Match Table Discrete I O Publication 2755 833 Symbology 1 8 Field Type Options Code 39 Interleaved 2 of 5 Codabar UPC A UPC E EAN 8 EAN 13 Code 128 Pharma C ode Any Select Applies only to decoders equipped with the optional Pharma Code capabilities Selects the symbology of the match code string 1 8 You can select any one of the symbologies for each primary match code string Note Any is the default symbology for all entries in the match code tables Match Code String 1 8 Field Type Options 0 to 32 characters Edit Text Blank Defines the characters for a specified match code string 1 8 The default is nothing blank which means a match code string is not defined You can enter up to 32 charact
297. s take effect when the AUX port is set to manual data entry mode as described in Chapter 13 Parameters abceeefgg Command Parameter Function Valid Values Parameter 0 No a Enable keyboard entry 1 Yes 2 No Read 0 No b Confirm entry ie Yes 0 Unformatted c Format AUX Keyboard Data isHost Format dee Rubout character for aa oan keyboard data entry 255 None 0 No f Echo keyboard data 1 Yes gg Size of the display 10 through 80 Response rr lt end gt Publication 2755 833 rr response code lt end gt end of message control code ASCII Host Commands 15 65 AX Configure AUX Terminal Data Entry Operations continued Example Command AX111008180 Parameters 111008180 Command Parameter Function Values Parameter a Enable keyboard entry 1 Yes b Confirm entry 1 Yes Format Aux Terminal _ c Keyboard Data 1 Host Format TA Rubout character for ASCII Decimal Value keyboard data entry 008 backspace f Echo keyboard data 1 Yes gg Size of the display 80 Response 00CR O response code CR end of message control code Publication 2755 833 15 66 ASCII Host Commands TM Display Text Message at AUX Terminal and LCD Command Format TMfllstring Function Parameters Command Parameters Sends a message to the AUX port terminal and or LCD Display and optionally enables the keyboard for one message If a text message is not defined the Default Prompt Message is se
298. s the address location for each configuration parameter along with the byte size of the data and the default value To modify a specific parameter send the write command with the appropriate starting address and the appropriate data referenced in Appendix A To modify the configuration data send this command structure Modify or Write Over Configuration Data High Byte Low Byte STS 00H CMD 08H Configuration Data Address 3COH to 5FFH 5 New Configuration Data 122 bytes maximum 127 128 The command includes new configuration data for specified parameters N ow oO fF nN oO Reply Modify or Write Over Configuration Data High Byte Low Byte MSB LSB 1 STS 00H CMD Reply 48H 0 3 TNS 2 An invalid configuration data address returns a status code of 10H invalid address Execute Decoder Functions The unprotected write 08H command is also used to execute decoder functions or commands Appendix A lists the decoder functions you can perform and their respective addresses To execute a command listed in Appendix A send an unprotected write command to the specified command address The command and reply format for executing a decoder function is Publication 2755 833 16 10 PCCC Host Commands Execute Decoder Function High Byte Low Byte MSB gn by y LS STS aw A N O Command Address 600H through 639H 640H 641H Reply High Byte Low Byte MSB LSB STS 00H CMD Reply 48H 0 2 1 3 T
299. sense Command Parameter Parameter Function Valid Values O disable filter LO when package is present l1 enable filter f Enable or disable LO When package is present filter select sense 2 disable filter HI when package is present 3 enable filter HI when package is present Response rr lt end gt rr response code lt end gt end of message control code Example Command IF1 Parameters 1 Command Parameter f Enable or disable 1 enable filter filter selectsense LO when package is present Response 00CR 00 command complete response code CR end of message control code for Carriage Return Publication 2755 833 15 22 ASCII Host Commands BF Configure Scanner B Package Detect Filter and Sense Command Format BFf Function Enables or disables the 15 ms input filter and determines the sense of the package detect signal for Scanner B NOTE This command is valid only for dual head decoders Parameters f disable or enable filter select sense Command Parameter Parameter Function Vala valles O disable filter LO when package is present 1 enable filter i Enable or disable LO when package is present filter select sense 2 disable filter HI when package is present 3 enable filter HI when package is present Response rr lt end gt rr response code lt end gt end of message control code Example Command BF1 Parameters 1 Command Parameter Paramete
300. ser off 7 2 when triggered 7 2 Scanning Mode coordinated 2 2 3 8 independent 2 2 3 8 Scrolling enabling LCD display 9 3 Search Pattern 8 6 Select CRT Type Screen 5 3 Select Field 5 7 Select Language Screen 5 2 14 6 Select Operation Menu 5 3 5 4 caution message on state of outputs 5 4 configure symbology 6 1 display bar code strings function 14 2 display status and primary counters function 14 3 host comunications parameters screen 12 1 host message format screen 11 1 reset status and primary counters function 14 5 restart system function 14 5 select language screen 14 6 Select Operation Screen save configuration 14 6 Send Message to Host at end of trigger 12 6 Publication 2755 833 I 10 Index Publication 2755 833 immediately after valid trigger 12 6 Source in Extended Match Code Table 8 5 Source of Event 7 16 Space Tolerance Pharma Code 6 12 Start amp Stop Characters For Scanner B 15 55 Start Scan Character 12 5 status of counter set 8 3 Stop Scan Character 12 5 Storage Memory 3 6 Supplements EAN 13 6 10 EAN 8 6 9 UPC A 6 7 UPC E 6 8 Symbologies 3 1 6 1 Codabar 6 5 Code 128 and specific lengths 6 6 Code 39 and specific lengths 6 2 EAN 13 and supplements 6 10 EAN 8 and supplements 6 9 enabling EAN 8 6 9 enabling EAN 13 6 10 enabling Pharm
301. should be sent to the host to replace the string that was matched by the search pattern currently in effect Whenever the search pattern is satisfied the replacement pattern defined here will be substituted for the entire string Even if the search pattern is only a portion of the incoming string the entire incoming string is replaced by the replacement pattern For an example of how to replace only a portion of the incoming string see Example 9 at the end of this chapter The resulting string appears in the field defined by the host message field number The string or expression may consist of any valid combination of ASCII characters and metacharacters The default value is Blank Minimum Field Length Field Type Options 0 through 64 0 Edit Numeric Specifies the minimum number of characters in any field that satisfies the rule Fields that are longer than the minimum field length remain unchanged but fields that are shorter than the minimum length are padded to meet the minimum value Fill characters appear either before or after the existing field depending on the field s alignment The default value is 0 which means minimum field length alignment and fill character functions are all disabled Allowable values are any number from 0 to 64 Configuration Host Message Replacement Rules 10 13 Alignment Field Type Options Left Right Select Determines whether the data in the host message should a
302. ssary Publication 2755 833 bar code The vertical bars and spaces found in a bar code symbol bar code density The number of characters which can be represented in a linear inch bar code label A label that carries a bar code and is suitable to be affixed to an article bar code symbol A group of vertical bars that represent a character or group of characters whose spacing is determined by a specific set of rules In most cases human readable characters are printed below the bars Also referred to as a field bar length The bar dimension perpendicular to the bar width bar width The thickness of a bar measured from the edge closest to the symbol s start character to the trailing edge of the same bar bit Binary digit The smallest unit of information in the binary numbering system Represented by the digits 0 and 1 The smallest unit of memory buffer Storage register for the temporary storage of data that allows data to be decoded at different rates buffer full An output condition that occurs when the buffer is full buffer overflow An output condition that occurs when the buffer is full and the decoder produces additional bar code data byte 8 bits operated on as a unit C capture count The number of identical and valid scans which must be decoded for a valid read to occur When capture count is set to V a valid read occurs only if the decoded data matches an entry in the match code table
303. ssary for definitions Decode Mode Field Type Options Continuous Continuous Unique Select Package Detect Host Internal Timer Determines how the decoder starts and stops decoding This parameter affects Scanner A or Scanner A and B when both are operating in coordinated mode See Scanning Mode under Scanner B Control Configuration Scanner Control Primary Match Table Discrete I O 7 3 Continuous The decoder continuously attempts to decode every scan from the scanner There is no start and stop control The continuous mode of operation is useful during initial setup to determine the optimum location of the scanner relative to the bar code labels Use a Symbols Per Package value of for setup The no read condition does not exist in this mode Continuous Unique The decoder continuously attempts to decode Host every scan from the scanner The decoder discards valid reads that are identical to the previous valid read The decoder does not process data send to host or activate appropriate match codes until a new valid read is decoded A valid package in continuous unique mode is a valid read that is different from the previous valid package The no read condition does not exist in this mode A start scan command from a host device triggers the decoder to start decoding Note Refer to the section on host communications for additional information on the start and stop scan commands Package D
304. st Communications Baud Rate Field Type Options 9600 4800 2400 Select 1200 300 19200 38400 Selects the baud rate data transmission speed for the HOST port The default is 9600 the first time the decoder is started From then on operation is determined at restart by the contents of storage memory Bits Char Field Type Options 8 Data 1 Stop 8 Data 2 Stop 7 Data 1 Stop 7 Data 2 Stop Select Selects the number of data and stop bits transmitted with each character via the HOST port The default is 8 Data Bits 1 Stop Bit the first time the decoder is started From then on operation is determined at restart by the contents of storage memory Parity Field Type Options None Select Even Odd Selects the parity bit for each character transmitted or received at the HOST port The default is None the first time the decoder is started From then on operation is determined at restart by the contents of storage memory The contents of storage memory can be reviewed by performing a Recall Parameters are saved to s memory with the Save command Configuration Host Communications 12 3 Host Protocol Field Type Options RS232 RS232 XON XOFF RS232 CTS RTS 1 RS232 CTS RTS 2 R5422 Select R5422 XON XOFF DH485 PCCC 1 DH485 PCCC 2 DH485 ASCII 1 DH485 ASCII 2 Selects a communication interface and protocol for the HOST port The default is RS 232 with no flow contro
305. stop scanning There is a field for both Scanner A and if present Scanner B The default is None which means a stop scan character is not defined If any of the characters below are used as single character commands ACK NAK or Start Characters then the escape sequence ESC must be used with all two character comm start with that character ABC DHIMNO PRST If the single character commands do not use these uppercase characters you do not have t start command sequence For example if N is used as the NAK command then it would b impossible to send the NR command without preceding it with the ESC start command If n is used instead then no start command sequence would be necessary to send an NR cc Therefore we recommend using only lowercase letters for single character command Refer to Chapter 15 for additional information Publication 2755 833 12 6 Configuration Host Communications Publication 2755 833 Large Buffer Field Type Options Yes Select No Enables or disables use of the 8K byte buffer on the HOST port The default is No which disables use of this buffer The 8K byte buffer allows the decoder to decode and buffer messages to the host This feature is useful for applications where the host is incapable of handling high burst rates of data from the decoder If No is selected the decoder will only buffer one message ATTENTION Do not use the large buffer if the data sent to the host must
306. string Function Defines a source identifier for Scanner B Source identifiers are included in messages sent to the host They identify whether the data was scanned by Scanner A or B or entered at the AUX terminal NOTE This command is valid only for dual head decoders Parameters _ Istring Command Parameter l Length of source identifier 0 to 40 String Characters in source identifier Up to 4 characters A zero length string will disable the source identifier Parameter Function Valid Values Response rr lt end gt rr response code lt end gt end of message control code Example Command IB4SCNB Parameters 4SCNB Command Parameter l Length of source identifier 4 String Characters in source identifier SCNB Parameter Function Values Response OOLF 00 command complete response code LF end of message control code for Line Feed Publication 2755 833 15 62 ASCII Host Commands HM Configure Header Message Command Format HMllstring Function Defines a header message for bar code data Parameters _ Ilstring Command Parameter Il Length of header message 00 to 320 String Header message characters Up to 32 characters A zero length string will disable the header message Parameter Function Valid Values Response rr lt end gt rr response code lt end gt end of message control code Example Command HMO03A B Parameters 03A
307. sufficient to produce a valid scan The Auto selection is not recommended when the Decode Mode is set to Continuous If you select 2 5 or 2 or 5 the decoder must decode both the primary label and the supplement to produce a valid scan Enable Pharma Code Symbology Pharma Code Decoders Only Field Type Options No Yes Select Enables decoding of Pharma Code symbols The default of Yes enables decoding for this symbology Select No to disable decoding Configuration Symbology 6 11 Note We recommend starting with the default settings for all Pharma Code parameters except Minimum Number of Bars and Decode Direction which must be determined by your application The complex interrelationships among other Pharma Code options make them best suited for use only by experienced Pharma Code users in unusual instances when the default values do not provide acceptable results Quiet Zone Ratio All Decoders Field Type Options Edit Numeric 4 through 10 5 Specifies the ratio of the width of the clear space before the first bar to the width of the first bar or the width of the clear space after the last bar to the width of the last bar whichever is smaller Valid quiet zone ratio values are 4 to 10 The default is 5 The default value for this parameter has been optimized for most applications and it is unlikely you will ever have a reason to change it Quiet Zone eel i f l Quiet Zone Narrow Bar W
308. symbol density The number of characters per linear inch symbol length The length of the symbol measured from the beginning of the quiet area adjacent to the start character to the end of the quiet area adjacent to a stop character symbology The conventions or rules which govern the formation of characters and strings of characters in bar codes The language of the bar code symbol See bar code symbol symbols per package A value that indicates the number of bar code symbols that comprise a complete package This value applies only to the triggered mode of operation Glossary G 9 symbols per scan A value that indicates the number of bar code symbols expected in a single sweep of the scanning beam U UPC Acronym for Universal Product Code The standard bar code type for retail food packaging in the United States V valid package A scan or group of scans that is comprised of valid reads and satisfies the fields per package parameter valid read A condition that occurs when sufficient valid scans have been decoded to satisfy the capture count valid scan A condition that occurs when sufficient valid fields have been decoded to satisfy fields scan W word A unit of data which contains two bytes 16 bits Publication 2755 833 Numbers 2755 AM55 G 1 G 3 2755 CT1 2 13 2755 IA55 2 9 18 3 H 1 H 3 2755 IB55 2 9 18 3 H 1 H 3 2755 IM55 2 9 18 3 H 1 H 3 2755 NC17
309. t Publication 2755 833 14 4 Display and System Configuration The decoder performance indicators and counters are updated on the display once each second Following is a description of each display item Decoder Performance In continuous mode the performance indicators display the Scanner A and B percent of decoded scans for each scanner In triggered mode the performance indicators display the number of valid scans up to 100 during a trigger active period for Scanner A and Scanner B Note The decoder performance will never exceed the capture count if Send Message to Host is set to Immediately After Valid Package Decoder performance indicators are useful during initial setup when the decoder is in continuous mode to determine the optimum location of the scanner relative to the bar code labels decoder operation to identify a decrease in performance For example if the number of good reads drops significantly the label quality may have degraded or the scan head window may require cleaning Note If a buffer overflow occurs while collecting data for the sample scans the value 999 displays until the condition is corrected This occurs if host communications is suspended Symbols Not Read Displays the number of symbols not read in the triggered Counter mode of operation A no read occurs when the decoder does not decode the correct number of symbols on a package as defined by the Symbols per Package paramet
310. t 2nd specific length 00 through 64 uu 3rd specific length 00 through 64 Ww 4th specific length 00 through 64 ww 5th specific length 00 through 64 XX 6th specific length 00 through 64 yy 7th specific length 00 through 64 zz 8th specific length 00 through 64 A value of 00 in the leftmost field indicates a variable length up to 64 A nonzero value in the left of each field indicates a specific length The specific length for Interleaved 2 of 5 must be an even number A two character Interleaved 2 of 5 symbol requires a length of 2 Response rr lt end gt rr response code lt end gt end of message control code for Carriage Return Publication 2755 833 15 10 ASCII Host Commands SL Configure Specific Length for Bar Code Symbology continued Example Command SL021416000000000000 Parameters 021416000000000000 ee ee vale cc Bar code type 02 Interleaved 2 of 5 SS Ist specific length 140 tt 2nd specific length 160 uu 3rd specific length 00 w Ath specific length 00 ww 5th specific length 000 XX 6th specific length 00 yy 7th specific length 00 ZZ 8th specific length 00 Only Interleaved 2 of 5 symbols with 14 and 16 characters will be decoded Response OOCRLF 00 command complete response code CRLF end of message control code for Carriage Return and Line Feed Publicati
311. t CRT Wl tcbvetettiudve toutes eees Tinana Select Operat S sori Lest cderumeeduddumtousduatues SetSymbology Parameters cece cece eee ees Configure Scanner S si cusivcidumtyeviautaouiean news Customize As Required 200 cee eeee eee ees Connecting the AUX Terminal ccc eee eee eee ees Connecting the Host Device ccc eee eee ees Installing WO Modules oiiscawetiddaedeaw daa weae dade ws Connecting I O Modules to External Devices 0uee Wiring I O Modules ccc ccc cece cece t eee eens Installing Conduit Hubs NEMA Type 4 Decoder Conduit Holes suis rare ance ata a tee Satan wate alee waa Conduit Connections ga waked s go enne ge widens ge wie dense Chapter 5 Chapter Objectives su ciwedeadcen dea deaWaeekaeweus Lees Connect and SetUp AUX Terminal 200005 AUX Terminal Selector c4 oink ohare Sew we Dewees Qa 09 Qa QU 2 o go Sy DOI D WO CO CWOaoOonrHtaa MT WI Ww U NNN Configuration Symbology Table of Contents toc iii Getting Started cctv eueiews aed ehe eee eedee teeade sues 5 2 Configuration Functions 22 eskeseeuekeee sewer ee sewe das 5 4 Editing Conventions 645sc0 esdeeas be deeeaowe vad eae ws 5 5 VOICI ciiai pse a a Gre sheet a arias deaeh 4 a raa de tae 5 6 Moving Around the Screen 0 0 cece eens 5 6 Fiel TYPES ia si cetera daha die dc roads de tema tic oes oo ERA 5 7 SEIEREN covey ed ee abu dareads EAA AANE RA 5 7 Edit PICs sana
312. t Device computer 3 5 connecting to NEMA Type 1 decoder 4 16 connecting to NEMA Type 4 decoder 4 18 constructing cable NEMA Type 1 4 16 constructing cable NEMA Type 4 4 18 Programmable Logic Controller PLC 3 3 supported types 4 16 Host Message examples 10 14 10 19 Index l 5 vs message field and bar code symbol 10 2 Host Message Format contents of 11 2 examples 11 2 parameters 11 4 11 9 Host Message Parameters Codabar check character 6 5 Code 39 check character 6 3 default no read message 11 7 end message terminator 11 7 expand UPC E 6 9 field delimiters 11 5 header message 11 5 I 2 of 5 check character 6 4 no read replacement strings 11 8 number of fields in message 11 5 send bar code strings 11 6 send decoder performance 11 7 send package count 11 6 send symbology 11 6 source identifier 11 4 start character 11 4 Host Message Replacement Rule Screen 10 2 Host Message Replacement Rules described 10 1 number available 10 2 processing order 10 7 uses for 10 1 Host Port connecting host device 4 16 4 18 E 1 connector pinouts NEMA Type 1 4 16 E 1 connector pinouts NEMA Type 4 4 18 E 1 function 2 5 interfaces 2 5 RS 232 connections NEMA Type 1 E 2 RS 232 connections NEMA Type 4 E 3 RS 422 connections NEMA Type 1 E 4 RS 422 connection
313. t Module Back EMF Electromotive Force is sometimes generated when an inductive load is switched off Back EMF takes the path of least resistance into the output module which may cause the module to blow To protect the module from back EMF insert a diode in parallel with the inductive device to dissipate back EMF Output Module Applications G 3 Figure G 3 Using diode to protect module MOD 1 8 DC Output Module Connector Block 7 2a xs r Fuse o o N Enclosure a A Conduit Hole DC Source Output module functions as switch nota power source Publication 2755 833 Appendix H Electrical Interfaces for AutoLoad Applications There are three ways to activate the AutoLoad function described in Chapter 5 1 12 VDC power supply terminal on I O Module board connects to input module in position 8 of I O Module Board and a normally opened N O contact providing power to the input module See Figure H 1 2 External AC or DC power source connects to input module in position 8 of I O Module Board and a normally opened N O contact providing power to the input module See Figure H 2 3 A normally opened N O contact connects directly to pins in AUX Port Connector This method does not require an I O Module Board with installed input module or a power source See Figure H 3 AutoLoad Input Module Application powered internally Figure H 1 illustrates the AutoLoad Inp
314. t if the data is host formatted will be the same as the no read package AUX Terminal Screen Configuration AUX Terminal Data Entry 13 9 Enter Carton Data 12345 Decoder Operations Host Recieves Packa Package 1 Sends Default Prompt Message to AUX Terminal no read no read 1 l Keyboard enabled for package 1 no read gt 12345 1 AUX Terminal Screen Example 2 What happens if you have not completed entering the data at the keyboard and the next package arrives If the next package is a valid read it will be sent to the discretes I O and the host The package count will increment This will continue with each subsequent valid read When the manual data entry is complete it will be sent to the host with the package count of the last package read Enter Carton Data 12 Enter Carton Data 1234 Decoder Operations Host Recieves Package Package 1 Sends Default Prompt Message to AUX Terminal _ no read r no read 1 Keyboard enabled for package 1 no read Package 2 Data entry started 2 Not completed before package 2 arrives 16543 16543 Data entry continues Package 3 Not complete before package 3 arrives 3 24678 E 24678 Data entry complete gt 12345 3 If the next package or any of the packages processed before the manual data entry is completed is a no read the decoder will send only a single message T
315. t in the programmed state until it is changed with host command or via the AUX terminal configuration screens The condition field on the AUX will display Open or Closed Publication 2755 833 15 32 ASCII Host Commands OH Hold Output Open Closed continued Example Command OH2001000 Parameters 2001000 Command Parameters Parameter Function Values n Discrete output number 2 ff State of discrete output 00 Hold Open ttt Time in milliseconds that 1000 milliseconds output remains held open Response 00CR 00 command complete response code CR end of message control code for Carriage Return Publication 2755 833 ASCII Host Commands MR Read Primary Match Code Table Entry Command Format MRn 15 33 Function Read match code configuration for table entry 1 8 Parameters n match code table entry number 1 through 8 Command Parameter Function Valid Values Parameters n Match code table entry number 1 through 8 f RESERVED 1 01 Code 39 02 Interleaved 2 of 5 03 Codabar 04 UP C A 05 UP C E cc Bar code symbology O6 FAN 8 07 EAN 13 08 Code 128 09 Pharma Code 16 Any Il Length of match string 00 to 32 string Match string up to 32 characters This value is always returned as 1 Response nfccllstring lt end gt rr lt end gt lt end gt end of message control code rr response code lt end gt end of message control code Example C
316. t position 21 Configuration AUX and LCD Display Parameters Select starting positions for other data that is greater than the length of the host messages This will allow host messages and other data to display at the same time without overwriting each other LCD Display Examples The section provides examples to illustrate how data is displayed on the LCD Display and how the configuration parameters control the format of the displayed data Example 1 In Example 1 the LCD Display is enabled to display bar code data decoder performance values primary counter 1 primary counter 4 and primary counter 8 fAUX and LCD DISPLAY FORMAT DISPLAY DATA KAMUN lt Enables LCD to display data MESSAGE FORMAT Unformatted lt Displays unformatted bar code data SCROLL LCD No _ __ Disables scrolling isplays bar code data starting in position 1 isplays decoder performance values at position 15 1 BAR CODE STRINGS O PACKAGE COUNTER O SYMBOLS NOT READ COUNTER 0 2 None 0 3 None 28 4 None a Displays Primary Counter 4 at position 28 0 5 None 0 6 None 0 7 None 35 8 None lt Displays Primary Counter 8 at position 35 Commands ESC Change SPACE Cursor Control ARROWS When scrolling is not enabled the display operates as a single line 40 character display Line 1 displays characters in positions 1 20 Line 2 displays characters
317. t the AUX terminal Cause The AUX port is set to configuration mode not manual data entry mode Solution Using one of the AUX Terminal Selectors switch the AUX port to manual data entry mode See Chapter 13 Problem No communication between decoder and host device Cause Communication parameters baud rate parity stop bits host protocol of decoder are not set correctly or the parameters were not saved and the decoder restarted Solution Make appropriate changes to communication parameters SAVE the configuration and RESTART the decoder Cause Improperly connected cable Solution Check connections Cause Improperly fabricated cable Solution Verify connections using Appendix E Cause Flexible Interface Module Catalog No 2760 RB is not configured properly Solution Check module configuration Bar Code Decoders Catalog Numbers 2755 DD1_ 2755 DD4_ 2755 DS1_2755 DS4_ Specifications Electrical Input Line Voltage Input Line Frequency Nominal Power 1 0 Module Protection Output Module Voltage C urrent Catalog No 2755 0B5S Catalog No 2755 0A5S Catalog No 2755 0M5S Input Module Voltage Catalog No 2755 IB5S Catalog No 2755 IA5S Catalog No 2755 IM5S Mechanical Enclosure Catalog No 2755 D_1_ Catalog No 2755 D_4_ LED Indicators POWER ON CPU ACTIVE COMMUNICATIONS LASERONA TRIGGER ACTIVE A VALID READA LASER ON B TRIGGER ACTIVE B VALID READ B DISCRETE 1 0 1 to 8 W
318. t you can press e Esc to access the command line e Space to change the contents of a select field or edit field e arrow keys to move around the configuration screen Select Mode When pressing Space in a select field the help line looks like this In select mode you can press e Esc to cancel the select operation and close the field The field is restored to its initial contents e Space to toggle through the available selections e Backspace to return to the previous screen e Return to accept the selection and close the field Edit Mode When pressing Space in an edit field the help line looks like this EDIT Cancel ESC Enter RETURN Erase Char BACKSPACE In edit mode you can press Publication 2755 833 5 10 Introduction to AUX Terminal Configuration e Esc to cancel the edit operation and close the field The field is restored to its initial contents e Return to accept the entered data and close the field e Backspace while editing to erase the last character Command Line Press Esc while in any configuration screen to access the command line NEXT PAGE THIS PAGE RECALL SAVE DEFAULT The command line displays with NEXT PAGE highlighted The following keys are active in the command line Esc Exits configuration mode and returns to the Select Operation menu Return Accepts the highlighted command and performs the operation Space Toggles through options in the command line
319. ter a value from 7 to 8190 in each field or leave the field blank The default value for each field is blank Note The Code Verification List is independent of the Match Code Table described in the User Manual Publication 2755 833 Scanner Control Primary Match Code Table Discrete I O Chapter F4 Configuration Scanner Control Primary Match Table Discrete I O Option 2 on the Select Operation configuration screens Use this function to configure scanner control match codes and discrete I O operations The screen displays with the first field highlighted SCANNER A CONTROL SCANNER B CONTROL LASER LIGHT LASER LIGHT Triggered DECODE MODE Continuous DECODE MODE Coordinated 1 NO READ TIMER None msec TRIGGER TIMEOUT None msec INTER SCAN TIMER None msec CAPTURE COUNT 2 SYMBDLS SCAN 1 PACKAGE DETECT INPUT SYMBOLS PACKAGE 1 A FILTER No SENSE LO Package MATCH COMPLETE 1 B FILTER No SENSE LO Package MATCH CODE TABLE DISCRETE I O Enabled l AiB None 0 to 9 0 0 0 9 0 Commands ESC Change SPACE Cursor Control ARROWS The factory defaults are displayed the first time you access this screen Make changes appropriate for your application If the factory defaults are satisfactory you can return to the Select Operation menu by pressing Esc twice The parameters
320. terface We refer to this terminal as the AUX terminal The AUX port can switch between two modes of operations Decoder Configuration The AUX terminal is used to configure and monitor decoder operations Manual Data Entry The AUX terminal is used to e enter data at the keyboard when the unattended scanners cannot read a label This feature is useful when labels are damaged or missing e display messages from the host e display bar code data output counters and decoder status The decoder features an AUX Terminal jumper on the main logic board to switch between configuration and manual data entry operations Another way to switch between these two modes is to connect specific pins in the AUX port connector The port and logic board jumpers are initially set for decoder configuration operations Important The two operational modes described above are mutually exclusive You can use the port for either decoder configuration or for manual data entry functions but not both Refer to Chapter 13 for additional information Host Port Power Connector and On Off Switch Memory Backup Discrete I O Modules Decoder Features 2 5 The HOST port supports RS 232 RS 422 and RS 485 using Allen Bradley DH485 protocol interfaces The HOST port allows the exchange of data between the decoder and a host computer or Allen Bradley PLC controller The NEMA Type 1 decoder uses an IEC 320 power entry connector The NEMA Type 4 decode
321. terleaved 2 of 5 character is computed as a Modulus 10 sum of all characters value as specified in the AIM specification USS I 2 5 Include Interleaved 2 of 5 Check Character Field Type Options No Yes Select Controls whether the Interleaved 2 of 5 check character computed by the decoder is included in the message sent to the host The default is No which means the Interleaved 2 of 5 check character is not sent Interleaved 2 of 5 Guard Bars Field Type Options No Yes Select Controls verification of the presence of guard bars on Interleaved 2 of 5 symbols The default of No results in no verification Select Yes to activate guard bar verification Configuration Symbology 6 5 Codabar Field Type Options No Yes Select Enables disables decoding of Codabar labels The default of No disables decoding of this symbology Select Yes to enable decoding Codabar Specific Lengths Field Type Options Edit Numeric 0 through 64 0 Sets length checking for Codabar labels The default is 0 which means the decoder does not check lengths You can specify up to 8 code lengths maximum of 64 characters The code length includes the check character and the start and stop characters If you specify a code length other than 0 the decoder will only decode labels with the number of characters specified Codabar Check Character Field Type Options No Yes Select Controls whether
322. ters set to All from using it For example resetting the symbol number to All in the configuration illustrated above results in a host message of AB11ABBA1 This occurs because AB1 the first symbol read satisfies the rule and is used for host field one Since AB1 has now been used and both symbol number and host message field number are set to All AB1 won t be considered for the second pass through the rule Instead 1AB will satisfy the rule on the second pass and will be used for host field two and will be marked so it will not be considered for the third pass BAI satisfies the third pass and will be used for host field three Find String Containing Field Type Options Any valid string up to 24 Edit Text characters in length Blank If not blank enables the selected rule number and specifies a string for which to search among incoming symbols The string may consist of any valid combination of ASCII characters and metacharacters All the Find String Containing fields are empty by default which disables all host message replacement rules Only enabled rules will affect decoder performance All rules are empty and therefore disabled at default startup Publication 2755 833 10 12 Configuration Host Message Replacement Rules Publication 2755 833 Replace Entire String With Field Type Options Any valid string up to 24 Edit Text characters in length Blank Defines the string or expression that
323. th 0 0 Alignment Right Right Fill Character None None Host Message Field 1 2 Number The above rules allow the host to receive the symbol data in reverse order from the order it was decoded The first symbol decoded symbol number 1 will be sent as field number 2 while symbol number 2 will be sent first Publication 2755 833 Configuration Host Message Replacement Rules 10 17 Example 5 Sorting Symbols by Data Identifiers Rule 1 Rule 2 Rule 3 Rule 4 parameter Value Value Value Value Source A B A B A B A B Symbology Any Any Any Any Symbol Number All All All All Find String 4P Containing AQ AS Nf Replace Entire 2 String With 1 Qty 1 1 1 Minimum Field Length v i Alignment Right Right Right Right Fill Character None None None None Host Message Field Number 1 2 i 4 This example illustrates the effects of sorting host data using data identifiers Specifications such as AIAG and ODETTE use these unique characters to identify specific data within a group of symbols These characters are embedded into the encoded Bar Code symbol Although not always printed in the human readable text they appear as the first character or group of characters in the symbol In this example data are sorted so that the part number quantity serial number and supplier identification are sent to the host in that particular order By using the pare
324. the bottom of the screen Press ENTER to select the highlighted Next Page NEXT PAGE THIS PAGE RECALL SAVE DEFAULT The Scanner Control screen will appear SCANNER A CONTROL SCANNER B CONTROL LASER LIGHT LASER LIGHT Triggered DECODE MODE Continuous DECODE MODE Coordinated 1 NO READ TIMER None msec TRIGGER TIMEOUT None msec INTER SCAN TIMER None msec CAPTURE COUNT 2 SYMBDLS SCAN 1 PACKAGE DETECT INPUT SYMBOLS PACKAGE 1 A FILTER No SENSE LO Package MATCH COMPLETE 1 B FILTER No SENSE LO Package MATCH CODE TABLE DISCRETE 1 0 Enabled 1 0 to 9 0 0 to 9 0 Commands ESC Change SPACE Cursor Control ARROWS While your actual operation will vary depending on your application you will want to follow the same basic steps during initial scanner setup Those steps include 1 Select the scanner based on the narrow element width the narrowest bar or space and desired reading distance Refer to Bar Code Site Survey Pub No 2755 939 to verify all important aspects of your own application Consult the scanner s Product Data Sheet or User Manual for read ranges Publication 2755 833 Installing the Decoder 4 11 2 Turn the decoder off and connect the scanner to the decoder 3 Even if your application will use a host computer external display discrete I O
325. the decoder is required to compute and verify a code check character for Codabar bar codes The code check character ensures that the data is read correctly The default is No which means the decoder treats all decoded characters as data The Codabar character is computed as a Modulus 16 sum of all characters value as specified in the AIM specification USS Codabar Include Codabar Check Character Field Type Options No Yes Select Controls whether the Codabar check character computed by the decoder is included in the message sent to the host The default is No which means the Codabar check character is not sent Publication 2755 833 6 6 Configuration Symbology Publication 2755 833 Code 128 Field Type Options No Yes Select Enables disables decoding of Code 128 labels The default of No disables decoding of this symbology Select Yes to enable decoding Code 128 Specific Lengths Field Type Options Edit Numeric 0 through 64 0 Sets length checking for Code 128 labels The default is 0 which means the decoder does not check lengths You can specify up to 8 code lengths maximum of 64 characters The code length does not include the check character or the start and stop characters If you specify a code length other than 0 the decoder will only decode labels with the number of characters specified The decoder uses the specific length parameter in three ways e The decoder discar
326. the duration set by the output duration parameter If a duration is set to 0000 the LED will not change although the counters still increment After making corrections we recommend you SAVE the changes and RESTART the decoder Cause Outputs disabled Solution Restart decoder Problem Output LED indicator operates but output does not Cause Improper connections Solution Check connections to output modules Verify that power is present Check polarity of DC modules Cause Output module fuse blown Solution Determine reason for blown fuse correct problem and then replace fuse Cause Defective output module Solution Replace defective module with new module Problem Output module fuse 77104 899 01 blows Cause Inductive device used with module has an inrush current that exceeds module specifications Solution Replace the fuse and use a device rated within the specification Problem Output module Catalog No 2755 OBS5S blows Cause Excessive back EMF of inductive load Solution Install a rectifier diode in parallel with the module See Appendix G Maintenance and Troubleshooting 17 7 Problem Characters do not display or are difficult to read on the LCD Display Cause Inadequate contrast Solution Improve readability of characters on LCD Display by adjusting LCD Display potentiometer on main logic board See Chapter 9 for details Problem AUX Terminal is set to manual data entry mode a
327. these terms The following conventions are used in this manual e All configuration menus and screens are approximate renderings of what you see on the terminal screen although Allen Bradley reserves the right to make minor modifications to any menu or screen to help improve performance e A symbol or word in brackets represents a single key you press on the computer keyboard For example Esc Enter Backspace On some computers the Enter key is labelled or Return e The built in configuration screens of the decoder have many configuration parameters which are referred to throughout the manual Parameter names are italicized within text e Information which you can select or enter into the menus or screens appear in the text in bold type Publication 2755 833 1 4 Using this Manual Related Publications Publication 2755 833 We have prepared this manual assuming you are using a complete implementation of the product a dual head scanner with Pharma Code capabilities and LCD screen You should apply its contents as appropriate to your own implementation For instance references to Scanner B will not apply to single head decoders We refer to all possible configurations of series 2755 decoders NEMA Type 1 or Type 4 single or dual head with or without the optional LCD screen or with or without Pharma Code capabilities as the decoder Other publications to which you may want to refer include User
328. tion Only one of the devices in the network must have the cable shield connected to chassis ground Do this by connecting shield to pin A instead of pin L Enable line termination for the device at each end of the network To enable line termination connect pins M and N together For all other devices in the network leave pins M and N open The following parameters are fixed for DH485 communications e 8 Data bits e Even parity e 1 Stop Bit Publication 2755 833 Connecting to a Host E 9 The host protocol options are DH485 PCCC 1 PCCC commands with write replies DH485 PCCC 2 PCCC commands without write replies DH485 ASCH 1 ASCII commands with responses DH485 ASCH 2 ASCII commands without responses The communication interface and host protocol is selected during configuration See the Host Communications configuration screen Publication 2755 833 Appendix F Protocol Selection The following table lists the available options for host communications Flow Control Communications Application Configuration Link Layer Layer Selections ACK NAK ASC RS232 ACK Character Defined NAK Character Defined Se ec RS232 XON XOFF Physical Interface XON XOFF XON XOFF ACK NAK ASC RS232 XON XOFF ACK Character Defined NAK Character Defined RTS CTS ASC RS232 RTS CTS 1 Modem Controls RTS CTS ACK NAK ASC RS232 RTS CTS 1 Modem Controls ACK Character Defined NAK Character Def
329. tion 2755 833 function une o Command Function Symbologies 15 8 CT Configure Bar Code Symbology and Supplements 15 9 SL Configure Bar Code Specific Length 15 11 cc Configure Code 39 2 of 5 Codabar Check Characters 15 12 CG Configure 2 of 5 Guard Bar 15 13 CQ Configure Quiet Zone 15 14 CF Configure Code 128 FNC1 Character 15 15 CV Configure Code Verification List 15 16 CP Configure Pharma Code Scanner Control 15 18 SC Configure Scanner A Control 15 20 PB Configure Scanner B Control 15 21 IF Configure Scanner A Package Detect Filter and Sense 15 22 BF Configure Scanner B Package Detect Filter and Sense 15 23 BL Configure Scanner B Laser Mode Primary Match Code Table 15 24 SW Write Scanner Source to Match Code Table 15 25 AB Auto load Begin 15 25 AE Auto load End 15 26 AL Auto load 15 28 OS Set Output Normally Open Normally Closed 15 29 Oc Set Output Condition and Duration 15 31 OH Hold Output Open Closed 15 33 MR Read Primary Match Code Table Entry 1 8 15 34 MW Write Primary Match Code Table Entry 1 8 15 35 CM Clear Primary Counter 1 8 15 36 co Clear All Primary Output C ounters Extended Match Code Table 15 25 AB Auto load Begin 15 25 AE Auto load End 15 26 AL Auto load 15 36 CA Clear Extended Match Counters 15 37 SE Set Extended Match Counter 15 38 RC Read Extended Match Counter 15 39 SM Set Extended Match Data 15 41 RP Read Extended Match Data 15 43 RA Read All Extended Counters 15 45 cs Disable Extended Match Code Set
330. tion Parameter Bytes Default in bold 900H write text message to AUX LCD string length 0 128 0 Empty string 128 characters 901H write text message to AUX LCD and enable keyboard entry 0 128 0 Empty string length 128 characters string Series B Configuration Parameters OEQOH OEFFH Number of Acceptable Values PCCC Address Configuration Parameter Bytes Default in bold E10 Verify Interleaved 2 of 5 guard bars 1 0 No 1 Yes Scanner source of event 1 Scanner source of event 2 Scanner source of event 3 Scanner source of event 4 Scanner source of event 5 Scanner source of event 6 Scanner source of event 7 Scanner source of event 8 E19 Laser B On mode 1 0 Continuous 1 Triggered 2 0ff E1A Set number of Fields in host_message 1 0 16 0 ALL E1B FNC1 Character 1 00 FFh 00 Ignore Quiet Zone Ratio 1 4 10 5 Default 0 Use Default Publication 2755 833 PCCC Address Scanner B Start Scan Character Scanner B Stop Scan Character atch Set 1 1 16 ded Configuration Parameter atch Set 2 17 32 Decoder Configuration Addresses A 13 Number of Acceptable Values Bytes Default in bold ASCII 0 255 255 None 255 255 None Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled E21 Extended Extended Extended E25 Extended atch Set 3 33 48 atch Set 4 49 64 atch Set 5 65 80 atch
331. tion between 1 and 40 For example to start the display at character position 30 select 30 0 Position Primary Counters Field Type Options 0 through 40 0 Edit Numeric Defines the character position at which to start displaying the 6 digit primary output counters 1 8 The default of 0 disables the display of the specified output counter To start the output counter display at a specific position enter a starting character position between 1 and 40 For example to start the display at character position 30 select 30 Remember each output counter occupies 6 character positions If you display more than one counter allow enough positions for each counter to prevent data from overwriting other data o Note All of the output counters 1 8 are formatted the same way Displaying Host Messages The LCD Display can display text messages that are sent from the host using the ASCII or PCCC form of the Display Text Message command depending on the host protocol you are using Refer to Chapters 15 and 16 for additional information on ASCII and PCCC commands The Default Prompt Message and host messages always start in position 1 To prevent other data fro overwriting these messages on the LCD Display select a position greater than the message length LCD scrolling Publication 2755 833 9 6 Publication 2755 833 Configuration AUX and LCD Display Parameters ASCII Command The Display Text Message TM comma
332. tion may occur if host communications is suspended if an XOFF is sent to the decoder via either the Host or AUX Port The performance indicator displays 999 until the buffer overflow condition is cleared Configuration Scanner Control Primary Match Table Discrete I O 7 19 AutoLoad The corresponding output counter increments each time the buffer overflow condition occurs Configures the specified output to load bar code data from the first valid package s into the match code table After configuring one or more outputs for AutoLoad you can activate AutoLoad in one of three ways 1 Restart system using Select Operation menu or host command Refer to the examples for additional information 2 Configure Output 8 for AutoLoad INPUT and apply the appropriate input voltage to the input module in I O location 8 See AutoLoad INPUT and Appendix H 3 Connect a normally opened N O contact to specific pins in the AUX connector as shown in Appendix H The AutoLoad function activates when the contacts close Note This method does not require an I O Module Board with an installed input module Note The first Autoload does not increment the counter After activating the AutoLoad function and if the Symbology parameter is set to Any then bar code fields 32 characters maximum are sequentially loaded into the match code table until one of the following occurs Symbols Package setting is satisfied I
333. tion of guard bar p on 2 5 symbols 1 Yes 0 No Response rr lt end gt rr response code lt end gt end of message control code Example Command CG1 Parameters 1 Command Parameters Enable verification of guard bar _ a on I 2 5 symbols TISS Response 00CR Parameter Function Values 00 command complete response code CR end of message control code for Carriage Return Publication 2755 833 ASCII Host Commands 15 13 CQ Configure Quiet Zone Command Format CQaa Function Configures the General Quiet Zone Ratio Parameters aa Command Parameters Parameter Function Valid Values 00 Defaults aa The Quiet Zone Ratio 04 10 Response rr lt end gt rr response code lt end gt end of message control code Example Command CQ07 Parameters 07 Command Parameter Function Values aa Set Quiet Zone Ratio to 7 Response 00CR 00 command complete response code CR end of message control code for Carriage Return Publication 2755 833 15 14 ASCII Host Commands CF Configure Code 128 FNC1 Character Command Format CFaaa Function Selects return value for Code 128 FNC1 Character Parameters aaa Command Param ters Parameter Function Valid Values Select Code 128 FNC1 000 Discard aaa Character 001 255 FNC1 Character Response rr lt end gt rr response code lt end gt end of message control code Example
334. to 40 or Ignore The Ignore value allows any amount of tolerance between bars of the same nominal width The default value is 75 15 The default value for this parameter has been optimized for most applications and it is unlikely you will ever have a reason to change it The decoder will reject a symbol if the width of two bars of the same nominal width differs by more than the bar tolerance value Select Ignore to prevent the decoder from rejecting a symbol based on width differences between bars of the same nominal width Minimum Number of Bars Pharma Code Decoders Only Field Type Options Edit 3 through 12 5 Specifies the least number of bars that must be present within a Pharma Code symbol for the decoder to perform a decode Possible values are 3 to 12 The default is 5 If the Code Verification List contains values the decoder will ignore the minimum bar setting and decode only those symbols that have values in the list If the Code Verification List has no values the decoder will reject all symbols that contain fewer bars than the minimum bar setting Publication 2755 833 6 14 Configuration Symbology Publication 2755 833 Decode Direction Scanner A or B Pharma Code Decoders Only Field Type Options Forward Select Reverse Sets the direction the decoder uses to decode a scanned label Direction values are either Forward or Reverse The default is Forward The decoder uses the decode
335. tring With 1 Minimum Field Length 0 Alignment Right Fill Character None Host Message Field Number 1 This example strips leading zeroes off the decoded symbols For example the symbol 00012345678905 would be sent to the host as 12345678905 Configuration Host Message Replacement Rules 10 19 Example 8 Stripping Unwanted Characters Parameter Rule 1 Value Source AJB Symbology UPC A Symbol Number All Find String Containing Nove Replace Entire String With 2 Minimum Field Length 0 Alignment Right Fill Character None Host Message Field Number 1 This rule allows the number system character first character and the next 5 characters the manufacturer s identification code to be dropped when the data is sent to the host This technique can be useful in obtaining maximum throughput as it helps minimize communication and host program sorting time Example 9 Substituting Characters Within a String Parameter Rule 1 Value Source AJB Symbology Any Symbol Number All Find String Containing X123 Replace Entire String With 1ABC 3 Minimum Field Length 0 Alignment Right Fill Character None Host Message Field Number 1 This example will substitute ABC for 123 within the string Note that if 123 appea
336. ts Enable Interleaved 2 of 5 0 Guard Bars No Enable Codabar 0 peer alnmneen o Supplements None 0 Supplements None 0 Supplements None 0 Supplements None Check Characters 0 Include No 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Interleaved 2 of 5 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Bar Gode symbology Lengits code 128 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Codabar 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Enable Pharma Code Yes On Pharma Code units only Quiet Zone Ratio Default m v Space Tolerance Pharma Code Bar Tolerance pa v Wide to Narrow Bar Ratio 2 Minimum Number of Bars 5 Scanner A Decode Direction Forward Scanner B Decode Direction Forward Code Verification List Blank Laser Light Triggered Decode Mode Package Detect No Read Timer None 0000 msec Inter S can Timer None 0000 msec Scanner A Control CapureCont Poo Count 5 Symbols P ackage Match Complete Scanner B Control Decode Mode Coordinated 1 Trigger Timeout None 0000 msec Publication 2755 833 B 2 Factory Default Settings Category of Parameters Parameter Default S etting E LT Match Code Text String Blank Match Code Table 1 8 O Normally Open A for DS AJB A or B for DD Scanner A Filter No LO Package Package Detect Input Scanner B Filter No LO Package Status of Counter Set Enabled A for DS AJB A or B for DD Extended Match Code Table i Blank no outputs selected Display Data None Scroll LCD Display No Bar Code Strings Position
337. tting is midrange the decoder will not reject symbols based on the wide to narrow bar ratio setting Instead all bars greater than or equal to the midrange are wide bars and all bars less than the midrange are narrow bars Select midrange to prevent the decoder from rejecting a symbol based on the wide to narrow bar ratio Note When set to midrange the decoder will reject any symbol that contains bars that exactly equal the midrange width Code Verification List Pharma Code Decoders Only Field Type Options 7 through 8190 Blank Edit Defines a list of numeric values the decoder uses to validate decoded Pharma Code Symbols Because the orientation of a Pharma Code label determines its value you can use the Code Verification List to enhance data security when the value of the symbol is known The decoder compares the value of the decoded symbol to all entries in the Code Verification List If the value is in the list a valid read occurs If the value is not in the list the decode is discarded If all fields are left blank the list is ignored and the decoder processes reads normally This prevents inaccurate reads resulting from incorrect label orientation decode configuration errors or misreads due to poor label quality Note If any value appears in the table then only symbols that match an entry in the table will match The Code Verification List holds up to 16 values Each field is numbered from to 16 You can en
338. unter 229240 229253 229263 229268 229285 229322 229327 229336 229345 229361 229371 229391 229427 229433 229438 229449 229456 229466 229476 229493 229517 yy 0 98 0 96 99 0 0 97 0 99 99 0 0 97 0 98 97 98 0 96 99 0 0 97 96 0 95 0 0 97 99 0 96 0 0 95 98 99 0 Publication 2755 833 Introduction to Host Message Replacement Rules Chapter 1 0 Configuration Host Message Replacement Rules Function 5 on the Select Operation menu accesses the Host Message Replacement Rules configuration screen Use this function to modify the message sent to the host SOURCE AiB SYMBOLOGY Any SYMBOL NUMBER ALL FIND STRING CONTAINING REPLACE ENTIRE STRING WITH MINIMUM FIELD LENGTH O ALIGNMENT Right FILL CHARACTER None HOST MESSAGE FIELD NUMBER ALL WAATMAUNE BAR CODE STRING FIELD IN HOST MESSAGE Rule does not match Host message replacement rules may not be required in every application They are unnecessary when your needs include simple object counting or collection of raw bar code data However host message replacement rules will prove useful when you need to substitute a predetermined output message for specific bar code data during decoding With them you can e send data in a particular predefined order regardless of the order in which the labels were read e mask bar code characters to simplify operations and speed processing e truncate or pad
339. ur search and replace strings perform as you expect them to under the conditions you are liable to experience Table 10 A Search pattern metacharacters position dependent Character Description and Use Note The following two metacharacters are position dependent They must appear in the location specified to be matched If the circumflex is used as the first character in the search pattern it indicates that the characters other metacharacters expressions or strings must occur at the beginning of the string to be matched Note that the circumflex has a special meaning if used within square brackets as explained elsewhere in this chapter When the dollar sign is used as the last character in the search pattern it indicates that the characters other metacharacters expressions or strings must occur at the end of the string to be matched Table 10 B Search pattern metacharacters wildcard Character Description and Use The period represents any single character and is used as a single character wildcard Publication 2755 833 Configuration Host Message Replacement Rules 10 5 Table 10 C Search pattern metacharacters string manipulation Character Description and Use Note These metacharacters refer to the character metacharacter string or expression that immediately precedes them The question mark instructs the rule to match either no occurrence or one occurrence of what precedes it Th
340. ure Default P rompt Message for AUX Terminal and LCD 15 70 PR Read Package Counter 15 43 RA Read All Extended Counts 15 38 RC Read Extended Match Count 15 75 RD Set Configuration to Defaults Save and Restart 15 76 RE Restart 15 74 RN Save Configuration to Storage Memory and Restart 15 41 RP Read Extended Match Data 15 46 RS Read Extended Match Set Status 15 74 SA Save Configuration to Storage Memory No Restart 15 18 SC Configure Scanner A Control 15 49 SD Enable LCD Scrolling 15 37 SE Set Extended Match Count 15 52 SF Set Default Search Strings 15 9 SL Configure Bar Code Specific Length 15 39 SM Set Extended Match Data 15 50 SR Set Search and Replace Rule for Host Message Fields 15 24 SW Write Scanner Source to Match Code Table 15 66 Display Text Message at AUX Terminal and LCD The format or structure of the two character commands is 1 2 3 4 Start Command Parameters Terminator Command Code Sequence 1 Start Command Sequence Contains the escape sequence lt ESC gt The table below defines the ASCII and Hexadecimal equivalents of each character of the command sequence ASCII and Hexadecimal Equivalents Start Command Sequence Character ASCII Hex ESG 27 1B 61 3D 33 21 Publication 2755 833 15 6 ASCII Host Commands Publication 2755 833 Note The start command sequence is optional The lt ESC gt sequence differentiates two character commands from single character commands If any of
341. ure your decoder The examples show data transmitted by the decoder The configuration parameters for the message were set up as follows Publication 2755 833 Configuration Host Message Format 11 3 START CHARACTER 35 y SOURCE IDENTIFIER for AUX A L7 A B HEADER STRING Data From Scanner A FIELD DELIMITER 34 vou NUMBER OF FIELDS IN MESSAGE SEND SYMBOLOGY Yes SEND PACKAGE COUNT SEND BAR CODE STRINGS Yes SEND DECODER PERFORMANCE ND MESSAGE DEFAULT NO READ STRING FIELD FIELD NUMBER NO READ REPLACEMENT STRING NUMBER NO READ REPLACEMENT STRING 9 10 11 Note A double delimiter two quotation marks in this example indicate the end of bar code data Example 1 If one Code 39 label is decoded the decoder transmits L7 AData From Scanner A 01001122334455 000013CRLF Header Message End Message Characters Source Identifier Package Count Start Character End of Package Double Delimiter Bar Code Data Code 39 Symbology Type Indicator Field Delimiter Example 2 If two Code 39 labels are scanned on a single package the decoder transmits 7 AData From Scanner A 01998877665 01001122334 000014CRLF j End Message Characters Header Message Package Count Source Identifier End of Package Double Delimiter Start Character Bar Code Data Code 39 Symbology Type Indicator Field Delimiter Bar Code Data Code 39 Symbology Type Indicator Field Delimiter Publication 2755 833 11 4
342. ures you will retain those parameter settings even after lengthy periods without power Configure Symbology Chapter 6 Configuration Symbology Option 1 on the Select Operation menu accesses the Symbology configuration screen Use this function to select symbologies for decoding and to define the operating parameters to use during decoding The screen is displayed with the first field highlighted SYMBOLOGY LENGTHS _ CHECK CHARACTERS CODE 39 IE No INCLUDE No 125 o No INCLUDE No GUARD BARS No CODABAR No 2 No INCLUDE No CODE 128 No o o a aa FNC1 CHAR None UPC A No SUPPLEMENTS UPC E No SUPPLEMENTS EXPAND No EAN 8 No SUPPLEMENTS EAN 13 No SUPPLEMENTS ENABLE PHARMA CODE QUIET ZONE RATIO CODE VERIFICATION LIST SPACE TOLERANCE BAR TOLERANCE WIDE TO NARROW BAR RATIO 10 MINIMUM NUMBER OF BARS 11 SCANNER A DECODE DIRECTION SCANNER B DECODE DIRECTION Commands ESC Change SPACE Cursor Control ARROWS The default settings are displayed the first time you access this screen Make changes appropriate for your application If the factory defaults are satisfactory you can return to the Select Operation menu by pressing Esc twice The parameters on this screen e Enable symbologies for decoding e Enable specific length checking which serves two purposes provides data integrity for variable length symbologies
343. us If you select 2 5 or 2 or 5 the decoder must decode both the primary label and the supplement to produce a valid scan Publication 2755 833 Configuration Symbology 6 9 Expand UPC E Field Type Options No Yes Select Controls whether the UPC E bar code is transmitted in a 12 digit expanded format The default is No which means do not send the expanded form but the 6 digit compressed form EAN 8 Field Type Options No Yes Select Enables disables decoding of EAN 8 labels The default of No disables decoding of this symbology Select Yes to enable decoding EAN 8 Supplements Field Type Options None 2 Select 5 2o0r5 Auto Enables disables decoding of EAN 8 supplementary codes The default of None disables decoding of supplements for this symbology Options are None Disables decoding of supplementary codes 2 Enables decoding of 2 character supplementary codes 5 Enables decoding of 5 character supplementary codes 2or5 Enables decoding of 2 or 5 character supplementary codes Auto Enables decoder to auto discriminate supplementary codes None 2 or 5 on label _ The Auto Selection allows you to mix labels without supplements with labels containing 2 or 5 digit supplements The supplements are often a differentsize than the primary symbol Therefore it is critical that both the primary symbol and the supplement be present when the decoder is triggered If the decod
344. use of question mark 10 4 minimum number of bars Pharma Code 6 13 Mounting Dimensions 4 3 N NAK character 12 4 NEMA Type Enclosures 2 1 No Reads and capture count 7 7 No Read Counter 14 4 See also symbols not read counter No Read or No Match Output Condition 7 18 No Read Output Condition 7 17 No Read Replacement Strings 11 8 No Read Timer disabling 7 4 how to use as trigger source 7 4 Non Printable ASCII Characters use in Extended Match Code Tables 8 3 Non printable Characters I 2 Number of Bars minimum 6 13 Index l 7 O Obsolete Commands configure bar code data mask DM 15 77 configure pad data character PD 15 77 Operating Memory 3 6 Output Conditions autoload 7 19 autoload INPUT 7 20 buffer full 7 18 buffer overflow 7 18 match complete 7 17 match entry 7 17 no read package 7 17 no read or no match 7 18 read package 7 17 read and no match 7 18 Output Counters primary 9 5 14 4 Output Duration affect on LED 7 21 definition of 7 21 precision of timing 7 21 setting 7 21 Output Modules 2 9 AC output module application G 2 DC output module application G 1 specifications 2 9 18 3 using diode to protect module G 2 Output State 7 15 affect on LED 7 21 at power up 7 15 configuring 7 15 disabling during configuration 5 4 n
345. ut module application that is powered internally A DC input module is installed in position 8 of the I O Module Board A switch N O contact provides input to the module to load bar code data into the match code table The module and switch receive power from the 12 V DC terminal on the I O board Figure H 1 AutoLoad input module application powered internally MOD8 Only DC Input Module D 12 V DC Power Source Connector Block 8 Be Fuse j Conduit Hole Mechanical or ma PhotoElectric Switch Publication 2755 833 H 2 Electrical Interfaces for AutoLoad Applications Publication 2755 833 AutoLoad Input Module Application powered externally Figure H 2 illustrates the AutoLoad Input module application that is powered externally An AC DC input module is installed in position 8 of the I O Module Board A push button normally opened contact provides input to the module to load bar code data into the match code table The module and switch receive power from an external AC or DC source ATTENTION To guard against enclosure damage align the conduit so as to prevent unnecessary stress on the enclosure walls Figure H 2 AutoLoad input module application powered externally MOD8 Only AC DC Input O Module Auto Load Push Button Connector Block an 66 o o D Fuse Enclosure va Conduit Hole AC or D
346. ute any valid ASCII character for the Code 128 FNC1 Function 1 character The default is 0 None which means no substitution will take place The substitution will take place at the time of decoding and before any rules or match operations are applied Users frequently substitute the ASCII 29 character CTRL for the FNC1 character UPC A Field Type Options No Yes Select Enables disables decoding of UPC A labels The default of No disables decoding of this symbology Select Yes to enable decoding UPC A Supplements Field Type Options None 2 Select 5 2o0r5 Auto Enables disables decoding of UPC A supplementary codes The default of None disables decoding of supplements for this symbology Options are Publication 2755 833 6 8 Configuration Symbology None Disables decoding of supplementary codes 2 Enables decoding of 2 character supplementary codes 5 Enables decoding of 5 character supplementary codes 2o0r5 Enables decoding of 2 or 5 character supplementary codes Auto Enables decoder to auto discriminate supplementary codes None 2 or 5 on label The Auto Selection allows you to mix labels without supplements with labels containing 2 or 5 digit supplements The supplements are often a different size than the primary symbol Therefore it is critical that both the primary symbol and the supplement be present when the decoder is triggered If the decoder does not detect the suppleme
347. ve not previously satisfied this rule or any other Publication 2755 833 10 14 Configuration Host Message Replacement Rules Publication 2755 833 Assembling a Host Message Some applications demand nothing more than a stream of raw bar code data to be of use However interpretation and manipulation of that raw data proves useful in many production situations Host message replacement rules make that interpretation and manipulation possible When assembling a host message the decoder software calls upon the rule processor to fill in each position of the host message beginning with the first host message field and proceeding in order to the last Up to 16 fields can be specified for each message The exact number is determined by the setting in the Host Message Format screen s number of fields in host message If the number of fields in host message value is A then the number of fields in the host message will equal the value appearing in the Symbols per Package parameter on the Scanner Control screen However when its value is 1 to 16 then the decoder sends back exactly that number of fields In a case where the number of fields read does not equal the specified number of symbols per host message the host replacement rules if active will determine which data is sent to the host If the rules are inactive symbol data will be sent in the order decoded up to the value specified in the number of fields in the Host Message
348. w The options for each parameter are summarized in a table and explained more fully in the text The default setting for each parameter is displayed in bold letters in the table Package Detect Input A Filter Field Type Options Yes Select No Enables or disables the debounce filter for the package detect signal on Scanner A The default is No which disables the filter When disabled the decoder recognizes any signal greater than 1 millisecond as a start trigger ATTENTION Set output durations in multiples of 5 milliseconds Actual output will have a worst case precision of 0 to 5 milliseconds varying with the timing of the output Durations that are not set in multiples of 5 milliseconds will be rounded up to the nearest multiple of 5 and function within the same 0 to 5 millisecond precision For example a setting of 25 milliseconds will result in a duration of from 20 to 25 milliseconds A setting of 23 milliseconds will result in the same duration range Publication 2755 833 7 12 Configuration Scanner Control Primary Match Table Discrete I O Publication 2755 833 If the filter is enabled the decoder starts a timer whenever it senses a package detect signal longer than 1 millisecond This timer delays the decoder s reaction to the package detect for between 10 and 15 milliseconds to allow any bounce in the signal level to settle If the package detect signal is still present when the timer expires
349. ws or bolts with flat and split lockwashers and nuts Select a bolt that equals the thickness of the mounting surface plus the thickness of the washers plus at least 1 2 inch 12 7 mm to accommodate the mounting brackets of the decoder and the nut The NEMA Type 1 decoder has a standard IEC 320 power entry connector Figure 4 3 shows the available power cord options for the NEMA Type 1 decoder Unless an alternate power cord is ordered the decoder is shipped with a 120 VAC terminated 3 prong U S power cord Figure 4 3 Power cord options for NEMA Type 1 decoder ON OFF Power Switch A 9 1 IEC 320 aay l Connector Power Cord Options 120 VAC IEC 320 terminated three prong U S style power cord 6 ft 1 83m Default Shipped with decoder unless otherwise specified 240 VAC IEC 320 three wire U S Color Code unterminated power cord 6ft 1 83 m 240 VAC IEC 320 three wire European Harmonized Code unterminated power cord UL listing CSA approval not applicable when this cord is used 8 ft 2 in 2 5 m Publication 2755 833 eur gt pelg eur mag PUND yea UID EPEN IUM emey ana PUNAID yea MO PAA PAID ATTENTION Disconnect incoming power and make sure the power switch on the decoder is in the off position before connecting power cord to power source The NEMA Type 4 decoder has a standard 3 pin power connector with a separate ON
350. xamples Search Pattern 123ABC Replace Entire String With amp Incoming String 123ABC Result for Host Message 123ABC The search pattern matches the incoming string The Replace Entire String With value states that the string identified in the search pattern should be sent to the host Search Pattern 123ABC Replace Entire String With amp Incoming String 123ABC456 Result for Host Message 123ABC The search pattern matches the incoming string The Replace Entire String With value states that the string identified in the search pattern should be sent to the host This does not include the digits 456 Processing Order Matches are determined for each of the Host Message Fields 1 through 16 by applying the rule parameters as follows Publication 2755 833 10 8 Configuration Host Message Replacement Rules Configuration Parameters Publication 2755 833 The lowest numbered rule with the Host Message Field Number value of 1 or A will be applied first If that rule is successful no other rule specifying field 1 or AZZ will be applied This will continue until a rule satisfies the field or until all appropriate rules have been applied to field 1 The decoder will continue this process for all fields until each is satisfied or until all appropriate rules have failed No read Replacement strings if defined will be substituted for the data if the rules fail See Chapter 11 Important You will want to set up y
351. y exist in operating memory to perform all functions Initially set to factory defaults these parameters can be changed using the AUX terminal configuration and ASCII or PCCC host commands With the exception of specific host communication parameters See Chapter 12 all parameters take effect immediately when changed You can use the Default command to reset the operating memory to factory defaults The Save command will copy the contents of operating memory into storage memory When you issue a Recall the decoder copies the Saved parameters from storage memory into operating memory The decoders are designed to retain configuration in operating memory even during short term power interruptions Refer to Chapter 2 for information about memory backup Storage Memory Within the decoder there is permanently stored a copy of the factory default configuration parameters You cannot modify this copy but can copy them into the operating memory at any time using the Default command In addition the decoder can retain in storage memory a copy of the configuration parameters you have set You can use the Save command to copy the operating memory into storage memory The Recall command copies the contents of storage memory back into the operating memory You will find this capability useful for troubleshooting custom configurations for making temporary changes on line and for use with Autoload and Lot The Autoload parameter in either the
352. y necessary to connect N A 2755 NC16 the decoder to a handheld scanner cable These scanners require the 2755 NC 16 Gun Adapter to function with these decoders Publication 2755 833 Scanner L7 L9 L4 L5 Catalog Number 2755 NC17 2755 CT1 2755 CY1 Decoder Features 2 13 Package Detectors for Scanners Optional for Catalog No 2755 L7 L9 Scan Head DC retroflective detector with an operating range up to 18 feet 5 49 meters Mounts from front or rear plus head rotation allows additional flexibility in selecting sending direc tion Optional for Catalog No 2755 L7 L9 Scan Head Polarized beam retroflective detector has a maximum operating distance of 10 feet 3 03 meters or 8 feet 2 43 meters with a 2 to 1 operating margin Includes mounting brackets for single hole or flat surface mounti tion Optional for Catalog No 2755 L4 L5 Scan Head Polarized beam retroflective detector has a maximum operating ng Optional for Catalog No 2755 L4 L5 Scan Head DC retroflective detector with an operating range up to 18 feet 5 49 meters Mounts from front or rear plus head rotation allows additional flexibility in selecting sending direc distance of 10 feet 3 03 meters or 8 feet 2 43 meters with a 2 to 1 operating margin Includes mounting brackets for single hole or flat surface mounting Product We recommend using Allen Bradley Photoswitch package

2755-833, DS/DD Ser.B Bar Code Decoders User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents